Tnd002279000000000000mah34102 PDF

CIDCO OF MAHARASHTRA LIMITED. Sl.Pg.No.
0
C.A.NO. 33/CIDCO/EE(Elect-RP)/2017-18
CITY & INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION OF

MAHARASHTRA LIMITED
VOLUME–II : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(ELECTRICAL WORKS) & DRAWINGS
Name of Work : Renovation & Replacement of Electrical Installations & Fire Fighting
System at Juinagar Railway Station cum Commercial Complex on MBR
Corridor, Navi Mumbai.
C.A. No. : 33/CIDCO/EE(Elect-RP)/2017-18
Due On : 19/12/2017 17.01 hrs. to 20/12/2017 17.00 hrs. on website

cidco.maharashtra.etenders.in
Price : Rs. 12,600/- (Rupees Twelve Thousand and Six Hundred only)
(Including 5% GST) (Non-Refundable)
¾ VOLUME – I : Contract Conditions & Bill of Quantities (BOQ)

¾ VOLUME – II : Technical Specifications (Electrical Works) & Drawings
OFFICE
SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER (ELECT-PROJ.)
CIDCO OF MAHARASHTRA LIMITED,
6th FLOOR, CIDCO BHAVAN,
CBD-BELAPUR, NAVI MUMBAI.
CIDCO OF MAHARASHTRA LIMITED. Sl.Pg.No. 1
Name of Work : Renovation & Replacement of Electrical Installations & Fire

Fighting System at Juinagar Railway Station cum Commercial
Complex on MBR Corridor, Navi Mumbai.
VOLUME–II : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

& DRAWINGS
INDEX
SR. Page Number

CONTENTS
NO. From To
I Index 1 2
II Scope of Work (Electrical) 3 7
III Technical Specifications for Electrical Works
1 Detailed Scope includes Supply, Installation, Testing 8 14
& Commissioning
2 General 15 16
3 Cable Work 17 29
4 Installation of Cables 30 49
5 Earthing 50 58
6 Lighting Arrestor System (ESE Type) 59 60
7 Safety Materials 61 63
8 415 V Switchgear Main Board (L.T. Panel) 64 76
9 Power Factor Improvement 77 79
10 MCB Distribution Boards (Sub Distribution Boards) 80 85
11 Conduiting and Wiring 86 117
12 Fixing Switch Boxes and Accessories 118 118
13 Testing of Installation for Wiring 119 122
14 Installation 123 126
15 Important Instruction for Point Wiring Electrical Works 127 130
16 Testing of Installation 131 134
17 Test Certificate 135 135
SR. Page Number

CONTENTS
NO. From To
18 Technical Specification for Installation 136 143

19 Technical Specification for Testing & Commissioning 144 145
20 Technical Specification for Telephone Distribution 146 147
System
21 Diesel Generating Set 148 158
22 Cable Joints & End Termination Kits (LT/HT Cables) 159 160
23 HT Metering Cubicle 161 162
24 LED Street Light Fixtures 163 187
25 PVC / XLPE Cables (CB) 188 202
26 Fire Fighting 203 242
27 Fire Protection System 243 312
28 Plumbing 313 315
IV Codes and Standards 316 319
V List of Approved Makes of Material for 320 330

Electrical/ Mechanical items
VI List of Drawings 331 331
VII Drawings 332 336
Signature of Bidder Superintending Engineer (Elect-Proj.)

Date : Date :
SCOPE OF WORK (ELECTRICAL)
The Scope of the work includes all electrical works at Juinagar Railway
Station cum commercial Complex, Juinagar, Navi Mumbai.
Broadly the electrical works covers the following :
i) Providing internal electrification
ii) Installation of CCTV/telecommunication system.
iii) Fire fighting installation.
iv) Area/forecourt Street lighting
v) External electrification which includes Substation and allied works.
vi) Obtaining power supply to the Railway Complex.
vii) CCTV and telecommunication network.
ix) Co-ordination with CIDCO/NMMC /MSEDCL/ Railway/PWD/Fire Dept. /

Civil Design Dept.CIDCO & any other statutory Authority and
Architects/Consultants.
The Scope of work also includes Complete renovation & repairs of Railway
Station Complex, Platform area, Forecourt Areas Electrification works,
Telephonic Network, Fire Fighting System, including necessary co-ordination
with CIDCO/ Railway/MSEDCL/PWD / Fire Dept. / Civil Design Dept
CIDCO / Consultant authority. Further the successful agency has to co-
ordinate with civil agencies who are carrying out civil works at Railway
Stations.
GENERAL:
The Scope of work consists of :
1.0 Electrification work with providing LED Fittings of Railway &

Commercial Complex area, Forecourt area,
a) Laying of LT Cable network
b) Providing 62.5 KVA D.G. Set

c) Fire Fighting System
d) Fire Detection Alarm System, Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System
e) Providing Main LT Panels
f) Providing MCBDB
g) Cables & Terminations work, Cable tray
h) Earthing & Safety Systems
i) Installation of CCTV / Telecommunication System
j) Providing Switch Sockets, Point wiring,
k) LED Light Fixtures
l) Street Light Poles
m) Allied Civil works
n) Dismantling existing old Electrical / Mechanical / D.G. Set

installations
o) Definition of Indoor Substation:
11/0.4KV Indoor Substation means distribution transformers, 11 KV

panels and LT panels should be indoor, i.e inside the substation
building.
The Scope of work also includes obtaining power supply sanctions

from MSEDCL in the name of Railway Authority including necessary
co-ordination with Railway / MSEDCL/PWD authority. Further the
successful agency has to co-ordinate with civil agencies who are
carrying out civil works at both Railway Stations.
3.0 Providing & Commissioning of :
a) Laying of LT Cable network
b) Providing 62.5 KVA D.G. Set
c) Fire Fighting System
d) Fire Detection Alarm System, Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System

e) Providing Main LT Panels
f) Providing MCBDB
g) Cables & Terminations work, Cable tray
h) Earthing & Safety Systems
i) Installation of CCTV / Telecommunication System
j) Providing Switch Sockets, Point wiring,
k) LED Light Fixtures
l) Street Light Poles
m) Allied Civil works
n) Dismantling existing old Electrical / Mechanical / D.G. Set

installations
o) 11/0.4 KV substation equipments, indoor type with 11/0.4 KV

Transformer (Indoor type), L.T. XLPE armoured cable, Distribution
feeder pillars, etc.
p) L.T. Distribution network consisting of feeder pillars/minipillars

(outdoor type) complete with L.T. underground XLPE armoured cable
network upto consumer’s Electric meter room.
q) All related allied works like trenching, control wiring of panels,

earthing, safety equipments & obtaining statutory approvals.
1.0 The entire electrical works should be carried out in accordance

with the specifications without any extra cost. The work shall
conform to latest edition of Indian Standard Specifications &
Indian Electricity Rules.
2.0 The works shall be completed as per the requirement of
ISO:9002 & all required documents for the same shall be
made available.
3.0 The Technical specification of all the equipment and the
quantities required of various accessories & auxiliaries are
enclosed. The contractor shall also ascertain the quantities of
items such as cables, earthing material, trays, lighting fixtures,

supporting steel, etc. and procure the material as per
requirement. Excess material brought to site & not installed
shall not be accepted by CIDCO nor it will be paid for.
4.0 Inspection:
4.1 All equipment shall be offered for inspection.
4.2 The inspection shall be carried out by CIDCO, MSEDCL, Fire Dept. &
Consultant testing division representative at any stage of
manufacturing. The contractor shall give free access to the inspector
at a reasonable notice.
4.3 The equipment shall be offered for final inspection at least fifteen
days in advance to enable CIDCO to witness the acceptance tests.
4.4 No equipment shall be dispatched to site from the manufacturers
work unless dispatch clearance certificate is issued by the inspecting
authority of CIDCO/Consultant.
4.5 The contractor shall arrange for the inspection of the equipment by
CIDCO/Consultants representative & co-ordinate with them for timely
dispatches at no extra cost to CIDCO, including traveling & boarding
expenses.
5.0 Documentation:
5.1 The contractor on receipt of LOI shall submit five sets of relevant
descriptive & illustrative literature and general arrangement,
schematic drawings, foundation plans, and any other drawings and
the general technical particulars of all the equipment to be supplied.
5.2 On completion of the above works, and commissioning, the
contractor shall prepare a set of “as built drawings”, compile all the
vendor drawings, shop test reports, inspection reports, site test
reports, operation and maintenance literature of major equipments
for handing over to CIDCO. This shall be compiled in four sets duly
bound in a neat handy book. Separate comprehensive operation &

maintenance manual should be also be submitted in four sets.
6.0 Supervision of Erection:

The contractor shall arrange for a trained supervisor of respective
equipment manufacturer during installation, testing & commissioning
who will direct the sequence of erection, make necessary
adjustments/settings, make the equipment ready for testing, certify
the pre-commissioning checks and give permission for
commissioning. This shall be arranged by the contractor at no extra
cost to CIDCO.
7.0 The drawings given in the tender are indicative. The successful
agency will have to make his own assessment before execution of
work.

Date : Date :
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK FOR PROPOSED PROJECT
1.1 THE DETAILED SCOPE INCLUDES SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING

& COMMISSIONING OF FOLLOWING:
The scope of work under this contract comprises Supply, installation,

Testing & Commissioning Internal & external Electrical work, for
Juinagar Railway Station & Commercial Complex, Juinagar, Navi
Mumbai. The work shall be carried out and completed under this
contract in every respect in conformity with the current rules and
regulations of the local electricity authority, the Indian Standard
Institution, Relevant IS as modified upto date. Where IS codes do not
exist, the British Standards shall be followed. IE Rules 1956 as amended
upto date, for Electrical Works (Part - I) Internal, (Part -II) External 2005
and (Part - IV) 2007, with correction slips upto the date of Tendering
and with the directions of and to the satisfaction of the Architect/
Consultant/ Owner/PMC. The Contractor shall supply all labour and
supply and install all materials, appliances, equipment necessary for the
complete provision and testing of the whole Electrical Installation as
specified herein and shown on the drawings. This also includes any
material, appliances, equipment not specifically mentioned herein or
noted on the drawings as being furnished or installed but which are
necessary and customary to make complete installation with all outlets
for power, light, conduits and other electrical systems shown on the
schedule or described herein, properly connected and in working
condition.
The work shall include all incidental jobs connected with electrical
installation such as cutting/drilling and grouting for fixing of fixtures,
equipment etc.
The work as indicated in the scope of work attached herewith includes

any modification/addition/alteration required.
The brief description of the scope of internal and external electrification,

works under this contract shall include the design, engineering,
manufacture, assembly, testing, delivery, erection and commissioning of
electrical system including supply of all material, labour, Transport,
Wastage & Packing etc. for followings -
SCOPE OF WORK
1.1.1 Supplying Main LT Panel, APFC Panel, Main DB, LED Fixtures, Street
Lighting, CCTV / Telecommunication System, Fire Pumps, Supply
62.5kVA DG sets & its AMF control panel.
• Excavation of Soft Rock for laying of Earthing conductors etc in

soft soil.
• Excavation in Hard Rock for laying of Earthing conductors laying

etc.
• Excavation for Cable laying in SOFT ROCK shall include

readymade trenches/ Hume pipes/ HDPE pipes on cable trays
with end termination.
1.1.2 LT cabling work : LT - XLPE armoured cable / PVC armoured cable,

Various Switchboards, AC Equipments and Power and lighting
Distribution Boards, water pumps and Fire pumps etc.
1.1.3 Supply & Installation Miscellaneous Item like pipes, Cable Trays, steel
fabrication etc.
1.1.4 Mains and Sub mains between various panels, meter boards and
distribution boards.
1.1.5 SITC of Sub and branch distribution boards, MCB's and RCCB's etc.
1.1.6 SITC of Cable trays of various sizes for cable laying suitably fixed to
ceiling / wall inside the premises with necessary supports.
1.1.7 SITC of External Lighting fixtures : Supply & Fixing of Light fittings with
suitable fixing accessories for the common areas such as substation,
concourse forecourt, lobby common area, staircase areas etc,. External
Lighting arrangements for Parking area, Roads, Focus lighting including

cabling, lighting poles etc.
1.1.8 Wiring in conduit for various Light Fittings / Plug points / UPS plug
points etc.
1.1.9 Earthing/ Grounding with necessary copper / GI / earth pits. As per

BOQ
1.1.10 SITC Lightning Arrestors System
1.1.11 All Internal & External electrification work subject to complete the job up
to client satisfaction.
1.1.12 Point wiring with Conduits for all type of wiring including circuits, sub
mains, light, fans, power and AC etc.
1.1.13 Switches and socket outlets, conduiting for light, fans, plug, power, Tel,
TV, computer network, Industrial raw power socket etc with suitable
MS/GI boxes with accessories complete.
1.1.14 SITC Voice & Data networking.
1.1.15 Installation, Testing & commissioning of CCTV complete as per BOQ.
1.1.16 SITC of Fire alarm system as per BOQ.
1.1.17 Miscellaneous works required for system completion.
1.1.18 Preparation of as built drawings for all the systems.
1.1.19 Insurance for all the materials and complete work.
1.2 All the above work shall be complete in all respects up to the satisfaction
of architect, consultant, Client and Engineer as per the details
mentioned in BOQ and drawings supplied time to time. Unless and
otherwise mentioned in the tender documents the following scope of
works shall be done by the contractor, and therefore their cost shall be
deemed to be included in their tendered cost:
a. Furnishing of all labour , skilled and unskilled, supervisory and

administrative personnel, erection tools and tackles, testing
equipment, implements, supplies, consumables like welding rods
and gas, oil and grease, cleaning fluids, insulating tape, anti
corrosive paints, jute cotton waste etc., and hardware for timely
and efficient execution of the erection work.
b. Transport vehicles necessary for efficient transportation of

equipment from Owner's stores to site of erection and excess
materials back to owner's stores.
c. Complete assembly, erection and connection, testing and

commissioning, putting into successful and satisfactory
commercial operations of above equipment.
d. The items of work to be performed on all equipment and

materials shall include but not limited to the following:
i. Receiving, unloading and transportation at site. (To Owner

or Contractor's stores and from their upto actual place of
erection).
ii. Storing at site with suitable all weather protection.
iii. Assemblies, erection and complete Installation.
iv. Necessary coordination between work done by other

Contractors. Showing number and size of cables in cable
tray/trench, Fixing Details of Cable Trays.
d. Layout shall also show point wiring /telephone/TV outlets and

routing of conduits.
e. Any other drawing required for completion of the project if

required.
f. CCTV & FAS routing of conduits Drawings.
The above mentioned drawings shall be prepared in AutoCAD

2006 shall be submitted in minimum A1 size on a scale as decided by
the Consultant.
1.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS (2 sets of soft copies on CD and six sets of hard
copies duly wound): As part of the handing over documents after
successful completion of the work, the Bidder shall submit to the
Owner/Architect/Consultant/PMC AS BUILT drawings drawn at
approved scale indicating the complete Electrical system "As installed".

These drawings shall be prepared in AutoCAD 2006. These drawings
shall in particular, give the following information:
a. D. G. Set, L.T. Panels, Meter Boards, Earthing pits, etc.
b. Street Lighting Arrangement
b. Cables, dummy pipes, earthing and all other services covered

under this contract.
c. Complete Schematic Diagram of the installation of all services

with cable sizes etc.
d. Location of all Railway area, Commercial Area, Forecourt area,

lighting points, Power Points, Telephone points, Energy Meter with
complete scheme.
e. Routing of Conduits, Raceways, Sub main Conduiting, Cable

Trays, Cabling and Earthing strips/wires.
1.3.1 Other Drawings which are necessary to complete the Project.
1.3.1.1 No completion certificate will be issued until the completion drawings in

the above mentioned forms are submitted. The drawings will be
prepared and submitted by the contractor without any extra charge.
1.4 OTHER RELATED INFORMATION:
1. All Annexure of this specification duly filled in and signed by the

contractor.
2. Transportation/shipping dimensions and weights, space required for

handling parts for maintenance.
3. Type test certificates for all equipment on similar type of equipment.
4. Cable schedule & interconnection chart.
5. Foundation details and plan, loading details for all equipment.
6. Test certificates, Test Procedures at sites.
7. Test reports of all tests carried out at site.
8. Spare part lists

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1.5.1 As part of the handing over documents, the Bidder shall submit 6 draft
copies + soft copies in CD's detailed installation, operation and
maintenance manuals/schedule & log sheets for all systems and
equipment of manufacturers for all items of equipment included in this
contract, together with all relevant data sheet, spare parts catalogues,
repairs, assembly and adjustment procedure etc to the Engineer. The
manuals shall contain basis of design, detailed technical data and
drawings for each equipment as installed, the erection, testing,
operation and maintenance procedures, spare parts manual and
recommended spares for 3 year period of maintenance of each
equipment including tools & tackles.
1.5.2 The Contractor shall also submit the Preventive maintenance schedule
for the equipment supplied.
1.5.3 The Contractor shall submit four sets of the final Manuals (incorporating
comments, if any, of Engineer) complete in all respects.
1.6 IMPORT LICENSE
1.6.1 For importing any item if any import license/L.C. is required, the
Contractor shall make required arrangements. Any delay on this
account shall be to Contractors account.
1.7 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
1.7.1 The Bidder shall train Owner's Personnel to operate the equipment
installed, to carry out routine maintenance work including lubrication,
overhauling, adjustments, testing, minor repairs and replacement.
Nothing extra shall be payable.
1.7.2 Training shall be done before the expiry of the defects liability period.
The period of training shall be mutually agreed upon by Owner and
Contractor.
1.7.3 Owner reserves the right to inspect any equipment/material to be

supplied by the Bidder as part of his scope of work, at manufacturer's
works. The Bidder shall provide and secure for the Owner's Authorized
Representative every reasonable access and facility at the manufacturer

works for inspection and testing.
1.8 MAKE OF MATERIALS /MATERIAL SAMPLE
1.8.1 The Bidder shall supply the material as per list of Approved make of
material enclosed in the contract. Alternative make shall be used with
the specific written approval of Consultant/ Owner. It shall also be the
responsibility of the Contractor to submit without any extra charge the
samples of the materials/equipment as and when asked by the
Architect/Consultant. Due to non‐availability of any material mentioned
in the specifications, substitute material shall be used only after detail of
material accompanied by all technical data, sizes, particulars of
material and manufacturers name along with the credit due to Owner, if
any, shall be submitted to Owner for obtaining written approval from
Owner / Consultant, for such material.
2.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 The entire electrical installation shall be carried out in accordance with
Indian electricity code & relevant IS standards upto date. The work shall
also comply with all statutory regulations of supply agencies, state
inspection authorities & fire regulations so far as these become
applicable to the installation.
2.1.2 Electrical work in general shall be carried out as per following
specifications.
2.1.3 Wherever this specifications calls for a higher standard of material and
or workmanship than those required by any of the above mentions
regulations and specification then the specification here under shall take
precedence over the said regulations and standards.
2.1.4 The details of scope of work subhead wise are given in the subsequent
paras. The quantities worked out in schedule of quantities are based on
particular equipment considered at design stage. The contractor is
required to recheck the quantities based on equipment offered by him to
achieve required parameters.
2.1.5 Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary statutory
approvals, clearances, sanctions, drawing approvals & getting actual
connections.
2.1.6 Definition of terms pertaining to all technical requirements as per IEE /
IS shall apply.
2.1.7 Contractor shall submit all necessary drawings for scrutiny & approval
by Engineer/Consultant prior to taking up of works. Contractor shall
immediately bring out the difficulties faced in execution of works to the
notice of Engineer / Owner / Consultant.
2.1.8 All material, equipment, fittings used in the installation shall be of
approved quality confirming to relevant IS specifications.
2.1.9 On completion of works contractor shall carry out all necessary test such
as insulation resistance test, continuity of conductor & earth resistance &
functional tests along with commissioning checks to the satisfaction of
Consultant / Engineer.
2.1.10 Contractor shall furnish necessary test certificates as required by
authorities & Consultant.
2.1.11 List of standards relevant to the works is enclosed.
2.1.12 Installation of equipment shall include all necessary works & fixing
accessories like hardware, clamps, round blocks, support boxes etc.
required for completing installing satisfactorily.
2.1.13 Complete room by room technical & functional checking will be done
for equipment & installation before handling over & a consolidated
acceptance test report shall be prepared by contractor based on formats
given along with test certificates of bought out items, certificates of tests
carried out at site. The acceptance test will be jointly done & signed by
all the parties noting remarks.
2.1.14 The labels shall be engraved / anodized aluminium with white
letters on black background or non‐ removable stickers. The nameplates
shall not be screwed on. In additions to component labels, each cubicle
door shall bear a large identification label and the board shall
include a large, prominent overall identification Label.
2.2 PAINTING
2.2.1 Care shall be taken in workmanship and selection of materials to
prevent the occurrence of any form of damage or corrosion due to
damp or humid conditions.
2.2.2 The Board shall be prepared, primed, filled and painted to the highest
standards.
2.2.3 All items shall be cleaned and deburred, after fabrication and welding is
completed. External surfaces shall be filled and rubbed down as
necessary to obtain a perfectly flat smooth surface, free from blemishes
and imperfections. Panel Colour shade RL7035 as per IS : 5.
2.2.4 Final paint colour shed shall be pre approved by the Consultant /
Owner.
2.3 CLEARANCE
2.3.1 Minimum insulator lengths and clearances in air shall be not less than
those specified for class A switchgear in IS: 3427.
2.4 TEMPERATURE RISE
2.4.1 The design ambient shall be 50 deg. C. The limits of temperature rise
determined in accordance with the relevant standard, shall be reduced
such that the final temperature obtained at site does not exceed the final
temperature computed by the addition of the design ambient
temperature.
3.0 CABLE WORK
3.1 SCOPE
This section covers supply, laying and jointing as required and testing
and energizing all cable work.
3.2 SPECIFICATION OF CABLE
3.2.1 11KV Grade XLPE insulated PVC sheathed round armoured

Aluminum/Copper cable shall be 3 core earthed of sizes as specified in
BOQ . The cable shall conform to IS‐1554, Part II
3.2.2 11KV Grade XLPE insulated PVC sheathed round armoured

Aluminum/Copper cable shall be 31/2/4 core of sizes as specified. The
cable shall conform to IS: 1554, Part-I.
3.2.3 All control wires shall be 650V grade copper conductor Halogen free
fire retardant or FRLS PVC insulated, conforming to IS: 1554 Part I. The
minimum size of the control wires shall be 1.5 sq.mm.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1 Cable shall be laid in ground, trenches, cable trays and on wall as
specified. Installation shall include all supports and clamps as required.
The complete work shall be in accordance to specifications. As far as
possible cables shall not be fixed on walls directly but laid on cable
trays.
3.4 TESTING
3.4.1 Testing of the complete cable installation shall be as per IE rules
3.5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
3.5.1 This technical specification covers complete design, engineering,

manufacture, inspection packing and forwarding and testing,
commissioning, energizing (a) power cables (b) GI perforated cable
trays complete in all respects along with their supporting/fixing
arrangements (c) laying & fixing of cable trays on supporting system,
earthing of cable trays and laying of various sizes of power & cables in
cable trays, fixing of cables on trays, termination, ferruling of cable
strands, marking of lugs & cable glands, complete erection, testing and
commissioning at site of FRLS power, control cables, cable trays and
cabling etc. as detailed hereinafter in the specification.
3.5.2 Complete laying jointing, preparation of end terminals, marking, fixing

of lugs & cable glands, its connection to the equipment and to overhead
line with cable boxes/suitable cable termination end, testing and
commissioning of HT Cables, L.T. power cables, D.C. cables and
control cables etc. at site. All cable work and cable trays as per
specifications schedule of quantities and drawings.
* LT XLPE Cables
Voltage Grade : 1100 V
Relevant Standards : IS 7098 ( Part - 1 ) 1988, IS
up to date amendments :
Max Conductor Temp in Operation : 90 C
Max Temp during Short Circuit : 250 C
Short Circuit Rating Duration : 1 Second
Type of Insulation : XLPE
Type of Conductor : Copper / Aluminium as per
Type of Armour : GI Round as per cable
Type of Outer Sheath : FRLS PVC
Selection Criteria : up to 16 sqmm CU and

Inclusive and above Al
* LT PVC Cables
Voltage Grade : 1100 V
Relevant Standards : IS 7098 ( Part – 1 ) 1988, IS 1554 part I
Max Conductor Temp in Operation : 70 C
Max Temp during Short Circuit : 160 C
Short Circuit Rating Duration : 1 Second

Type of Insulation : FRLS PVC
Type of Conductor : Copper / Aluminum as per cable schedule
Type of Armour : GI Round / Strip as per cable schedule
Type of Outer Sheath : FRLS PVC
Selection Criteria : Upto 16 sq.mm and Inclusive Cu & above
* CONTROL WIRES
All control wires shall be 650 V grade copper conductor Halogen free
Fire retardant or FRLS PVC insulate, confirming IS: 1554 part I, the
minimum size of control wire shall be 1.5 sq.mm.
3.6 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
3.6.1 The materials shall conform to the latest editions of the following
Indian/International Standards:
1. IS 7098 Part 2 : 1985 XLPE insulated PVC sheathed cables For

working voltages from 3.3 kV up to and including 33 kV
2. IS 5831 : 1984 PVC Insulation and Sheath of electric Cables
3. IS 8130:1984 Conductors for insulated electric cables and

flexible cords.
4. IS 613:1984 Copper rods and bars for electrical purposes.
5. IS 3975:1988 Mild steel wires, formed and tapes for armouring

of cable.
6. IS 10810:1984 Method of tests for cables.
7. IEEE‐383:1974 Standard for type test of class IE electric cables,

field splices, and connections for nuclear power generating
stations.
8. ASTM‐D2843,1993 Standard test method for density of smoke

from burning or decomposition of plastics.
9. ASTM‐D2863, 1991 Standard test method for measuring

minimum oxygen concentration to support candle like
combustion of plastics (oxygen index).
10. NEMA‐WC5,1992 Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and cable for

the transmission and distribution of Electrical Energy.
11. IEC:754 Test on gases evolved during combustion of electric

cables ‐
12. (Part‐1):1994 Determination of the amount of halogen acid gas

evolved during combustion of polymeric materials taken from
cables.
13. IEC:332 Test on electric cables under fire conditions
14. (Part I):1993 Test on a single vertical insulated wire or cable.
15. IS 3961 Recommended current rating for cables ‐
16. (Part II):1967 PVC insulated and PVC sheathed heavy duty
cables.
17. IS 10418:1982 Drums for electric cables.
Cables conforming to other internationally accepted standards, which

ensure equal or higher quality than the standards mentioned above,
would also be acceptable. In case the Bidders who wish to offer material
conforming to the other standards, salient points of difference
between the standards adopted and the specific standards shall be
clearly brought out in relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards
with authentic English Translations shall be furnished along with the
offer. In case of conflict the order of precedence shall be (i) IS, (ii) IEC,
(iii) Other standards. In case of any difference between provisions of
these standards and provisions of this specification, the provisions
contained in this specification shall prevail.
3.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.7.1 All cables shall be suitable for high ambient, high humid tropical Indian
Climatic conditions. Cables shall be designed to withstand the
mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses under the unforeseen steady
state and transient conditions and shall be suitable for proposed
method of installation.
3.8 CONDUCTOR
3.8.1 The conductor shall be Aluminum / Copper as specified in the Schedule

of Quantities. It shall be smooth, uniform in quality and free from scale
and other defects. The stranded conductor shall be clean and
reasonably uniform in size and shape. The conductor shall be compact
circular having resistance within limits as specified in Table‐2 of IS:
8130 /1984 and any amendment thereof.
3.9 CONDUCTOR SHIELD
3.9.1 Conductor shield shall be extruded in the same operation as the
insulation. The semi‐conductor polymer shall be cross linked.
3.10 INSULATION
3.10.1 Insulation shall be cross linked polyethylene and it shall preferably be
gas‐cured for XLPE cables.
3.10.2 The XLPE insulation shall be suitable for specified system voltage.
The manufacturing process shall ensure that insulation shall be free
from voids. The insulation shall withstand mechanical and thermal
stresses under steady state and transient operating conditions. The
extrusion method shall give very smooth interface between
semi‐conducting screen and insulation. The insulation of the cables
shall be of high standard quality and conform to Clause‐11 of IS: 7098
(Part‐II)/1985 or latest amendment thereof.
3.10.3 Insulation shall be PVC for PVC cable as specified in the Schedule of
quantities.
3.10.4 Cable shall be provided with copper metallic screen suitable for carrying
earth fault current. For single core armoured cables the armouring shall
constitute the metallic part of the screening.
3.11 SHEATH
3.11.1 Inner Sheath: In case of cables consisting of two or more cores inner
sheath suitable to withstand the site conditions and the desired
temperature shall be provided on the individual core and then
surrounded by common covering applied either by extrusion or
wrapping of a filling material containing thermoplastic material. It shall
be of adequate thickness and applied by continuous process to produce
a sheath of consistent quality free from all defects. PVC sheath shall be
extruded. The circularity of the cable should be maintained.
3.11.2 Outer Sheath: This is extruded over the armour for armoured
cables and cover the inner sheath for unarmoured cables. It shall be
specially formulated heat resistant black PVC compound conforming to
the requirement of type ST2 of IS:5831‐1984, extruded to form the
outer sheath. The cable should also offer a specially formulated FRLS for
outer sheath. Suitable additives be added to prevent attack by rodents
and termites. All serving must be given anti‐termite treatment. The
thickness of the sheaths shall be as per relevant standards.
3.11.3 All armoured and multi‐core un‐armoured cables shall have distinct
extruded inner PVC sheath of black colour.
3.11.4 Armouring ‐ Material for armour for Single Core Cable shall be
Aluminum wire. For Multicore cable it shall be GS wire round.
Armouring shall be as per relevant IS and it shall have minimum 90%
coverage. The dimensions of round steel wire shall be as per IS: 7098
(Part‐II)/1985 and its latest amendment and wire shall conform to
latest provisions of IS: 3975 – 1988 and amendment thereof.
3.11.5 Breaking Load of the joints shall be minimum 95% of the normal
armour.
3.11.6 Outer Sheath – Extruded PVC outer sheath of type ST‐2 as per IS:
5831/1984 and its latest amendment shall be applied over armouring
with suitable additives to prevent attack by rodent and termite and its
thickness shall be in accordance with Clause –17.32 of IS:7098
(Part‐III)/1985 and latest amendment thereof
3.11.7 FRLS Properties ‐ All cable shall be Flame Retardant Low Smoke type.
3.12 OUTER SHEATH:
3.12.1 All cables specified in the Schedule of Quantities shall have Outer
sheath to reduce the Fire hazard.
3.13 ARMOUR
3.13.1 The armour may be of galvanized steel wires.
3.14 SERVING
3.14.1 The cable serving shall protect the cable sheath and armour from
electrolysis caused by stray currents, and from galvanic action. It shall
also protect the cable from mechanical damage and corrosion.
3.15 GENERAL
3.15.1 The cable shall withstand all mechanical and thermal stresses under
steady state and transient operating conditions.
3.16 OPERATION
3.16.1 Cable shall be suitable for lying in trenches / ducts and direct in ground.
3.16.2 Cables shall have heat and moisture resistant properties. These shall be
of type and design, with proven record of distribution network service.
3.17 LENGTHS
3.17.1 The cables shall be supplied in standard drum lengths i.e. 250
/500/1000 Meters. Non‐standard length is not acceptable.
3.18 TEMPERATURE RISE
3.18.1 The maximum conductor temperature shall not exceed 90 degree C

during continuous operation at full rated current. The temperature after
short circuit for 1.0 second shall not exceed 250 degree C with initial
conductor temperature of 90 degree C.
3.18.2 Bidder shall give the following information in the Bid for each conductor
cross section
a. Rated continuous current
b. Rated 1.0 second short circuit / short time current
3.18.3 Rating factor shall be given by the Bidder for the following:
a. Variation in ground temperature
b. Variation in soil thermal resistivity.

c. Variation of Ambient Temperature

d. For the cables laid side by side, at ID spacing and in Tier
formation.
3.18.4 The Bidder shall also indicate the percentage overload that the cable
can carry and its duration, when operating initially at a conductor
temperature of 90 degree C, with peak conductor temperature of 130
degree C.
3.19 SUBMITTALS
3.19.1 Cable schedules & Shop Floor Drawings for cable laying and routing.
3.19.2 Layout of various cables on cable tray / trench along with sections
showing no. of cables, distance between cables etc, size of cable trays
etc.
3.19.3 Cable tray layout, as per site condition, duly coordinated with other
services.
3.19.4 Weight of one meter of finished product of cable of various sizes and
ratings.
3.19.5 Weight of one meter of bare conductor used for cables of various sizes
and ratings.
3.20 TEST REPORTS
3.20.1 All tests as per relevant IS shall be conducted and shall be witnessed by
the Client.
3.20.2 Routine test certificates for each cable.
3.20.3 The following shall constitute routine tests:
a. Conductor resistance test
b. Partial discharge test (for screened cables only)
c. High voltage tests.
3.20.4 Optional tests Cold impact tests for outer sheath (IS:5831‐1984) shall
constitute the optional tests.
3.21 TYPE TESTS
3.21.1 The Bidder shall furnish two (2) copies of type test certificates
conducted on similar cables along with the
a. Partial discharge test
b. Bending test followed by partial discharge c. Dielectric power

factor as function of
d. Dielectric power factor as function of temperature
e. Heating cycle test followed by dielectric power factor as a

function of voltage and partial discharge tests.
h. FRLS Properties Test.
3.21.2 Routine and Acceptance tests as laid down in IS: 7098 (Part‐II) 1985
with latest amendment thereof shall be carried out by the
client/consultant sample selected at random as per relevant ISS. In
addition to above, length check on one drum per inspection lot shall
also be carried out by the Client / consultant for which Supplier shall
make all necessary arrangements and provide all necessary facilities at
his own cost.
3.22 STORAGE AND HANDLING

3.22.1 All cables shall be inspected upon receipt at site and checked for any
damage during transit. Cable drums shall be stored on a well drained,
hard surface, preferably of concrete, so that the drums do not sink in the
ground causing rot and damage to the cable drums.
3.22.2 During storage periodical rolling of drums once in 3 months through
90o shall be done. Rolling shall be done in the direction of the arrow
marked on the drum.
3.22.3 It should be ensured that both ends of the cable are properly
sealed to prevent ingress/absorption of moisture by the insulation.
3.22.4 Protection from rain and sun shall be ensured. Sufficient ventilation
between cable drums, should be ensured during storage.
3.22.5 The drums shall always be rested on the flanges and not on the flat
sides.
3.22.6 A layer of water proof paper shall be applied to the surface of the
drums and over the outer most cable layer.
3.22.7 A clear space of at least 40mm shall be left between the cables and the
logging.
3.22.8 Damaged battens of drums etc. should be replaced, if necessary.
3.22.9 When cable drums have to be moved over short distances, they should
be rolled in the direction of the arrow, marked on the drum.
3.22.10 For transportation over long distances, the drum should be mounted on
cable drum wheels strong enough to carry the weight of the drum and
pulled by means of ropes. Alternatively, they may be mounted on a
trailer or on a suitable mechanical transport.
3.22.11 When unloading cable drums from vehicles, a crane shall preferably be
used. Otherwise the drum shall be rolled down carefully on a suitable
ramp or rails, where necessary.
3.22.12 While transferring cable from one drum to another, the barrel of the
new drum shall have a diameter not less than that of the original drum.
3.22.13 The cables shall not be bent sharp to a small radius. The minimum safe
bending radius for all types of XLPE cables shall be taken as 12 times
the overall diameter of the cable. Wherever practicable, larger radius
should be adopted. At joints and terminations, the bending radius of
individual cores of a multi core cable shall not be less than 15 times its
overall diameter.
3.22.14 Cable with kinks and straightened kinks or with similar apparent defects
like defective armouring etc. shall be rejected.
3.22.15 Cables from the stores shall be supplied by the contractor as per the site
requirement in pieces cut in the stores.
3.22.16 The length of the cable on each drum shall be as per IS:10418‐1972.
3.22.17 Cable shall be supplied in non‐returnable wooden drums of heavy
construction. The wood used for construction of the drum shall be
properly seasoned, sound and free from defects and wood preservative
shall be applied to the entire drum.
3.22.18 The successful bidder shall obtain owner’s approval for the drum
lengths, before packing the cables on drums.
3.22.19 Packing shall be sturdy to protect the cable from any injury during
transportation, handling and storage. The cut ends of the cable shall be
sealed by means of non hygroscopic sealing material.
3.22.20 The cable shall carry the following information either stenciled on the
drum or contained in a label attached to it:‐
i) Reference to this Indian standard
ii) Manufacturer’s name, brand or trade mark iii) Type of cable
and voltage grade
iv) No. of cores
v) Nominal cross‐sectional area of conductor
vi) Cable code
vii) Length of cable on drum
viii) No. of lengths on reel, drum or coil (if more than one)
ix) Gross weight
x) Country of manufacture
xi) Year of manufacture
xii) Direction of rotation of drum (an arrow)
3.23 IDENTIFICATION:
3.23.1 The conductor cores shall be identified with codes as per relevant Indian
Standards.
3.23.2 The cables shall carry the manufacturer's name or trade mark and the
word identified throughout its length. The manufacturer's data shall
include the name, the cable size, voltage rating together with any other
information which the manufacturer considers appropriate. This
identification endorsed or print shall be done only on the outer sheath
3.24 SPECIFICATION FOR PVC ARMOURED CABLE
3.24.1 All codes and standards mean the latest. Where not specified otherwise
the
3.24.2 Installation shall generally follow the Indian Standard codes of practice
or the
3.24.3 British Standard Codes of practice where Indian standards are not
available.
3.25 CABLES
3.25.1 All cables shall be 1100 Volt grade outer sheathed FRLS PVC
insulated, sheathed with or without steel armouring as specified and
with an outer PVC protective sheath. Cables shall have high
conductivity stranded aluminium or copper conductors and cores shall
be colour coded to the Indian Standards.
3.25.2 All cables shall be new without any kinds or visible damage. The
manufacturers name, insulating material, conductor size and voltage
class shall be marked on the surface of the cable at every 600 mm
centers.
3.26 CABLE PARTICULARS:
3.26.1 Full technical details and descriptive literature shall be furnished

indicating the construction details, standard applicable for the
components of the cable and current ratings of the cables in air and
ground. De‐ rating factors to be considered for the ambient
temperature, ground temperature and grounding of cable in air and
ground shall be furnished. The certificates for the type tests conducted
on cables similar to the cables covered herein shall be submitted along
with the tender.
3.27 CURRENT RATINGS:
3.27.1 The cables will have current ratings and de rating factors as per relevant
Indian Standards.
3.27.2 The one second short circuit current rating values shall be furnished
and shall be subjected to the purchaser’s approval.
3.27.3 The current rating shall be based on maximum conductor temperature
depending on the type of insulation for continuous at the rated current.
3.28 NORMAL SERVICE CONDITIONS:
3.28.1 The cables shall be used in the sub‐station having an ambient
temperature of –5 deg.C to 50 deg.C.
3.29 OPERATION:
3.29.1 Cables shall be capable of satisfactory operation under a power
supply system frequency variation of +3%, ‐5% voltage variation of
±10%.
3.29.2 Cables shall be suitable for laying in conduits, ducts, trenches,
channels, trays, racks or for direct buried in ground in both dry and wet
locations with chances of flooding by water.
3.29.3 Cables shall have heat and moisture resistance properties. These shall
be of type and design with proven record of underground Sub‐Station.
3.30 QUANTITY:
3.30.1 The various sizes and quantities of cables required are given in the
Schedule of Quantity. The quantity is approximate and can be changed
at the time of placing the order to the extent of ±15%.
4.0 INSTALLATION OF CABLES
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Cable shall be laid in ground, trenches, cable trays and on walls as
specified. Installation shall include all supports and clamps as required.
As far as possible cables shall not be fixed on walls directly but
laid on cable trays.
4.1.2 Cables shall be laid in the routes marked in the drawings. Where the
route is not marked, the contractor shall mark it out on the drawings
and also on the site and obtain the approval of the Consultants / Client
before laying the cable. Procurement of cables shall be on the basis of
actual site measurements and the quantities shown on the schedule of
work shall be regarded as a guide.
4.1.3 The cable installation including necessary joints shall be carried out
in accordance with the specifications given herein. For details not
covered in these specifications, I.S. 1255 shall be followed. No straight
through joint shall be permitted in the system. The cables shall be
supplied as per cable schedule submitted by the contractor & approved
by Engineer.
4.2 ROUTE
4.2.1 Before the cable laying work is undertaken, the route of the cable shall
be decided by the Engineer.
4.2.2 While shortest practicable route shall be preferred, cable runs shall
generally follow fixed developments such as roads, foot‐paths etc. with
proper offsets so that future maintenance, identification etc. are
rendered easy. Cross country run to shorten the route length is not
desirable as it would lead to route identification and maintenance
problems, besides posing difficulties during later development of
open areas etc.
4.2.3 While selecting cable routes, corrosive soils, ground surrounding

sewage and effluent etc. shall be avoided. Where this is not feasible,
special precautions as approved by the Engineer shall be taken.
4.2.4 As far as possible, the alignment of the cable route shall be decided
taking into consideration the present and future requirements of other
agencies and utility services affected by it, the existence of any cable in
the vicinity as may be indicated by cable markers or cable schedules or
drawing maintained for that area, possibilities of widening of
roads/lanes, storm water drains etc. Cable routes shall be planned
away from the drains and should be within the property.
4.2.5 Cables of different voltages and also power and control cables shall be
kept in different trenches with Adequate separation. Where available
space is restricted, MV cables shall be laid above HV cables. Where
cables cross one another the cable of higher voltage shall be laid at a
lower level than the cable of lower voltage.
4.3 WAY LEAVE
4.3.1 It may be necessary to obtain way leave for the cable route from the
appropriate authorities some of whom are listed below :
4.3.1.1 Drainage, Public Health and Water Works.
4.3.1.2 Telephones and Telegraphs.
4.3.1.3 Gas works.
4.3.1.4 Other Undertakings.
4.3.1.5 Owners of properties.
4.3.2 Where necessary, joint inspection with representatives of other

authorities may be arranged so that mutual interests are safe guarded.
In case of private property, Section 12/51 of the Indian Electricity Act
shall be complied with.
4.3.3 Proximity to Communication Cables
4.3.3.1 Power and communication cables shall as far as possible cross at right
angles. Where power cables are laid in proximity to communication
cables the horizontal and vertical clearances shall not normally be less
than 60 cms.
4.4 LAYING DIRECT IN GROUND
4.4.1 GENERAL
4.4.1.1 This method shall be adopted where the cable route is through open
country along roads/lanes etc. and Where no frequent excavation are
encountered and where excavation is easily possible without affecting
other services.
4.5 WIDTH OF TRENCH
4.5.1 The width of trench shall be determined on the following basis:
4.5.1.1 The minimum width of trench for laying single cable shall be 35 cm.
4.5.1.2 Where more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench in
horizontal formation, the width of trench shall be increased such that the
inter‐axial spacing between the cables, except where otherwise specified
shall be at least 20 cm.
4.5.1.3 There shall be a clearance of at least 15 cm between axis of the end

cables and the sides of the trench.
4.6 DEPTH OF TRENCH
4.6.1 The depth of trench shall be determined on the following basis:
4.6.1.1 Where cables are laid in single tier formation, the total depth of trench
shall not be less than 75 cm for cables upto 1.1 KV and 1.20 m for
cables above 1.1 KV.
4.6.1.2 When more than one tier of cables is unavoidable and vertical
formation of laying is adopted, depth of trench in a (i) above shall be
increased by 30 cm. for each additional tier to be formed.
4.7 EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES
4.7.1 The trenches shall be excavated in reasonably straight lines.
Wherever there is a change in direction, suitable curvature shall be

provided complying with the requirements of Clause 6.6/k.
4.7.2 Where gradients and changes in depth are unavoidable, these shall be
gradual.
4.7.3 Excavation shall be done by any suitable means‐manual or mechanical.

The excavated soil hall be stacked Firmly by the side of the trench such
that it may not fall back into the trench.
4.7.4 Adequate precautions shall be taken not to damage any existing cables,
pipes or other such installations in the proposed route during
excavation. Wherever bricks, tiles or protective covers or bare cables are
encountered, further excavation shall not be carried without the
approval of the Engineer.
4.7.5 Existing property exposed during trenching shall be temporarily
supported or propped adequately as directed by the Engineer. The
trenching in such cases shall be done in short lengths, necessary pipes
laid for passing cables therein and the trench refilled in accordance with
clause.
4.7.6 If there is any danger of a trench collapsing and endangering adjacent
structures, the sides should be well shored up with timbering and/or
sheeting as the excavation proceeds. Where necessary, these may even
be left in places when back filling the trench.
4.7.7 Excavation through lawns shall be done in consultation with the staff of
the department/Owner concerned.
4.7.8 The bottom of the trench shall be level and free from stone, brick bats
etc. The trench shall then be provided with a layer of clean, dry sand
cushion of not less than 8 cm. in depth.
4.8 LAYING OF CABLE IN TRENCH
4.8.1 At the time of issue of cable for laying, the cores shall be tested for
continuity and insulation resistance.
4.8.2 The cable drum shall be properly mounted on jacks or on a cable
wheel, at a suitable location, making sure that the spindle, jack etc. are
strong enough to carry the weight of the drum without failure and that
the spindle is horizontal in the bearings so as to prevent the drum
creeping to one side while rotating.
4.8.3 The cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench steadily and
uniformly without jerks and strains. The entire cable length shall as far
as possible be pulled off in one stretch. However, where this is not

possible the remainder of the cable may be removed by 'Flaking' i.e. by
making one long loop in the reverse direction.
4.8.4 After the cable has been uncoiled and laid into the trench over the
rollers, the cable shall be lifted slightly over the rollers beginning from
one end by helpers standing about 10 m apart and drawn straight. The
cable should then be taken off the rollers by additional helpers lifting the
cable and then laid in a reasonably straight line.
4.8.5 For short runs and sizes upto 50 Sq. mm of cables 1.1 KV grade, any
other suitable method of Direct handling and laying can be adopted
with the prior approval of the Engineer.
4.8.6 When the cable has been properly straightened, the cores shall be
tested for continuity and insulation resistance. In case of FRLS PVC
cables, suitable moisture seal tape shall be used for this purpose.
4.8.7 Cable laid in trenches in a single tier formation shall have covering of
clean, dry sand of not less than 17 cms above the base cushion of sand
before the protective cover is laid.
4.8.8 In the case of vertical multi‐tier formation after the first cable has been
laid, a sand cushion of 30 cms. shall be provided over the initial bed
before the second tier is laid. If additional tiers are formed, each of
the subsequent tiers also shall have a sand cushion of 30 cms. as stated
above. The top most cable shall have a final sand covering not less
than 17 cms. before the protective cover is laid.
4.8.9 At the time of original installation, approximately 3 m of surplus cable

shall be left on each end of the Cable and on each side of underground
joints (Straight through/Tee/Termination) and at entries and places as
may be decided by the Engineer. The surplus cable shall be left in the
form of a loop. Where there are long runs of cable length loose
cable may be left at suitable intervals as specified by the Engineer.
4.8.10 A final protection to cables shall be laid in accordance with Clause
to provide warning to future excavators of the presence of the cable
and also to protect the cable against accidental mechanical damage

by pick‐axe blows etc.
4.8.11 Unless otherwise specified, the cables shall be protected by second
class bricks of not less than 20 cm x 10 cm x 10 cm (nominal size) as
per CPWD Building Specification or protection covers placed on top of
the sand, (bricks to be laid breadth wise) for the full length of the cable
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Where more than one cable is to be
laid in the same trench, this protective covering shall cover all the cables
and project at least 5 cm. over the sides of the end cables.
4.9 BACK FILLING
4.9.1 The trenches shall be back‐filled with excavated earth free from stones
or other sharp edged debris and shall be rammed and watered, if
necessary, in successive layers not exceeding 30 cm. Unless otherwise
specified, a crown of earth not less than 50 mm. in the centre and
tapering towards the sides of the trench shall be left to allow for
subsidence. The crown of earth however should not exceed 10 cms. so
as not to be a hazard to vehicular traffic. The temporary re‐instatements
of roadways should be inspected at regular intervals, particularly during
the wet weather, and any settlement should be made good. Further
trenches cut through roadways or other paved areas shall be restored
to the same density and material as the surrounding area and
repaved in accordance with the relevant Specifications to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
4.9.2 Where road berks or lawns have been cut or kerbed stones
displaced, the same shall be repaired and made good except turfing /
asphalting to the satisfaction of the Engineer and all surplus earth or
rock removed to places as specified.
4.10 ROUTE MARKERS
4.10.1 Route markers shall be provided along straight runs of the cables at
locations approved by the Engineer and generally at intervals not
exceeding 100 m. Markers shall also be provided to identify change in
the direction of the cable route and also for location of every
underground joint.
4.10.2 Route markers shall be made out of 100 mm x 100 mm x 5 mm

GI/Aluminum plate, welded or bolted on To 35 mm x 35 mm x 6 mm
angle iron 60 cm. long. Such plate markers shall be mounted parallel
to and 0.5 m or so away from the edge of the trench. Alternatively
cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone
aggregate of 20 mm nominal size) marker 60 cm x 60 cm 10 cm in size
shall be laid flat and centered over the cable. The concrete markers
unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer shall project over the
surrounding surface so as to make the cable route easily identifiable.
4.10.3 The work 'cable' and other details such as voltage grading, size etc. as
furnished by the Engineer shall be inscribed on the marker.
4.11 LAYING IN PIPES/CLOSED DUCTS:
4.11.1 In location such as road crossing, entry to building, on poles, in paved

areas etc. cables shall be laid in pipes or closed ducts.
4.11.2 GI or Hume Pipes (spun reinforced concrete pipes) shall be used for
such purposes. In the case of new construction, pipes as required shall
be laid along with the Civil works and jointed according to the
instructions of the Engineer as the case may be. The size of pipe
shall be as indicated in the electrical drawings. GI pipe shall be laid
directly in ground without any special bed. Hume pipe (Spun reinforced
concrete pipe) shall be laid over 10 cm. thick cement concrete 1:5:10
(1cement : 5 coarse sand : 10 graded stone aggregate of 40mm
nominal size) bed, after which it shall be completely embedded in
concrete. No sand cushioning or tiles need be used in such situations.
Unless otherwise specified, the top surface of pipes shall be at a
minimum depth of 1mtr. from the ground level when laid under roads,
pavement etc.
4.11.3 Where steel pipes are employed for protection of single core cables
feeding AC load, the pipe should be large enough to contain both
cables in the case of single phase system and all cables in the case of
poly phase system.
4.11.4 The pipes on road crossing shall preferably be on the skew to reduce
the angle of bends as the cable enters and leaves the crossings. This is
particularly important for high voltage cables.
4.11.5 Manholes of adequate size as decided by the Engineer shall be

provided to facilitate feeding/drawing in of cables and to provide
working space for persons. They shall be covered by suitable manhole
covers with frame of proper design. The construction of manholes and
providing the cover is not in the scope of this Contract and shall be got
executed and paid for by the Engineer through another agency.
4.11.6 Pipes shall be continuous and clear of debris or concrete before cable is
drawn. Sharp edges at ends shall be smoothened to prevent injury to
cable insulation or sheathing.
4.11.7 Pipes for cable entries to the building shall slope downwards from the
building and suitably sealed to prevent entry of water inside the
building. Further the mouth of the pipes at the building end shall be
suitably sealed to avoid entry of water. This seal in addition to being
waterproof shall also be fireproof.
4.11.8 All chases and passages necessary for laying of service cable
connections to buildings shall be cut as required and made good to the
original finish and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.11.9 Cable grips/draw wires and winches etc. may be employed for drawing
cables through pipes/closed ducts etc.
4.12 LAYING, FIXING & TERMINATION OF CABLES:
4.12.1 The power & control cables shall be laid on the cable racks. It will be
complete responsibility of the bidder for laying, fixing, straight jointing in
case of power cable if required and termination at both ends of the
power & D.C. cables as per the tentative schedule given in Bill of
quantity. Cable glands shall be provided at each end to support the
cable. Wire termination shall be made with solder less crimping type
and tinned copper lugs which firmly grip the conductor. Insulated
sleeves shall be provided at all the wires termination. Engraved core
identification plastic ferrules marked to correspond with Cable No./Wire
No. shall be fitted at both ends of each cable, Ferrules shall fit tightly on
the wire and shall not fall off when the wire/cable is disconnected from
the terminal blocks. Number 6 & 9 shall have different markings for
ferrules purposes. Necessary cable no./wire no. shall be marked/tagged
(or the standard practice adopted) on the cable at the different locations
for easy identifications during maintenance. Power cables having more
number of cables per phase shall be laid in trefoil formation or shall be
laid as per standard practice adopted for laying. Cables laid in
horizontal cable trays as well as on vertical ladders shall be fixed at
adequate number of places to hold the cable firmly. Bidder should
submit a complete write up regarding laying, fixing and termination of
the cable for approval before starting of the work. Any mechanical
damage to the cables resulting in discarding of the cables shall be
replaced by the bidder free of cost.
4.12.2 TERMINATING KITS:
The terminating kits shall be suitable for termination of the cables to an

indoor switchgear or to a weatherproof transformer/ motor. For outdoor
terminals, weather shields/sealing ends and any other accessories
required shall also form part of the kit. The terminating kits shall be one
of the makes/types mentioned in the preferred makes.
4.12.3 JOINTING KITS:
The straight through jointing kits shall be suitable for installation

on overhead trays, concrete lined trenches, ducts and for underground
burial with uncontrolled backfill and possibility of flooding by water
and chemicals. These shall have protection against rodent and termite
attack.
4.12.4 The cables shall be tested and examined at the contractor’s works both
before and after manufacture. The contractor shall furnish all necessary
information concerning the supply to consultant/owner’s works for the
purpose of inspecting the process of manufacturer in all its stages and

Engineer will have the power to reject any material which appears
to him to be at unsuitable description or of unsatisfactory quality.
4.13 CABLE TAGS:
4.13.1 After pulling, cables shall be provided with identification tags consisting
of 1.5mm thick aluminium strips of size 30x60mm on which cable
numbers shall be die‐punched. The tags shall be tied to the cables with
non‐ corrosive wire. In case of single core cables, the said wire should
be non‐ferrous.
4.13.2 Cable tags shall be tied to cables at the following points:
a) Inside the cubicles at the point of glanding.
b) Within the distances of 1 to 2 meters on either side of crossing of

any wall, floor, fire stop or other barrier in cable galleries/
trenches etc. One meter distance to be kept so that cable tags do
not get concealed during lost/disturbed fire sealing,
re‐plastering, etc.
c) At the field end termination before entry to the terminal

box/junction box/marshalling box.
d) Within the distances of 1 to 2 meters of either side of acute

bends, tray jumping, and at every 30M interval in straight run.
e) In every span over 30 meters found without any tag despite

above.
4.14 QUANTITY MEASUREMENT AND RETURN OF SURPLUS QUANTITY
4.14.1 For payment purposes measurement shall be made on the execution

drawings/physical measurements, physical measurements shall be
made by the contractor in the presence of the representative of the
purchaser.
4.14.2 The measurements of cable laying shall be made on the basis of length
actually laid from the lug to lug including that of loops provided
and laid accordingly.
4.14.3 It shall be responsibility of successful bidder to work out the complete

cable schedule for the cables covered under this specification which
shall incorporate the details of termination markings and route etc. in
consultation with project authorities and various equipment suppliers
and submit the same for approval before starting the cable laying/fixing
work.
4.15 TESTING:
4.15.1 The contractor shall take full responsibility of testing pre‐ commissioning

and commissioning of cabling system being installed by him. It shall be
overall responsibility of the contractor to arrange and complete all
activities in complete co‐ordination with equipment commissioning
agency keeping in view the overall commissioning programme. The
contractor shall submit a check list for testing and commissioning and
the activities shall be carried out in accordance with the check list.
4.15.2 Testing and electric measurement of cable installations shall conform to

IS:1255.
4.15.3 Prior to installation, cables shall be
a) Continuity of conductors
b) Insulation resistance between conductor and earth
c) Insulation resistance between the conductors
4.15.4 After installation each cable shall be tested for
a) Insulation resistance between conductors
b) Insulation resistance between the conductors and earth
c) Absence of cross phasing
d) Firmness of terminations
4.15.5 The check and commissioning tests shall be carried out as part of the
installation work and the contractor shall not be paid any extra amount
for the same.
4.15.6 The contractor shall have to bring all testing equipment/instruments in

sufficient numbers. All instruments shall be calibrated to the satisfaction
of the purchaser before actual testing and tests to be conducted by

qualified experienced personnel.
4.15.7 All documents/records regarding test data and all other measured
values shall be submitted for approval and subsequent record and
reference. All cables shall be energised only after certification from
certification personnel that cable is ready for energizing. The results of
all tests shall conform to the specification requirement as well as
guaranteed data.
4.16 LAYING ON CABLE TRAYS
4.17 GI CABLE TRAYS
4.18 DESIGN
4.18.1 The GI perforated/ Ladder cable trays as specified and their fittings shall
conform to the Indian Standards or their latest amended editions or
equivalent International Standard. The bidder shall specify in the bid to
which standard the material supplied shall conform. The support should
be Arm struct type.
4.18.2 Standard perforation shall be provided in cable trays at both axis i.e.
horizontal & vertical. The cable tray system shall be designed in the
standardized modular system and comprise of basic modules of trays,
fittings and accessories. Each modular shall be fabricated from prime
quality mild steel sheet and then hot dip galvanized of 60 microns.
Modular of 90 degree elbows, T joints and double, T joints shall be used
for horizontal changes in the direction of cable runs while hinged
connectors shall be used for vertical branch off. The branch off joints
should be such as to allow for angle connection to be easily bolted
to them by means of button head screws. End plates shall be used to
closed off unevenly cut faces of the cable trays and protect the cables
from damage. Where required barriers shall be used to permit power
cables and cables and cables of all modules shall be subject to the
prior approval of the engineer before mass production is taken hand.
The following standard shall be used: as per consultant’s specifications
or customer’s requirements.
4.18.3 The GI perforated cable trays shall be manufactured from good

commercial, high grade strength sheet steel having minimum thickness
of 2mm and shall be hot dip galvanized according to BS‐729‐1971
or equivalent standard suitable for indoor/outdoor use having
moderate humidity and air pollution. The zinc coating thickness
shall works out by applying a 610 gm of zinc per square meter
surface with a approximate thickness of 80 micron. The zinc coating
shall be smooth, clean and uniform thickness and free from defects like
ash and dross inclusions, bare patches, black spots, pimples, lumpiness,
rust stains, blisters etc. The galvanizing shall not adversely affect the
mechanical properties of the coated material.
4.18.4 The joints of two trays shall be butt construction and shall be made with
the help of coupler plates by nuts and bolts. The coupler plate and nuts
and bolts shall also be properly hot dip galvanized, where the bends of
the trays are required at site the same shall be supplied by the bidder
without any extra cost. The spacing of rungs shall be max.
400mm centre to centre while adopting the modules at site if cutting of

any length is required the same shall be cut at site and joined by nuts
and bolts with the help of coupler plates.
4.18.5 Where perforated cables trays shall be routed in trenches, the necessary
angle iron side support should be provided by the bidder.
4.18.6 The provision for fixing of brackets support system of vertical side of
approach tunnel should be made by the bidder for fixing the supporting
system. However, bidder is requested to visit the site before preparation
of this bid.
4.18.7 Bidder is at its liberty to manufacture the cable supports arrangement at
site or at his own workshop. Bidder shall have to bring all the
tools/tackles, including welding machines etc. for the manufacturing of
these cable supports be established by tests as per IS‐2633 if required.
All manufacturing process including punching, cutting, bending and
welding of GI perforated cable trays shall be completed and burrs shall
be removed before the application of galvanization process is applied.
Zinc conforming to at least Grade Zn 98 as specified in IS‐209‐1966

shall be used for the purpose of galvanizing.
4.18.8 The trays shall be fabricated in a length of 2.5 m to 3m.
4.18.8 G.I. Perforated Type including horizontal and vertical bends,
reducers, tees, cross members and Other accessories as required and
duly suspended from the ceiling with Am‐strut (Fully adjustable &
reusable, with a complete line of channels, fittings & accessories for
Multipurpose applications) support system for suspension from ceiling
& fixing at walls/columns with Hot Dip Galvanised etc as specified
thickness in BOQ from GI material, Cable trays and accessories and
covers shall be painted as explained below :‐
4.19.1 Effective cleaning by hot alkaline degreasing solution followed by cold

water rinsing to remove traces of alkaline solution.
4.19.2 Pickling in dilute sulphuric acid to remove oxide scales & rust formation,
if any, followed by cold water rinsing to remove traces of acidic solution.
4.19.3 Drying with compressed air in a dust free atmosphere.
4.19.4 Primer coating with two coats of a highly corrosion resistant primer,
applied wet on wet and stove dried under strictly controlled conditions of
temperature and time.
4.19.5 Cables, where indicated in approved shop drawings, shall be laid on
overhead cable trays which are suspended from ceiling or supported
from wall, by anchor fasteners as required. All cable tray supports must
GI/ or to be hot dip galvanized as specified in Bill of Quantity.
4.19.6 The Contractor shall provide for all accessories for the installation of the
cable trays, such as bends, tees, reducers coupler plates, and structural
steel members (comprising of channels, angles, flats, rods) for structural
supports for cable trays etc.
4.20 CABLE TRAY MOUNTING
4.20.1 Unless otherwise specifically noted on the relevant layout drawing, all
cable tray mounting works to be carried out ensuring the following :
4.20.2 Cable tray mounting arrangement type to be as marked on layout
drawing.
4.20.3 Assembly of tray mounting structure shall be supplied, fabricated,
erected & painted by the contractor.
4.20.4 Cable tray running along the wall should be supported at intervals not
exceeding 1.5 m. In case of branching, there should be a support on all
branches at a distance of 30 cms from the point of branching. Support
should be MS angle secured in an approved manner where runs are
along the walls. In case of ceiling suspended cable tray horizontal
supports made of MS angle iron shall be provided. The horizontal
interval between two such supports shall be 1.0 meter. These supports
shall be suspended from C.I. boxes or suitable approved suspension
devices such as dash fastener of suitable sizes in the ceiling by means of
10 mm diameter GI threaded rods. All above mounting accessories
form part of installation of cable trays. (All MS material shall be Hot dip
galvanized)
4.20.5 The free vertical distance between parallel GI perforated trays/racks
/ladder shall be at least 250mm and the perforated trays shall be
50mm away from the walls. The trays shall be fixed to the brackets with
proper nuts and bolts system.
4.20.6 The GI perforated trays shall be free from sharp edges and burns etc. so
that joint between two trays shall be without any clearance and matched
in proper shape.
4.20.7 At the bends the curvature in all axes of perforated trays/racks shall be
20R or maximum size of cable.
The supporting brackets/fixing bolts size shall be calculated as per
design load.
4.20.8 The supporting brackets/fixing bolts size shall be calculated as per
design load.
4.20.9 The perforated trays shall be installed in such a way that as far as
possible the cables can be laid directly in place rather than be pulled
through.
4.20.10 The current carrying cables shall be laid separately than the H.T. cables,
L.T. cables and D.C. cables shall be laid in different trays.
4.20.11 The cables shall be fixed in the perforated trays by means of plastic ties
or plastic coated wires etc.
4.20.12 The number of perforated tray shall be sufficient in order to
accommodate all the power D.C. cables indicated in the specification
for cables. However, the approximate quantity of different trays have
been given in bill of quantity.
4.21 CABLE TRAY CONSTRUCTION:
4.21.1 The interiors of all types of cable shall be smooth and free of any
projection that might injure cable sheaths and jackets (NEC 318‐4). All
slice plates should be installed on the outside surface of the supports.
Round head bolts, screws or other fasteners (head inside) are to be used
exclusively. The anchoring of cable trays through bottom sections with
bolts or screws upon which cables may rest is prohibited. Sheaths or
outer covers of cables are subject to damage where the cables are lying
on bolt or screw heads. Bolting is satisfactory where the heads of bolts
or screws are below the cable sporting surfaces.
4.21.2 Bends in cable trays shall be made with manufacturer’s fittings or
equivalent. Mitered vertical bends are permitted on ladder cable
supports only. The effective radius must be not less than that allowable
for the cables involved. Mitered cuts must be positioned midway
between rungs and shall permit not over a 22 ½ degree directional
change per miter or rung. Bends, ells tees and other fittings elbows are
available with several radii. The radii of fittings both vertical and
horizontal should be suitable to accommodate cables so that they will
never be bent, either during installation or in the final arrangement, to
lesser radii.
4.21.3 All the components of the supply, without exception, from one system
and during the erection all the components will match each other
without interference.
4.22 ACCESSORIES
4.22.1 All accessories for joining trays, bends, tees, reducers etc. shall be
compatible to tray specifications for correct interfacing and with
matching dimensions.
4.23 MATERIAL:
4.23.1 All material in the scope of supply shall be of prime quality mild steel
sheet and then hot dip galvanized of 86 microns after fabrication,
including all accessories.
4.23.2 It is manufacturer’s responsibility that the materials quoted are fully
resistant to the influence of the chemical product and environment
4.24 TESTING & INSPECTION:
4.24.1 Cable trays along with coupler plates and other Hardware material shall
be inspected at manufacturers works for :
1. Visual Inspection and Bill of material at cable tray manufacturers works
2. Test for Galvanizing material as per IS at galvanizer works.
4.24.2 The inspection & testing shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s works
in accordance with the relevant sections of the specification and
witnessed by the purchaser prior to the shipment. Or a sample of the
required specimen should be submitted for the approvals prior to
manufacturing
4.25 EARTHING:
4.25.1 The GI perforated cable trays along with their supporting arrangements
shall be properly earthed by the bidder with nut and bolts from the
earthing risers provided by purchaser, generally in the vicinity of the tray
routing. The earthing shall be as per latest I.E. rules and IS/IEC
recommendation. The size of earth connection shall be such that its

conductance should be more than the conductance of 14 sq.mm.
copper conductor cross section.
4.26 FABRICATION OF TRAYS
4.26.1 All fabrication of trays shall be in accordance with IS:800 and as per the
approved drawings unless otherwise specified.
4.26.2 All material shall be straight and if necessary before being worked, shall
be straightened and/or flattened by pressure unless required to be of
curvilinear form and shall be free from twists.
4.26.3 Before cutting the steel, measurement should be done by appropriate
gauge and according to the drawing.
4.26.4 Shearing or flame cutting may be used provided the resulting edge shall be
reasonably clean and straight. Sheared members shall be free from
distortion at sheared edges, when gas cutting is adopted, the flame cut
edge shall be machined to a depth of 3 to 5mm.
4.26.5 The welding and the welded work shall generally conform to IS:816 &
IS:9595. Unless otherwise specified.
4.26.6 The welding surfaces shall be smooth, uniform & free from fins, tears,
notches or any other defect which may adversely affect welding
and shall be free of loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint moisture of any
other foreign material.
4.26.7 The welding procedure shall be so arranged that the distortion and
shrinkage stresses are reduced to a minimum and that the welds meet
the requirement of quality.
4.27 SUBMISSION ALONGWITH TENDER:
4.27.1 Based on the specification write up and specification drawings the

contractor shall submit the following drawings/documents and
information with the tender:‐
a. Drawings showing dimensional details and constructional

features of all components including the :‐
i) Cable trays and accessories

ii) Typical supporting arrangements in various locations
iii) Typical cable trays layout arrangement (showing typical

bends,, T‐offs, branching, reducers, coupler etc.)
iv) Typical dimensional details of glands and lugs for various

sizes/types
v) Typical drawings for control and 415V and 22

kV termination and jointing showing splicing, glanding,
lugs, screen/armour earthing etc.
b. Descriptive literature catalogues, giving design features and

manufacturing details.
4.28 TESTING & COMMISSIONING
4.29 INSPECTION
4.29.1 All cables shall be inspected upon receipt at site and checked by
the Engineer for any damage during transit.
4.30 TESTING
4.30.1 All 650/1100 Volt grade cables before laying shall be tested with a 500
V megger or with a 2,500/5,000 V megger for cables of higher
voltages. The cable cores shall be tested for continuity, absence of cross
phasing, and insulation resistance to earth / sheath / armour insulation
resistance between conductors.
4.30.1.1 All cables shall be subject to above mentioned tests during laying,
before covering the cables by protective covers and back filling and
also before the jointing operations.
4.30.2 Completion plan and completion certificate
4.30.3 After completion of the work the Contractor shall draw completion plans
to a suitable scale and shall submit to the Engineer. The completion
plans shall, inter‐alia, give the following details:‐
4.30.1 All 650/1100 Volt grade cables before laying shall be tested with a 500
V megger or with a 2,500/5,000 V megger for cables of higher
voltages. The cable cores shall be tested for continuity, absence of
cross phasing, and insulation resistance to earth / sheath / armour

insulation resistance between conductors.
4.30.1.1 All cables shall be subject to above mentioned tests during laying,
before covering the cables by protective covers and back filling and
also before the jointing operations.
4.30.2 Completion plan and completion certificate
4.30.3 After completion of the work the Contractor shall draw completion plans
to a suitable scale and shall submit to the Engineer. The
completion plans shall, inter‐alia, give the following details:‐
4.30.3.1 Layout of cable work
4.30.3.2 Length, size, type and grade of cables.
4.30.3.3 Method of laying i.e. direct in ground, in pipes etc.
4.30.3.4 Location of each joint with jointing method followed.
4.30.3.5 Route marker and joint maker with respect to permanent land marks
available at site.
4.30.3.6 Wherever the previously laid cable is cut and additional joints are
introduced etc., the cable records shall suitably be amended.
4.31 APPROVED MAKES
Note:- Makes specified in the approved schedule of CIDCO & As
approved by the Electrical Consultant and shall be IS marked wherever
not mentioned.
Note: Samples to be approved from the CIDCO/ Consultant before
execution.
5.0 EARTHING
5.1 GENERAL :
5.1.1 Scope of work consist of Supply, installation, testing and commissioning

of earthing system.
5.1.2 The non‐current carrying metal parts of electrical installation shall be

earthed properly. All metallic structure, enclosures, junction boxes, outlet
boxes, cabinets, machine frame, portable equipments, metal conduits,
truncking, cable armored, switchgear and all other parts made of metal
in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be bonded together
and connected by means of specified earthing conductors to an
efficient earthing system. Every item of equipment served by the
electrical system shall be bonded to earthing system.
5.1.3 Separate Earthing will be provided for Electrical (Power) system and
computer system.
5.1.4 All non –Live metal parts of electrical system and equipment shall be
earthed with suitable size of earth conductors. 2 distinct earthing shall
be provided for all 3 –Phase equipment.
5.1.5 Earthing shall be in confirming with IS 3043 and Lightning protection

shall be with IS 2309. Earth Resistance of individual earth station shall
not exceed 5 ohm and overall resistance shall be less than 1 ohm at all
times. Earth resistance shall be taken with earth megger for all earth
points. All earth points shall be located 2.0 mtrs away from the building
and there will be a minimum distance of 3.0 meters between 2 earth
points. All earth stations shall be identified with number and using
painted board.
5.2 EARTH STATION
5.2.1 Pipe Electrode Earthing : 50mm dia class B GI pipe 3.0 mtrs long
tapered at bottom and 12 mm dia holes at 75 mm c/c on all sides for
bottom 2.0 mtrs with top watering arrangement shall form earth
electrode. The electrode has to be buried vertical in ground.
5.2.2 Plate Earthing : 600X 600 X 6 mm GI plate with 50 mm dia. GI

watering pipe with funnel at top. The construction shall be as per
details given in the latest edition of IS 3043.
5.2.3 Incase of rocky strata , Bore Earthing stations with 150 bore and 100
mm class B GI pipe shall be done . Depth of bore earting shall be 6.0
mtr minimum. Soil resistivity test shall be done for deciding depth if
necessary.
5.2.4 Bentonite or earth powder slurry shall be put along with pipe in the
bore.
5.3 MAINTENANCE FREE EARTHING :
5.3.1 Generally pipe in pipe technology shall be used with inner pipe and
outer pipe of different sizes and lengths as mentioned below. These pipe
electrode shall be hot dip galvanized to enhance life.
5.3.2 The annular space between these pipes & inner pipe shall be filled with
and outer pipe of different sizes and lengths as mentioned below. These
pipe electrodes shall be hot dip galvanized to enhance life.
5.3.3 The annular space between these pipes & inner pipe shall be filled
with adequate special crystalline compound material which shall resist
the corrosion of inner pipe electrode Are surrounding outer pipe shall be
filled with back fill compound mixed with the soil. Depth & size of pit
shall suit to the electrode length. Soil resistivity test shall be done if
necessary for deciding depth.
Pipe Electrode Details

Inner Outer Galvanizing
Category Length
pipe pipe
3000mm 80‐100
T39 40mm dia 80mm dia
or as
3000mm 80‐100
T19 25mm dia 50mm dia
or as
5.4 MASONRY CHAMBER
5.4.1 Brick masonry chamber of size 450 x 450 x 9( internal clear

dimensions) with cast iron cover and frame with top finished at ground
level shall be provided for watering and test link access.
5.5 ARTIFICIAL TREATMENT
5.5.1 In case of rocky soil, hard murum soil resistance is very high. For getting
proper earthing alternate layers of charcoal and salt are to be provided
for entire height of earth electrode with 300 mm over all cover. Back
cotton soil can be used for refilling the earth points in rocky strata.
5.6 EARTHING CONDUCTORS
5.6.1 Earthing conductors size shall be depend on the load and defined fault
conditions.
5.6.2 The earthing conductors shall be connected with either riveted or bolted
joints with at least 2 rivets/ bolts. The joints shall be painted with
bitumen paint.
5.6.3 Earthing strips for lighting protection shall be run on parapet walls of
outer periphery of building and outer periphery of highest structure for
horizontal runs and on unapproachable vertical walls upto
disconnecting box at 1.0 mtr height above ground level. Lightning
conductor shall be connected to earth station directly and separate 25 x
6 mm strip from earth station is to be connected to grid earthing.
The lightning conductors shall be fixed at appropriate highest location
on building / structure. Separate earth pit shall be provided for each
lightning conductor.
5.7 CODES AND STANDARDS AND APPLICABLE PUBLICATION
a) Indian Electricity Rules, 1956
b) IS : 3043:Earthing
5.8 SUBMITTALS
5.8.1 Drawing Data
5.8.2 Earthing pits layout along with earthing tape routing etc.
5.8.3 Block Diagram for earthing showing all earthing pits and their
connections.
5.8.4 Tests & Test Reports
5.8.5 Test results of all Earthing pit test carried out at site with multiple
electrode testing procedure.
5.9 STANDARDIZATION
5.9.1 To minimize spare parts inventory, standardized components of

rationalized sizes shall be supplied. Equipment and materials shall be
bought only from approved Vendors.
5.10 EARTH PITS AND MAIN GRID
1. Adequate number of earthing pits and electrodes shall be used in

conjunction with earthing grid.
2. Minimum spacing between two adjacent earth pits shall not be

less than 6 meters and shall be kept sufficiently away from
structures to clear footings.
3. Main grid loop for a building shall be installed outside boundary

of the building, buried in back fill. In shall be installed at a
minimum depth of 600mm outside the building wall.
4. The main earth loops (MEL’S) in plant areas shall be generally

routed along cables when equipments are located away from
MEL’S. Suitable sub loops may be into then for deriving
connections for individual equipment.
5.11 INDOOR EQUIPMENT EARTHING

1. Each floor of building shall have its own earth bus embedded in
concrete.
2. Earthing grid embedded in the floor slab shall have a minimum
concrete cover of 50mm.
3. Earth buses on different floor & main grid shall be connected by
at least two conductors of main grid conductor size.
4. Every alternate column (steel or RCC) of the building housing
electrical equipment shall be connected to main earthing grid.
5. Earthing conductors shall be welded at interval of 1000mm

along their run on steel structures & shall be at interval of
750mm along the wall.
5.12 OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT EARTHING
1. Each transformer neutral shall be provided with two separate

earth leads to two separate earth pits located near transformer.
2. Whenever earthing conductor crosses the trenches, tunnels,

railway track etc. it shall be run below the trench etc.
3. Equipment structures shall be earthed at two diametrically

opposite points.
5.13 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING.
1. Entire earthing system shall be tested for continuity by ELV Tester

after installation.
2. For the earthing system the connections shall be thoroughly

checked.
3. The earth resistance shall be checked, recorded & resistance shall

be improved in case it is higher than acceptable limits.
4. The contractor shall carry out all rectifications, repairs or

adjustment work found necessary during testing &
commissioning.
5.14 EARTHING PROTECTION SYSTEM.
1. Sizes and number of earth leads for earthing various items and
other technical particulars shall be as specified.
2. Earthing conductors in the building, running parallel to walls/

columns shall not be less than 150 mm away from the wall
columns.
3. Suitable earth risers shall be provided if the equipment is not

available while carrying out earthing connections.
4. Whenever earthing conductor passes through walls, galvanized

iron sleeves shall be provided for the passage of earthing
conductor. Water stop sleeves shall be provided. Water stops
shall be provided wherever earthing conductor enters the

building from outside.
5. Whenever the conductors are to be buried, contractor shall

co‐ordinate with other civil contractors to ensure that the
conductors are installed before concreting.
6. All connections shall be of low resistance. Contact resistance shall

be minimum.
7. Steel conductors above ground level shall be galvanized. All

conductors shall be free from any defects.
5.15 SPECIFICATIONS
5.15.1 Earthing Conductors Copper or equivalent G.I. earthing system shall be

provided except for neutral earthing of transformers and DG sets for
which Cu earthing system shall be provided. All the bus ducts/cable
trays shall be provided with suitable size of 2 nos. G.I. strips in the full
length. All electrical equipment shall be earthed with 2 nos. Copper /
G.I. strips / wires.
5.15.2 The Resistance to Each Earthing System shall not exceed 1.0 OHM.
5.16 PLATE ELECTRODE EARTHING
5.16.1 Earthing electrode shall consist of a G.I. plate as called for in the Bill of
Quantity. The plate electrode shall be buried as far as practicable
below permanent moisture level but in any case not less than 3
meters below ground level. Wherever possible, earth electrode shall be
located as near the water tap, water drain or a down take pipe as
possible. Earth electrode shall be kept clear of the building foundations
and in no case shall it be nearer than 2 meters from the outer surface of
the wall.
5.17 CONNECTION OF EARTHING CONDUCTORS
5.17.1 Main earthing conductor shall be taken from the earth connections at
the main distribution panel to the main L.T. panel with which the
connection is to be made. For distribution boards, earthing conductors
shall run from main distribution boards. Circuit earthing conductor shall
run from the exposed metal of equipment and shall be connected to any
point on the main earthing conductor, or its distribution boards or to an

earth leakage circuit breaker. Metal conduits, cable sheathing and
armoring shall be earthed at the ends adjacent to switch boards at
which they originate, or otherwise at the commencement of the run
by an earthing conductor in effective electrical contact with cable
sheathing. Where equipment is connected by flexible cord, all exposed
metal parts of equipment shall be earthed with 2 no. Cu/ G.I.
strips/wires and noncurrent carrying metallic parts with, 1 no. Cu/ G.I.
strips/wires.
5.17.2 Neutral conductor, sprinkler pipes, or pipes conveying gas,

water or inflammable liquid, structural steel work, metallic enclosures
cables and conductors, metallic conduits and lightning protection
system conductors shall not be used as a means of earthing an
installation or even as a link in earthing system. The Electrical resistance
of metallic enclosures for cables and conductors measured between
earth connections at the main switch boards and any other point on
the completed installation shall be low enough to permit the passage of
current necessary to operate circuit breakers and shall not exceed 1
OHM.
5.18 EARTH CONNECTIONS
5.18.1 All metal clad switches and other equipment carrying single phase
circuit, shall be connected to earth by a single connection. All metal clad
switches carrying 3 phase shall be connected with earth by two separate
and distinct connections. The earthing conductor inside the building
wherever exposed shall be properly protected from mechanical injury by
running the same in GI pipe of adequate size. The earthing conductor
shall be painted to protect it against corrosion. Earthing conductor
outside the building shall be laid 600 mm below finished ground level.
The over lapping in G.I. strips in joints shall be welded. Lugs of
adequate capacity and size shall be used for all termination of
conductor wires. Lugs shall be bolted to the equipment body to be
earthed after the metal is cleaned of paint and other oily substance and
properly tinned.
5.19 PROTECTION FROM CORROSION
5.19.1 Connection between copper and galvanized equipment shall be made

on vertical face and protected with paint and grease. Galvanized fixing
clamps shall not be used for fixing earth conductors. Only copper fixing
clamp shall be used for fixing earth conductors. When there is evidence
that the soil is aggressive to copper, buried earthing conductors shall be
protected by suitable serving and sheathing.
5.20 RESISTANCE TO EARTH
5.20.1 No earth electrode shall have a greater ohmic resistance than 3 ohms
as measured by an approved earth testing apparatus. In rocky soil the
resistance may be upto 5 ohms. The electrical resistance measured
between earth connection at the main switchboard and any other point
on the completed installation shall be low enough to permit the passage
of current necessary to operate circuit breakers, and shall not exceed 1
ohm.
5.21 INSTALLATION
5.21.1 The earth plate shall be set vertically and surrounded with 150 mm thick
layer of charcoal dust and salt mixture. A 20 mm dia GI pipe shall run
from the top edge of the plate to the ground level. The top of the pipe
shall be provided with a funnel and a mesh for watering the earth
through the pipe. The funnel over the GI pipe shall be housed in a
masonry chamber approximately 300 mm x 300 mm x 300 mm deep.
The masonry chamber shall be provided with a cast iron cover resting
over a CI frame. Test facility shall be provided with test links for the
earthing station.
5.22 TESTING & COMMISSIONING
5.22.1 Testing Of Earthing System.
5.22.2 Purchaser may ask to carry out earth resistance measurements and
other tests in presence of him which in his opinion is necessary to
improve that the system is in accordance with design, specifications,
Indian code of Practice and Indian Electricity Rules. Contractor shall

have to bear the cost of all such test.
1. The lightening protection vertical air terminations and / or

horizontal air termination conductors shall remain in their
installed position even during service weather condition.
2. All joints in the down conductors shall be of welded, brazed type.

All metallic structures in the vicinity of down conductors shall be
bonded to the down conductors.
3. The test joint for down conductors shall be directly connected to

the earthing systems.
5.22.3 Testing of Earth Continuity Path. The earth continuity conductor

including metal conduits and metallic envelopes of cable in all cases
shall be tested for electric continuity and the electrical resistance of
the same along with the earthing lead but excluding any added
resistance of earth leakage circuit breaker measured from the
connection with the earth electrode to any point in the earth continuity
conductor in the completed installation shall not exceed one ohm.
5.22.4 Earth Resistivity Test : Earth resistivity test shall be carried out in
accordance with IS Code of Practice for earthing IS 3043.
6.0 LIGHTING ARRESTOR SYSTEM (ESE TYPE)
6.1 PART 1 – GENERAL ‐WORK DESCRIPTION
6.1.1 1. This standard does not cover the protection of electrical

equipments or system against voltage surges of atmospheric
origin which are transmitted by networks entering the structure.
2. Other standards describe lightning protection system using

simple rod lightning conductor, stretched wires and meshed
conductors.
6.1.2 The lightning protection system shall comprise:‐
6.1.2.1 Air Termination
6.1.2.2 Copper strip
6.1.2.3 Maintenance Free Earthing System based on back fill compound.
6.1.3 Lightning protection system employing steel structural and reinforcement

system as part of the down conductors shall be adopted as per drawing
specified.
6.1.6 Lightening arrestors shall be installed at topmost point of the building.

The quantity for the same shall be designed & specification in BOQ to
cover total building area. Early streamer emission type arrestor shall be
used with Cu pipe & Cu base plate. The arrestor / base plate shall be
connected to separate earth pit with Cu Strip.
6.2 STANDARDS
6.2.1 Complete supply and installation of the lightning protection system shall
be followed for engineering, construction and installation in accordance
of the following standards and with the latest revision with update
amendments.
6.2.2 The detail of the lightning protection system shall confirm to the
requirements of all relevant local codes, as applicable, together with
the additional requirements referred to in this specification and
drawings, whichever is the more stringent and acceptable to the
engineer.
6.2.3 In the adoption of standards and requirements, the Contractor shall

take the following precedence:
1. Engineer’s decision.
2. Local codes of practice
3. Drawings
4. Specification
5. International standards and requirements.
6.3 SUBMISSION
6.3.1 A prior survey may be conducted to determine the protection level to be

considered, the ESE lightning conductor location(s), the down‐conductor
path(s), the earth termination system location(s) and type(s). All technical
submissions shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the respective
stages of construction.
6.3.2 Architectural constrains may be taken into account in the lightning

protection system design and the design shall be based in a manner so
that there is no reduction in the lightning protection system effectiveness.
6.3.3 As a minimum requirement, the submission shall include the following:‐
6.3.3.1 Equipment submission with manufacturer’s data:
6.3.3.2 Sample submission;
6.3.3.3 Shop drawings showing the co‐ordinate routing of air terminations,

down conductors bonding to re‐bar and foundation earth terminations,
methods of fixing etc.
6.3.3.4 Builder’s works requirement.
6.3.3.5 Proposal on testing procedures and report format for testing of the
Lightning Protection System.
6.3.3.6 Details of the Contractor’s installation Professional Engineer who

supervise and endorse the installation for occupation permit application.
7.0 SAFTEY MATERIALS
7.1 SCOPE
7.1.1 This Section covers the requirements of items to be provided in the

sub‐station for compliance with safety and operational needs.
7.2 REQUIREMENTS
7.2.1 Safety provisions shall be generally in conformity with appendices (A)

and (C) of PWD General Specifications of electric works (Part I Internal)
2005. In particular following items shall be provided:
7.3.1 Insulation Mats
7.3.2 First Aid charts and First Aid Box
7.3.3 Danger Plate
7.3.4 Fire Extinguishers
7.3.5 Fire Buckets
7.3.6 Tool Box
7.3.7 Caution Board
7.3.8 Key Board
7.4 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
7.4.1 IS : 5424 Insulation mats
7.4.2 IS : 2878 Portable C02 Fire Extinguisher
7.4.3 IS : 2546 : Fire Buckets
7.4.4 ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
7.5 SUBMITTALS
7.5.1 Product Catalogues.
7.6 SPECIFICATIONS
7.7 INSULATION MATS
7.7.1 Insulation mats conforming to IS:15652-2006 shall be provided in front

of main switch boards and other control equipment as specified.
7.8 FIRST AID CHARTS AND FIRST AID BOX
7.8.1 Charts(one in English, one in Hindi, one in Regional Language),

displaying methods of giving artificial respiration to a recipient of
electrical shock shall be prominently provided at appropriate places.
Standard First Aid Boxes containing materials as prescribed by St.
John Ambulance brigade or Indian Red Cross should be provided in
sub‐station.
7.9 DANGER PLATE
7.9.1 Danger plates shall be provided on HV and LV equipments. LV danger

notice plate shall be 200 mm x 200 mm made of mild steel at least 2
mm thick vitreous enameled white on both sides and with inscriptions in
signal red color on front side as required.
7.9.2 Size of the HV Danger Notice plate shall be 250 mm x 200 mm and
2mm thick.
7.10 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
7.10.1 Portable CO2 confirming to IS : 2878‐1976 dry chemical (confirming to
IS 2171‐1976) extinguishers shall be installed in the sub‐station at
suitable places (like HT/LT panel rooms) as specified.
7.10.2 Foam type fire extinguisher shall be installed in Transformer Room.
7.11 FIRE BUCKETS
7.11.1 Fire buckets confirming to IS: 2546‐1974 shall be installed with the
suitable stand for storage of water and sand.
7.12 TOOL BOX
7.12.1 Standard tool box containing necessary tools required for operation and
maintenance shall be provided in sub‐station.
7.13 CAUTION BOARD
7.13.1 Necessary number of caution boards such as "Man on Line" "Don't
switch on" etc. shall be available in the sub‐station.
7.13.2 The Caution Board shall be of size 300 mm x 200mm made of mild
steel, 2mm thick, vitreous enameled white on both sides and with
inscriptions in original red color on front side as required.
7.14 KEY BOARD
7.14.1 A keyboard of required size shall be provided at a proper place

containing castel keys, and all other keys of sub‐station and allied
areas.
7.14.2 The Key board shall be made of 12mm thick first class teak wood shall
be of size 400 mm x 300m and with adequate depth to hold the keys. It
shall be provided with a lockable type hinged glass door made of 12
mm. thick first class teakwood frame with 3 mm thick sheet glass fixed
with piano hinges. The key board shall enough number of hooks for
hanging the castle keys and all other keys of the sub‐station and allied
areas. It shall be painted with one coat of wood primer and two coats of
white enamel paint.
7.15 SCOPE
7.15.1 This Section covers the requirements of items to be provided in the

sub‐station for compliance with safety and operational needs.
7.16 REQUIREMENTS
7.16.1 Safety provisions shall be generally in conformity with appendices (A)

and (C) of PWD General Specifications of electric works (Part I Internal)
2005. In particular following items shall be provided:
8.0 415 V SWITCHGEAR MAIN BOARD (L.T. PANEL)
8.1.1 This specification covers performance, design, material, construction,

manufacture, inspection, testing, packing forwarding, delivery at site,
testing and commissioning of Low voltage panels for 415 Volts, 3
phase,50 HZ 4 wire system with all accessories complete in all
respects as described in this specification and single line diagrams &
schedule of quantities and as specified.
8.1.2 For each equipment, required IP rating and short circuit rating capacity
will be specified as per requirement.
8.1.3 All the equipments will be factory fabricated in an approved factory

having modern fabrication and testing process. It shall have seven tank
pretreatment process comprising of degreasing, rinsing, phosphating,
rinsing and passivation followed by powder coat painting having a paint
thickness of 60 microns or as specified. The powder paint will be
provided with suitable neoprene gasket to make it dust/ vermin proof.
8.1.4 Whether called for specifically or not, all accessories required for normal
operation of equipment are deemed to be considered as a part of the
contractor’s scope of supply. Hardware / fabricated supports required
for mounting and installation of the panels is within the scope of work. It
is not the intent to specify completely herein, all details of design and
construction of the equipment. However, the equipment shall conform
in all respects to high standard of Engineering, design and
workmanship and be capable of performing in continuous commercial
operation up to the Manufacturer’s guarantees in a manner acceptable
to the Engineer, who will interpret the meaning of the drawings and
specifications and shall be entitled to reject any work or material which
is not full accordance therewith.
8.1.5 The equipment to be offered under this specification shall be of proven

design further, the switchgear must have been type tested in the same
configuration that has been offered.
8.2 CODES & STANDARDS AND APPLICABLE PUBLICATION
8.2.1 In general the equipment shall conform to all relevant IS/IEC standards.
In case of any contradiction between the IS/IEC and this specification,
the more stringent of the two shall apply.
8.2.1 IS : 13947 (Part - I) Degree of protection for enclosures for LV
8.2.2 IS : 1248 Ammeter & Voltmeter (Part - III)
8.2.3 IS 2959 AC contactors up to 1000V
IS : 13947 AC Circuit Breakers
8.2.5 IS : 8623 Factory assembled switchboard
8.2.6 IS 3231 Electrical relays for power system protection
8.2.7 IS : 2705 (Part - I to Current Transformers
8.2.8 IS 3156 & 4146 Potential Transformers.
8.2.10 IS : 13947-2/IEC-157-I ACB
8.2.11 IS : 8828/IEC-898 MCB
8.2.12 IS : 2707 Current Transformers
8.2.13 IS : 2147 Degree of Protection
8.2.14 IS 375 Marking and arrangement for switchgear

bus bars, main connection and control aux.
wiring.
8.2.15 IS 5578 Guide for marking of insulated conductors.
8.2.16 IS 3618 Pre-treatment of MS sheets for

phosphatising.
8.3 SUBMITTALS
8.3.1 The supplier shall furnish specified number of copies of the instruction
manual which would contain detailed instructions for all operational &
maintenance requirement. The manual shall be furnished at the time of
dispatch of the equipment and shall include the following aspects:
8.3.2 Outline dimension drawings showing relevant cross‐sectional views,

earthing details and constructional features.
8.3.3 Rated voltages, current, duty‐cycle and all other technical information,
which may be necessary for correct operation of the switchgear.
8.3.4 Catalogue numbers of all components liable to be replaced during the
life of the switchgear.
8.3.5 General arrangement Drawing.
8.3.6 Single Line Diagram.
8.3.7 Bill of Materials indicating quantity, rating & make of all components,
along with typical catalogues.
8.3.8 Control wiring diagrams, along with electrical interlocking scheme in a
tabular form.
8.3.9 Bus Bar sizing calculations along with supporting documents from Bus
Bar manufacturers.
8.4 INSTRUCTION MANUALS
8.4.1 Unpacking.
8.4.2 Handling at site.
8.4.3 Erection.
8.4.4 Pre commissioning tests.
8.4.5 Operating procedures
8.4.6 Maintenance procedures.
8.4.7 Precautions to be taken during operation and maintenance work.
8.5 TESTS & TEST REPORTS
8.5.1 Typical type test certificates shall be submitted.
8.5.2 Routine test certificates of routine test carried out on the panels shall be
submitted.
8.5.3 The busbars shall be type tested at a reputable international test
laboratory (ASTA or CPRI) for short circuit withstand. The test shall be for
a minimum duration of 1 second. Tests shall be performed over a range
of current ratings, covering the different frame sizes of the manufacturer.
8.5.4 Degree of ingress protection (IP rating) shall also be tested at any
reputed independent laboratory. This test shall be for IP68 in the case of
cast resin busbars, and for IP42/ IP55/IP66 for sandwich busbars.
8.6 SPECIFICATIONS
8.6.1 General
8.6.1.1 The L.T. panel shall comprise the following type of switchgear as
specified. The panel hall be capable of fault withstand capacity as per
panel SLD for duration of one second.
8.6.1.2 The panel shall be floor mounted free standing, metal enclosed, indoor
type having sectionalization of incoming, and outgoing switchgears as
specified. The design shall be cubicle type as specified. The general
construction shall confirm to IS 8623/1993 for factory assembled switch
board. All PCC should be of FORM 3B TYPE 2 (as per IEC 60439‐1:
1999, Annex D)
8.6.2 The panel shall be floor mounted free standing totally enclosed and
extensible type. The panel shall be with lockable arrangement with
Degree of IP protection shall be IP‐ 42 for Indoor application and IP 54
for outdoors, unless otherwise specified. and shall be dust & vermin
proof suitable for the climate conditions as specified. The design shall
include all provisions for safety of operating and maintenance
personnel.
8.6.3 All the LT switchgear panels shall be provided with 15% spare
compartments / space for addition feeders in future.
8.7 CONSTRUCTION
8.7.1 It shall be fabricated out of CRCA not less than 2.0 mm thick for load
bearing members and 1.6 mm for doors of LT panels. The framework
may be Angle iron/Channel/Bolted type constructions. General
constructions shall employ the principle of compartmentalization and
segregation of each circuit. Unless otherwise approved, incomer and
bus section panels or sections shall be separate and independent and
shall not be mixed with sections required for feeders. Each section of the
rear accessible type board shall have hinged access doors at the rear.
Overall height of the board shall not exceed 2.40 meters. Operating
levers, handle etc. of highest unit shall not be at a height more than 1.8
m, and that of the lowest unit shall not be less than 300 mm above
finished floor level. Multi‐tier mounting of feeders is permissible. The
general arrangement for multi‐tier construction shall be such that the
horizontal tiers formed present a pleasing and aesthetic look. The

general arrangement shall got approved before fabrication. Cable
entries for various feeders shall be either rear or from the front through
cable alleys located in between two sections of minimum 300 mm width.
All cable entries shall be through gland plates. There shall be separate
gland plate for each cable entry so that there will not be dislocation of
already wired circuit when new feeders are added. Cable entry plates
shall therefore be sectionalized. The construction shall include necessary
cable supports for clamping the cable in the cable alley or in rear cable
chamber. The vermin proofing shall be such that the vermin cannot
enter from one compartment to another/bus bar chambers. Neoprene
gaskets shall be used for all doors, covers and openings.
8.7.2 All retaining catches, screws and bolts for doors and covers shall be
cadmium plated. Screws and bolts shall be captive. All covers, doors
and joints shall be gasketted.
8.7.2.1 Incomer/Outgoing Cable Termination:
8.7.2.2 Incomer termination shall be suitable for receiving bus trunking/

underground cables. Cable terminations shall invariably be through
terminal blocks (Polyamide or superior) or brought out solid terminals.
All of the incoming/outgoing feeders terminations shall be suitable for
receiving cables from top / Bottom as per shown in drawing schedule.
8.7.3 Instruments
8.7.3.1 All meters shall be Digital type flush mounted type conforming to class
1.5 for accuracy of IS : 1248 and of size of 144 mm2 for incoming
feeders and & 96 mm2 for outgoing feeders.
8.7.4 Indicating Lamps
8.7.4.1 On all incomers of panels, ON/OFF and phase indicator lamps shall be
provided suitable for operation on AC 230 Volts supply. Necessary filter
G/Y/R/A shall be provided depending upon the function. Phase
indicating LED lamps shall be associated with necessary ON/OFF toggle
Switch. All lamps shall be protected by proper control MCBs. All lamps
shall be LED type.
8.7.5 Small Wiring
8.7.5.1 All small wiring controls, indication etc. shall be with suitable stranded
copper conductor cables FRLS / FRLS copper conductor cable. Wiring
shall be suitably protected within the switchboard. Runs of wires shall be
neatly bunched and suitably supported and clamped. Means shall be
provided for easy identification of the wires. Where wires are drawn
through steel conduits,
8.7.5.2 Identification ferrules shall be used at both ends of the wires. All control
wiring meant for External connection are to be brought out on terminal
board. All wiring shall be minimum 1.5 sq.mm. and for C.T. circuits it
shall be 2.5 sq. mm. Brass/Copper thimbles, insulation tape etc. shall
be provided at joints & terminations as required.
8.7.6 Bus Bar & Bus Bar Chambers
8.7.6.1 The bus bar shall be of high conductivity copper/Aluminum as

specified alloy of electrolytic and of adequate section. The bus bar
system shall comprise a system of totally enclosed main horizontal bus
bars run at the top and vertical bus bars serving all modules in vertical
section on either side in cable entries. In case of rear access, horizontal
bus system shall run suitably either at the top or bottom. All connections
to individual circuits from the bus bar shall be with solid connections. All
horizontal busbar, vertical bus brand connections shall be suitably
sleeved with PVC sleeves or suitably insulated in an approved manner.
8.7.6.2 The bus bar temperature should not exceed 85oC i.e. 40oC temperature
rise over 45oC ambient. The calculation for temperature rise and bus
bar sizing should be furnished along with shop drawing for approval.
8.7.6.3 Wherever copper bus bar and Aluminum bus bar are connected to each
other, bimetallic strip shall be used.
8.7.7 Bus Bar Supports and Attachments
8.7.7.1 Bus bar shall be firmly fixed on supports constructed from SMC (glass
fibre reinforced thermosetting plastic). The supports shall be sufficiently
robust to effectively withstand electro‐mechanical stresses produced
in the event of short circuit.
8.7.8 Connection to Bus Bars

8.7.8.1 Connections to bus bars shall be made with bolts and nuts. The bolts
and nuts used for connections to bus bars shall be of Aluminum alloy,
tinned forged brass or galvanized iron. Suitable precaution shall be
taken against heating due to bi‐metallic contact. Further for tapping off
connections from bus bars, PVC insulated wire may be used for current
capacities upto 100 amps and for higher current capacities solid
conductors/strips suitably insulated with PVC sleeves/tape shall be used.
8.7.9 Clearances
8.7.9.1 The minimum clearances to be maintained for open and closed indoor
air insulated bus bars / electrically non‐exposed and working at system
voltages upto 600 volts shall be as follows :
Between …………………………… Minimum
Phase to Earth …………………… 19 mm
Phase to Phase …………………… 25.4 mm
8.7.10 Bus Bar Markings
8.7.10.1 The colours and letters (or symbols) for bus bars :
8.7.10.2 Main bus bar connections and auxiliary wiring etc. shall conform to
relevant Indian Standard. A brief from I.S. 375 (revised) is given below:
8.7.11 For AC bus bars and Main connections
S. Bus Bar & Main Colour Letter/Symbol
No. Connection
a. Three Phase Red, R
Yellow Y
Blue B
b Two Phase Red, Blue R, B
c Single Phase Red R
d Neutral Connection Black N
e Connection to earth Green E
f Phase variable (Such a Grey Grey
connection to a reversible
motors)
8.7.12 Phase Sequence and Polarity
8.7.12.1 Bus bars and main connections, when marked shall be marked in
accordance with the following table to indicate the order in which the
voltages in phases reach their maximum values.
System As indicated by Colors or Phase sequence as

letters indicated Vector ally
Three Phase Red, Yellow, Blue R, Y, B.
Two Phase Red, Blue R, B.
8.7.13 Arrangement of Bus bars & Main Connections :
8.7.13.1 Bus bars and main connections which are substantially in one plane
shall be arranged in order given as follows :
The order of phase connections shall be Red, Yellow and Blue.
When the run of the conductors is horizontal, the red shall be on the top
or farthest away from the centre line as viewed from the front.
When the run of the conductor is vertical, the red shall be on the
extreme left.
When the system has a neutral connection in the same plane as the
phase connections, the neutral shall occupy an outer position.
Unless the neutral connections can be readily distinguished from the

phase connections, the order shall be red, yellow, blue and black.
8.7.14 Terminations
8.7.14.1 Incoming terminals shall be suitable for receiving cables.
8.8 SWITCHGEAR
8.8.1 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
The circuit breakers shall be sheet metal enclosed flush front, draw out
type and shall be provided with a trip free manual operating mechanism
with mechanical "ON" ‐ "OFF" indications. Shunt trip and closing coil
suitable for 230 Volts A.C. shall be provided.
The Circuit breakers shall be for continuous rating, and shall be suitable
for as specified on SLD fault level for one second at 415 volts. The
moving parts of circuit breaker shall have operating mechanism,
primary and secondary isolating devices, auxiliary switches, mechanical
position indicators, all mounted on a rigid sturdy steel frame work.
Primary and secondary disconnecting devices shall be self aligning type
of fully isolating. Microprocessor based with Metering & communication
Relay should be provided.
8.8.1.1 Circuit breaker shall be designed to close and trip without opening the
circuit breaker compartment door. The operating handle and the
mechanical trip push button shall be at the front of the breaker panel
and integral with the breaker. The ACB's shall be withdrawal type. The
ACB operating spring shall be chargeable with charging motor as well
as manually for electrically operated breaker. Spring charging motor
will operate on 230V AC. Once the spring is charged it should be able
to close the breaker and also trip without requiring to be charged. Every
Trip‐Close‐Trip operation with one charge of spring shall be possible.
The ACB's shall be operable both from the cubicle as well as from
remote position. Anti pumping devices shall be used both for electrical
and mechanical to prevent the breaker from restriping. Spring charge /
discharge indication to be provided.
8.8.1.2 Local‐remote selector switch with key interlock and auxiliary contacts to
operate locally and remote position shall be provided.
The breaker shall be provided with remote control switch as well as local
control switch for operating breakers. Suitable contacts for "Auto‐Trip"
annunciation and indication shall be provided.
8.9 CRADLE
The cradle shall be so designed and constructed as to permit the smooth

withdrawal and insertion of the breaker into it. The movement shall be
free from jerks, easy to operate and shall be on steel balls/rollers and
not on flat surfaces. The modules shall be totally inter chargeable, for
same rating.
There shall be 4 distinct and separate positions of the circuit breaker on

the cradle.
Service : Both main and secondary isolating contacts in service.
Test : Main isolating contacts separate and secondary isolating contacts

in service.
Isolated : Both main and secondary isolating contacts in isolated.
Maintenance : Circuit breaker fully outside the panel ready for

maintenance.
8.9.1 There shall be provision for locking the breaker in any or all of the first
three positions. The breaker shall be provided with interlock to prevent
the breaker from being withdrawn or replaced except in the fully
isolated position. Interlock shall also be provided to prevent the breaker
from closing without in service position.
8.9.2 Separate limit switches with minimum 4 'NO' + 4 'NC' potential free
contacts, each shall be provided for 'Test' & 'Service' position of the
breaker. 6 'NO' + 6 'NC' breaker auxiliary contacts shall be provided as
spare.
8.10 PROTECTIVE DEVICES
8.10.1 Protective devices shall be provided as specified in the schedule of

quantities.
8.10.2 There shall be not less than 4 N/O and 4 N/C auxiliary contacts rated 5
amps on each breaker. The auxiliary contacts blocks shall be so located
as to be accessible from the front. The auxiliary contacts in the trip
circuits shall close before the main contacts have closed. All other
contacts shall close simultaneously with the main contacts. The auxiliary
contacts in the trip circuits shall open after the main contacts open. All
current carrying parts shall be silver plated and suitable arcing contacts
with proper arc chutes shall be provided to protect the main contacts.
The heat generated in the contacts due to tripping under fault conditions
shall be very nominal.
8.11 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
8.11.1 Moulded case circuit breakers shall comply with the latest Indian
Standards and IEC standards. They shall have the voltage and current
ratings, rated duty, rated short circuit service breaking capacity and
rated short‐time withstand current as indicated.
8.11.2 Microprocessor based with Metering & communication Relay type.
8.11.3 MCCB's shall be of the independent manual closing air‐break type,

rated for an uninterrupted duty, unless otherwise indicated.
8.11.4 Each MCCB shall have a facility for padlocking in the "OFF"
position.
8.11.5 MCCB shall have front operating Extended door operating handle.
8.12 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
8.12.1 All phases shall be provided with current transformers of accuracy Class
I and suitable VA burden to operate associated metering.
8.12.2 Separate C.T.’s shall be used for protective devices.
8.13 EARTHING
8.13.1 All components, frame etc. shall be properly earthed. Al. earth bars of
50 mm x 6 mm shall be provided for the LT panel for the full length of
the panel and connected to the frame work. Provisions shall be made
for connection from this earth bar to the main earthing bar on both
sides of LT Panel.
8.14 PAINTING
8.14.1 All steel work used in the construction of the LT panels shall have
undergone a rigorous metal treatment process as follows :‐
8.14.2 Effective cleaning by hot alkaline degreasing solution followed by cold

water rinsing to remove traces of alkaline solution.
8.14.3 Pickling in dilute sulphuric acid to remove oxide scales & rust
formation, if any, followed by cold water rinsing to remove traces of
acidic solution.
8.14.4 A recognized phosphate process to facilitate durable coating of the

paint on the metal surfaces and also to prevent the spread of rusting in
the event of the paint film being mechanically damaged. This again,
shall be followed by hot water rinsing to remove traces of phosphate
solution.
8.14.5 Passivating in de‐oxalate solution to retain and augment the effects of

phosphating.
8.14.6 Drying with compressed air in a dust free atmosphere.
8.14.7 Primer coating with two coats of a highly corrosion resistant primer,
applied wet on wet and stove dried under strictly controlled conditions of
temperature and time.
8.14.8 Finishing treatment shall be by powder coating with 60 micron

minimum thickness.
8.14.9 Final paint colour shall be pre approved by the Consultant / Owner.
8.15 LABELS
8.15.1 Anodized Aluminum labels shall be provided on all incoming and

outgoing feeder switches. Circuit diagram showing the arrangement of
the circuit inside the LT panel shall be pasted on inside of the panel
door and covered with transparent laminated plastic sheet.
8.16 INSTALLATION
8.16.1 The installation work shall cover assembly of various sections of the
panels, lining up, grouting the units etc. After connecting up the bus
bars etc. all joints shall be protected with necessary insulated shrouding.
A common earth bar as per IS specifications shall be run at the back
of panel connecting all the sections for connection to frame earth
system. All protections and other small wirings for indication etc. shall
be completed before calibration and commissioning checks are
commenced. All relays, meters etc. shall be mounted and connected
with appropriate wiring.
8.17 TEST AT MANUFACTURERS WORK
8.17.1 All routine tests specified in IS : 8623: shall be carried out
8.17.2 Testing and Commissioning at Site
8.17.3 Commissioning checks and tests shall include all wiring checks and
checking up of connections. Primary/Secondary injection tests for the
relay adjustment/setting shall be done before commissioning in addition
to routine meager test. Checks and tests shall include the following:
8.17.4 Operation checks and lubrication of all moving parts.
8.17.5 Interlock function checks.
8.17.6 Continuity checks of wiring, fuses etc. as required.
8.17.7 Insulation test : when measured with 500 V megger the insulation
resistance shall not be less than 100 mega ohms.
8.17.8 Trip test and protection gear test.
8.17.9 Test witness
8.17.10 Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer. The contractor
shall give at least fifteen days advance notice of the date when the tests
are proposed to be carried out.
8.18 APPROVED MAKES
As per the CIDCO approved IS make.

9.0 POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT

APFC Panel with Harmonic suppressor (APFC) Specification No (ESD-
ED/APFC)
9.1 SCOPE
9.1.1 Supplying, Installing Testing & commissioning manual / Auto power
load correction panel of required capacity in kVAR, 440 Volts, 3 phase
50 Hz, Thyristor switch consisting of minimum 4 steps suitably design to
take care of 5% of load variation at any time. Steps configuration shall
be by the Engineer in charge as per site conditions.
Material:
Capacitors: App Type IS: 13585 part-I 1994 any type gas filled 525
Volts.
Thyristor switches: Thyristor switches should be designed for zero
crossing with snubber circuit forced cooling & min 1600 PIV rating.
Series reactor: Copper wound dry type, iron core suitable as per
requirement.
Harmonic filter circuit: Circuit suitable to filter Harmonics up to 17th
Harmonics.
CRCA sheet: CRCA sheet 14/16 SWG with 7 tank process & powder
coating suitable to site condition of required colour shade.
MS angles & channels: Size as per site condition.
Bus bar: Electrolytic copper bus bar of suitable capacity.
Exhaust fan: Tube axial exhaust fan of adequate capacity.
Fabrication materials: MS Jali, Hinges, nut bolts washers, screws etc. of
suitable size.
Switchgear: SFU, MCB, MCCB, HRC Din type fuse base as specified in
chapter switchgear.
Power factor Controller Relay: Minimum four steps, microprocessor

based programmable intelligent relay / dynamic correction Intelligent
relay with switches time from selected 1sec.to 1200 sec. having display
of system v/s, current, frequency, target PF, THD, short fall KVAR, active
power KW, KVAR, Harmonic display up to 17th order. Accessories:
Digital ammeter, digital Voltmeter, Bar primary CTS Class 1, 15VA and
of require ratio, selector switch indicating pilot Lamps all Bakelite with
colour glass, push buttons.
9.2 Method of Construction:

APFC panel shall be designed to cater required KVAR capacity with 20%
expandable additional load requirement. Fabrication of panel shall be
in such away to accommodate additional extra capacitors. Panel shall
be delivered after testing in presence of the engineer in charge. The
entire equipment shall be installed at designated place, duly wired with
provided cable/leads and giving necessary testing.
9.2.1 The capacitor banks shall generally conform to IS: 1334‐ 1992, 13340‐
199
9.2.2 The capacitor units shall be indoor type, air‐cooled with low viscous
viscosity impregnated paper dielectric hermetically sealed. The
impregnation used shall be non‐in flammable, non‐ oxidizing,
lower freezing point type synthetic compound. Each individual cell shall
be provided with pressure sensitive dis-connectors / devices.
9.2.3 Main connections from the active element shall be brought out through
porcelain bushing. Care shall be taken to solder the bushing to the
cover to ensure perfect hermetic sealing.
9.3.4 Capacitor units shall be provided with externally mounted discharge
resistors to reduce the residual voltage to less than 50 volts in one
minute of switching off.
9.2.5 Individual unit shall be provided with adequate capacity of
MCBs/MCCBs, contactors (capacitor duty) bus bars and terminal
chambers to make bank of required KVAR. Terminal chamber shall be
suitable for bottom/top cable entry. Two earth terminals shall be
provided to each capacitor bank.
9.2.5 Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured according

to the sum of capacitor banks installed on kVAR basis. (i.e. per kVAR)
9.3 REQUIREMENTS
9.3.1 Capacities of the capacitor banks/RLC panels shall be indicated in the

format.
9.4 TESTS AT MANUFACTURERS WORK

9.4.1 All routine and type tests as per IS: 2834 relevant to capacitor banks as
amended upto date shall be carried out at manufacturer’s works and
test certificates shall be furnished to the department.
9.5 INSTALLATION
9.5.1 Capacitor banks shall be installed at least 30cm away from the walls on
suitable metal frame work of welded construction. The earth terminals
provided on the body of capacitor bank shall be bounded to the main
capacitor panel earth bus with 2Nos. 8SWG copper or 6 SWG GI earth
wires.
9.6 TESTS AT SITE
9.6.1 Insulation resistance with 500V DC Megger shall be carried out and test
results recorded
9.7 POWER CONDITIONER SAVERS
9.7.1 Recently RLC circuit operated power factor improvement panels (Power
correction & saver system) are available in the market. These are
more suitable for installations with electrical equipments (computers,
servers, medical equipments electronic ballasts etc.). Capacitor banks
are prone to introduce additional harmonics at such installations and
therefore their use should be restricted at such installations.
9.7.2 The equipments are called power conditioner savers. These are
waveform correction and power factor improvement devices using Rapid
Instruction Semi conductor (RISC) micro controllers/capacitor duty
contactor switching.
9.7.3 These work on principle of using low loss continuously variable
reactance & adjustable phase wise capacitance to provide optimum
impedance to the circuit for transfer efficiently.
9.8 TECHNICAL FEATURES:
1. A micro controller & RISC processor.
2. Intelligent switching operation, fast response, high break relays
(imported).
3. Polarity reversal indication.
4. Phase wise dynamically reactive compensation.
5. Operating power factor 0.6‐ 0.99 Lag.
These devices may save upto 30% energy &provide pure near true,
quality power.
10.0 MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

(SUB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS)
10.1 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PREWIRED DBS
10.1.1 As a general practice only prewired MCB type DBs shall be used, on
account of their superior technical features, compared to conventional
DBs which don’t allow for proper wiring space and wiring termination.
Rewirable fuse type DBs shall not be used.
10.1.2 Prewired DBs shall have following feature:
Recess/ surface type with integral loose wire box.
Phase/neutral/earth terminal blocks for termination of incoming &

outgoing wires
Din Channel for mounting MCBs
Arrangement for mounting incomer MCB/RCCB/RCBO/MCCB as

required.
Copper Bus bar
Earthing terminals
Wiring from MCBs to phase terminal block
Interconnection between terminal block/incoming switch/bus bar/neutral

terminal block/earth terminal connector with specified size FRLS pre
insulated copper conductor cable duly fitted with copper lugs/ thimbles.
Terminal blocks should be suitable for termination of conductor/ cable

of required size but minimum rated cross section of the terminal blocks
should be 6 sq.mm.
Terminal blocks shall be made of flame retardant polymide material
Colored terminal blocks and FRLS wires for easy identification of RYB
Phase, Neutral, Earth.
Prewired DB shall be provided with a detachable cassette for safe

removal of MCBs, RCCBs. Terminal connectors from Db without
loosening the internal cable connection of Phase and neutral circuit.
The prewired DB shall have peel able poly layer on cover for protection
from cement, plaster, Paints etc. during construction period
Detachable plate with knock out holes shall be provided at the

top/bottom of board.
Complete board shall be factory fabricated and pre wired in factory

ready for installation at site. The box and cover shall be fabricated from
1.6mm sheet steel properly pre‐treated, phosphotized with powdered
coated finish.
It shall be of double door construction provided with hinged door.
10.2.1 This section covers specification of Distribution Boards (DBs)

suitable for operation on 415 V 3 Phase 4 Wire 50 Hz supply
feeding final lighting and power sub circuits.
10.2.2 Applicable Codes, Standards and Applicable Publications
10.2.3 Updated and current Indian Standard Specifications and Codes of

Practice will apply to the equipment and the work covered by the scope
of this contract. In addition the relevant clauses of the
10.2.4 Indian Electricity Act 1910,
10.2.5 Indian Electricity Rules 1956,
10.2.6 National Building Code 1997,
10.2.7 National Electric Code 1985,
10.2.8 Code of Practice for Fire Safety of Building (general):
10.2.9 General Principal and Fire Grading ‐ IS 1641 ‐ 1988 as amended up to
date shall also apply.
10.2.10 Wherever appropriate Indian Standards are not available, relevant
British and/or IEC Standards shall be applicable.
10.2.11 Miniature Air Circuit Breakers for AC circuits IS 8828 : 1996 and IEC
947
10.2.12 Residual current operated Circuit Breakers IS 12640 : 1988
10.2.13 Low voltage switchgear and control gear Part II IS 13947 : 1993
10.2.14 Degrees of Protection provided by enclosures for low IS 2147 : 1962

10.2.15 voltage switchgear
10.2.16 Code of Practice for installation and maintenance of IS 10118 : 1982
10.2.17 Switchgear not exceeding 1000 volts
10.2.18 General requirements for switchgear and control gear IS 4237: 1982
10.2.19 For voltages not exceeding 1000 volts
10.3 SUBMITTALS
10.3.1 Drawings and Data
The following minimum information shall be furnished with the Shop
Drawings:‐
Overall dimensions showing front view, plan, elevation and cross
section.
Complete bill of material module wise.
Complete one line diagram.
Instruction Manuals
Contractor shall furnish 6 copies of instruction manual which
shall contain detailed instruction for installation, testing,
commissioning, operation and maintenance requirements.
10.4 SPECIFICATION
10.4.1 General
10.4.1.1 Distribution Boards shall be suitable for operation on 3 phase/single
Phase 415/230 Volts, 50 Hz neutral grounded at Transformer.
10.4.1.2 The Distribution Boards shall comply with the relevant Indian Standards
and Indian Electricity Rules and Regulations.
10.4.2 Miniature Circuit Breakers
10.4.2.1 The MCB's shall be of the completely moulded design suitable for
operation at 240/415 Volts 50 Hz system. The MCB's shall have a
rupturing capacity of 10 KA Ics. The MCB's shall have inverse time
delayed thermal overload and instantaneous magnetic short circuit
protection. The MCB time current Characteristic shall coordinate with
PVC cable characteristic. Watt loss per pole of MCB shall confirm to
value specified in IS 8828 ‐ 1996. Type test certificates from

independent authorities shall be submitted with the tender.
10.4.3 Residual Current Circuit Breakers (RCCB)
10.4.3.1 RCCBs shall comply to IS 12640 ‐ 1988 and shall be of the current
operated type. The RCCB shall be designed to trip within 20 mili sec at
a current sensitivity of 30 mA. The RCCB shall be of 2 pole construction
for single phase and 4 pole construction for 3 phases. All RCCB shall be
complete with test buttons. RCCB shall have a minimum life expectancy
of 20,000 operations.
10.4.4 Distribution Boards
10.4.4.1 DBs shall be wall mounting, recessed/surfaced type, totally
enclosed, dust and vermin proof and Shall Comprise of miniature
circuit breakers, earth leakage circuit breakers, bus bars, neutral link
etc as required, of ratings detailed in the schedule of quantities.
10.4.4.2 DBs shall be double door type access to the wiring shall not be possible
with opening of the outer hinged cover. A cover shall be provided inside
the DB to protect all live parts. Only the operating handle/knobs shall
project outside the cover plate. The door shall be earthed with insulated
copper braded flexible wires.
10.4.4.3 Components forming a part of the DBs shall comply to the relevant
Standards and Codes of the Bureau of Indian Standards.
10.4.4.4 DBs shall be fabricated from minimum 16 gauge CRCA sheet steel and
shall have a hinged lockable spring loaded cover. All cutouts and covers
shall be provided with synthetic rubber gaskets. The entire construction
shall give a IP 54/55 degree of protection unless otherwise stated.
10.4.5 The bus‐bar shall be of electrical grade copper having a maximum
current density of 1.6 ampere per square mm and PVC FRLS
insulated throughout the length. The minimum spacing between phases
shall be 25 mm and between phase and earth 19 mm
10.4.6 Separate neutral link for each phase shall be provided.
10.4.7 All the internal connections shall be with either solid copper PVC
insulated or copper conductor FRLS PVC insulated wires of adequate
rating.
10.4.8 All the internal connections shall be concealed by providing a hinged

protective panel to avoid accidental contact with live points.
10.4.9 All outgoing equipment shall be connected direct to the bus bar on the
live side. The equipment shall be mounted on a frame work for easy
removal and maintenance.
10.4.10 The sheet steel work shall undergo a rigorous rust proofing process, two
coats of filler oxide primer and final powder coated paint finish.
10.4.11 All the circuits shall have an independent neutral insulated wire, one per
circuit, and shall be numbered and marked as required by the Project
Manager.
10.4.12 A sample of the completed board is to be got approved by the Project
Manager before commencement of supply and erection.
10.4.13 Before commissioning, the distribution boards shall be megger tested
for insulation and earth continuity.
10.4.14 The following color coding shall be used for identification of the bus
bars and wiring as per IS 5578:1984: Red phase‐ Red Yellow phase‐
Yellow Blue phase -Blue Neutral‐ Black Earthing ‐ Green Control wiring
‐ Grey
10.4.15 The incoming and outgoing terminals shall be suitable for the
termination of cables as required.
10.4.16 All terminals, busbars shall be insulated and shrouded to avoid
accidental contact.
10.4.17 All metal parts shall be adequately earthed. An earth bus of tinned
copper shall be provided of adequate section and length to
accommodate all circuits
10.4.18 Sheet Steel Treatment and Painting
10.4.19 Sheet steel used in the fabrication of DBs shall undergo a rigorous
cleaning and surface treatment seven tank process comprising of
alkaline degreasing, descaling in dilute sulphuric acid and a recognized
phosphating process after which a coat of primer paint compactively
with the final paint shall be applied over the treated surface. Final paint
coat of oven baked powder coating, of minimum 50 micron thickness,
of sheet approved by Project Manager shall then be provided.
10.4.20 All sheet steel shall after metal treatment be given powder
coated finish painted with two coats of shade 692 to IS 5 on the outside
and white on the inside. Each coat of paint shall be properly stoked and
the paint thickness shall not be less than 50 microns.
10.4.21 Name Plates and Labels
10.4.22 Suitable engraved white on black name plates and identification labels
of metal for all Switchboards and Circuits shall be provided. These shall
indicate the feeder number and feeder designation.
10.4.23 Type Test Type test certificates as per IS 8623 shall be submitted.
11.0 CONDUITING AND WIRING
11.1 GENERAL
11.1.1 The system of wiring shall consist of single‐core/multi‐core PVC

insulated Copper conductor wires in PVC conduits concealed / exposed
or casing pipes as called for. All conduits exposed to air must be GI type
& all accessories required for conduit installation should be hot dip
galvanized or Pure brass type as specified in BOQ.
11.1.2 Standards and Codes
11.1.3 These specifications indicate the General requirements for internal

electrical work including wiring system, panel boards, cable laying,
earthing protection and other related works.
11.1.4 These specifications are drawn to indicate essential requirements

and precautions to be taken regarding internal electrical installation
for ensuring efficient, safe, economical and practicable use of
electrical materials and equipment, in conformity with statutory
regulations and easy maintainability of the installations.
11.1.5 Complete work shall be carried out conforming to the provisions of

Indian Electricity Act and relevant Indian standard Specifications (ISS).
Wherever these regulations are supplemented by the State Electricity
Dept., Electricity Undertakings/Boards, Factory inspector and the Safety
Engineering Dept., the installation shall also comply with these
requirements. Wherever the specifications given in this booklet differs
from those of the statutory regulations, these specifications shall be
followed.
11.1.6 On completion of works, wiring diagram for complete installation shall

be prepared by the contractor and 4 copies of the same shall be
supplied to client.
11.1.7 All wiring diagrams shall indicate clearly in plan the main switch board,
distribution fuse board, the runs of various mains and sub mains and
the position of points with their classifications and controls.
11.1.8 All circuits shall be indicated and numbered in wiring diagram and all
points shall be given the same number as the circuit to switch they are
electrically connected. Distributions boards shall also be marked to
indicate the circuit number controlled by them.
11.1.9 The Contractor shall prepare fabrication and detailed working drawings
and obtain approval of Electrical Inspector, and other local authorities
before submitting them for approval of client. All works shall be carried
out only on approval of drawings. Approval of drawings, does not
relieve the contractor of his responsibilities to meet the intents of
specifications. Wherever service connections are to be obtained from the
local supply company, the contractor shall process the application and
obtain the power supply directed by EIC.
11.1.10 Location of panel boards, distribution boards, switch boards, light

fittings, cable routes, conduit/ CTS wiring routes, earth pits etc. shall
be marked at site and approval of Engineer obtained before proceeding
with the installation work.
11.1.11 Rated Power, Voltage and frequency of supply of current consuming

devices and materials used in installation shall be suitable for the power
and frequency of the supply to which these are to be connected.
11.1.12 Updated and current Indian Standard Specifications and Codes of

Practice as stipulated below shall apply to the equipments and the work
covered in this section. In addition the relevant clauses of the Indian
Electricity Act 1910, Indian Electricity Rules 1956, National Building
Code 2005, National Electric Code 1985, Code of Practice for Fire
Safety of Building (general) : General
11.1.13 Principal and Fire Grading ‐ IS 1641 and IEE wiring regulation 16th
edition as amended up to date shall also apply. Wherever appropriate
Indian Standards are not available, relevant British and/or IEC
Standards shall be applicable.
11.1.14 660/1100 V grade FRLS PVC insulated wires. IS 694 : 1990
11.1.15 Accessories for rigid steel conduits IS 3837 : 1990

11.1.16 Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring IS 3480 : 1990
11.1.17 Switch socket outlets IS 4615 : 1990
11.1.18 3 pin plugs and socket outlets up to 250 volts IS 1293 : 1988
11.1.19 Glossary of items for electrical cables IS 1885 : 1971

and conductors
11.1.20 Conductors for insulated electric cable IS 8130 : 1984
11.1.21 General and safety requirements for IS 1913:1978

fluorescent lamps luminaries
11.1.22 Switches for domestic and similar purposes IS 3854 : 1997
11.1.23 Boxes for the enclosure of electrical accessories IS 5133 : Parts I

& II 1969
11.1.24 Danger notice plates IS 2551 : 1982
11.1.25 Code of practice for personal hazard IS 1644: 1998
fire safety of buildings
11.1.26 Code of practice for electrical installation IS 1646 : 1997
fire safety of buildings
11.1.27 Code of practice for electrical wiring IS 732 : 1989
Installations
11.1.28 Code of practice of fire safety buildings IS 1646 : 1982
(General‐ Electrical installations)
11.1.29 Guide for safety procedure and practices IS 5216 : 1982
in electrical works
11.2 CHECKING OF DRAWINGS
11.2.1 Before commencing the Conduiting work, the Contractor shall

carefully examine the approved floor drawings indicating the layout of
conduits, check the number and size of conduits with respect to number
of wires, location of junction boxes, sizes and location of switch boxes
and other relevant details. Any changes suggested by the Contractor
shall be got approved from the Consultants before the actual laying of
conduits. Any discrepancy found in the drawings shall be brought to the
notice of the Architects/ Consultants promptly before execution of the
work.
11.3 SYSTEM OF DISTRIBUTION AND WIRING:
11.3.1 The wiring shall be done from a distribution system through main and
/or branch distribution boards. The system design and location of
boards will be properly worked out.
11.3.2 Each main distribution board and branch distribution board shall be
controlled by an incoming circuit breaker/linked switch with fuse. Each
outgoing circuit shall be controlled by circuit breaker/switch with fuse.
11.3.3 For non‐residential buildings, as far as possible, DBs shall be separate

for light and power.
11.3.4 Only MCCB/MCB DBs shall be used. Rewirable type fuses shall not be
used.
11.3.5 Three phase DBs shall not be used for final circuit distribution as far as
possible.
11.3.6 ‘POWER’ wiring shall be kept separate and distinct from light wiring,
from the level of circuits, i.e., beyond the branch distribution boards.
Conduits for light/power wiring shall be separate.
11.3.7 Essential/non‐essential/UPS distribution each will have a completely

independent and separate distribution system starting from the main,
switchboard up to final wiring for each system. As for example, conduit
carrying non‐essential wiring shall not have essential or UPS wiring.
Wiring foe essentials and UPS supply will have their own conduit system.
No mixing of wiring is allowed.
11.3.8 Generally, no switchboard will have more than one source of incoming
supply. More than one incoming supply will be allowed only at main
board with proper safety and interlocking so that only one source can
be switched on at a time.
11.3.9 Each MDB/DB/S witch Board will have reasonable spare outgoing ways
for future expansion.
11.3.10 Balancing of 3‐phase circuit shall be done.
11.4 WIRING:
11.5 SUBMAIN & CIRCUIT WIRING:
11.5.1 Submain wiring:
11.5.2 Submain wiring shall mean the wiring from one main/distribution
switchboard to another.
11.5.3 Circuit wiring :
11.5.4 Circuit wiring shall mean the wiring from the distribution board to the
1st tapping point inside the switch box, from where point wiring starts.
11.6 MEASUREMENT OF SUBMAIN & CIRCUIT WIRING:
11.6.1 Circuit and submain wiring shall be measured on linear basis along the
run of wiring. The measurement shall include all lengths from end to
end of conduit or channel as the case may be, exclusive of
interconnections inside the switchboard etc. The increase on account of
diversion or slackness shall not be include in the measurement.
11.6.2 The length of circuit wiring with two wires shall be measured from the
distribution board to the nearest switch box from which the point wiring
starts. Looping of switch boxes also will be counted towards circuit
wiring. Measured along the length of conduit/channel.
11.6.3 When wires of different circuits are grouped in a single conduit/channel,

the same shall be measured on linear basis depending on the actual
number and sizes of wires run.
11.6.4 Protective (loop earthing) conductors, which are run along the circuit
wiring and the sub main wiring, shall be measured on linear basis and
paid for separately.
11.6.5 NOTE: Conduit carrying submain will not carry circuit/point wiring.
Similarly conduit carrying circuit wiring will not carry submain/point
wiring.
11.6.6 Conduit carrying circuit wiring will not carry submain /point wiring.
11.7 MEASUREMENT OF OTHER WIRING WORK :
11.7.1 Except as specified above for point wiring, circuit wiring and
submain wiring, other types of wiring shall be measured separately on
linear basis along the run of wiring depending on the actual
number and sizes of wires run.
11.8 POINT WIRING :
11.8.1 Definition: A point (other than socket outlet point) shall include all work
necessary in complete wiring to the following outlets from the controlling
switch or MCB).
a. Ceiling rose or connector (in the case of points for

ceiling/exhaust fan points, prewired light fittings, and call bells).
b. Ceiling rose (in case of pendants except stiff pendants
c. Back plate (in the case of stiff pendants).
d. Lamps holder (in the case of goose neck type wall brackets,
batten holders and fittings which are not prewired).
11.9 SCOPE
11.9.1 Following shall be deemed to be included in point wiring.

a. Conduit/channel as the case may be , accessories for the same
and wiring cables between the switch box and the point outlet,
loop protective earthing of each fan/light fixture.
b. All fixing accessories such as clips, screws, Phil plug, rawl plug
etc. as required.
c. Metal or PVC switch boxes for control switches, regulators,
sockets etc, recessed or surface type, and phenolic laminated
sheet covers over the same.
d. Outlets boxes, junction boxes, pull‐through boxes etc. but
excluding metal boxes if any, provided with switchboards for
loose wires/conduit terminations.
e. Any special block required for neatly housing the connector in
batten wiring system.
f. Control switch or MCB as specified.
g. 3 pin or 6 pin socket, ceiling rose, or connector as required. (2

pin and 5 pin socket outlet shall not be permitted).
h. Connections to ceiling rose, connector, socket outlet, lamp

holder, switch etc.
i. Bushed conduit or porcelain tubing where wiring cables pass

through wall etc.
11.10 MEASUREMENT:
11.10.1 Point wiring (other than socket outlet points)
11.10.2 Unless and otherwise specified, there shall be no linear measurement

for point wiring for light points, fan points, exhaust fan points and call
bell points. These shall be measured on unit basis by counting.
11.11 POINT WIRING FOR SOCKET OUTLET POINTS :
i. The light (6A) [point and power (16A) point wiring shall be
measured on linear basis, from the respective tapping point of
live cable, namely, switch box, another socket outlet point, or the
sub distribution board as the case may be, up to the socket
outlet.
ii. The metal/PVC box with cover, switch/MCB, socket outlet and
other accessories shall be measured and paid as a separate item.
NOTE: There shall normally be “no the board” light plug point.
iii. The power point outlet may be 16A/6A six pin socket outlet,
where so specified in the tender documents.
11.12 GROUP CONTROL POINT WIRING :
i. In the case of points with more than one point controlled by the
same switch, such points shall be measured in parts i.e. from the
switch to the first point outlet as one point for the subsequent
points, the distance from that outlet to the next one and so on,
shall be treated as separate point(s)
ii. No recovery shall be made for non‐provision of more than one

switch in such cases.
11.13 TWIN CONTROL LIGHT POINT WIRING
11.13.1 A light point controlled by two numbers of two way switches shall be
measured as two points from the fitting to the switches on either side.
11.13.2 No recovery shall be made for non‐provision of more than one ceiling
rose or connector in such cases.
11.14 MULTIPLE CONTROLLED CALL BELL POINT WIRING
11.14.1 In the case of call bell points with a single call bell outlet, controlled
from more than one place, the points shall be measured in parts i.e. (a)
from the call bell outlet to one of the nearest ceiling roses meant
for connection to bell push, treated as one point and classified
according to 1.4.4 and, (b) from that ceiling rose to the next one and so
on, shall be treated as separate point(s) and classified according to
1.4.4.
11.14.2 No recovery shall be made for non‐provision of more than one ceiling
rose connector for connection to call bell in such cases.
11.15 WIRING SYSTEM
11.15.1 Wiring shall be done only by the looping system. Phase/live conductors
shall be looped at the switch box. For point wiring, neutral wire/earth
wire looping for the 1st point shall be done in the switch box; and
neutral/earth looping of subsequent points will be made from point
outlets.
11.15.2 In wiring, no joints in wiring will be permitted anywhere, except in switch
box or point outlets, where jointing of wires will be allowed with use
of suitable connector.
11.15.3 The wiring throughout the installation shall be such that there is no break in
the neutral wire except in the form of linked switchgear.
i. Colour Coding :‐
Following colour coding shall be followed in wiring:‐
Phase : Red/Yellow/Blue. (3 phase wiring)
Live : Red (Single phase wiring)
Neutral : Black
Earth : Green
ii. Termination of circuit into switchboard :‐
Circuit will consist of phase/neutral/earth wire. Circuit will terminate in a

switchboard first tapping point, where from point wiring starts) in
following manner:‐
Phase wire terminated in phase connector. Neutral wire terminated in

neutral. Earth wire terminated in earth connector. The switchboard will
have phase neutral and earth terminal connector blocks to receive
phase/neutral/earth wire.
11.16 RUN OF WIRING :

11.16.1 The type of wiring shall be as specified in the tender documents namely,
surface conduit/recessed conduit, steel/PVC, channel.
11.16.2 Surface wiring shall run as far as possible along the walls and
ceiling, so as to be easily accessible for inspection.
11.16.3 Above false ceiling, in no case, open wiring shall be allowed.
Wiring will be done in recessed conduit or surface steel conduit.
11.16.4 In recessed conduit system, routes of conduit will be planned, so that
various inspection boxes provided don’t present a shabby look. Such
boxes can be provided 5mm above plaster level, and they can be
covered with plaster of Paris with marking of junction boxes.
11.16.5 Where number of electrical services like electrical wiring, telephone
wiring, computer cabling, pass through corridors, it may be proper to
plan such service with properly designed aluminum/PVC channels duly
covered by a false ceiling, so that subsequently such service can be
maintained and additional cables can be provided.
11.16.6 Generally conduits for wiring will not be taken in floor slabs. When it is
unavoidable special precaution to be taken to provide floor channels
with provision for safety and maintenance. Alternatively false flooring
can be provided.
11.17 PASSING THROUGH WALLS OR FLOORS :
11.17.1 When wiring cables are to pass through a wall, these shall be taken
through a protection (steel/PVC) pipe or porcelain tube of suitable size
such that they pass through in a straight line without twist or cross in
them on either end of such holes. The ends of metallic pipe shall be
neatly bushed with porcelain, PVC or other material.
11.17.2 All floor openings for carrying shall be suitably sealed after installation.
11.18 JOINTS IN WIRING :
11.18.1 No bare conductor in phase and/or neutral or twisted joints in phase,

neutral, and/or protective conductors in wiring shall be permitted.
11.18.2 There shall be no joints in the through‐runs of cables. If the length of

final circuit or submain is more than the length of a standard coil, thus
necessitating a through joint, such joints shall be made by means
of approval mechanical connectors in suitable junction boxes.
11.18.3 Termination of multi stranded conductors shall be done using suitable

crimping type thimbles.
11.19 CAPACITY OF CIRCUITS :
11.19.1 Lighting circuit shall feed/fan/call bell points. Each circuit shall not have
more than 800 W connected load or more than 10 points. However,
in case of CFL points where load per point may be less, number of
points may be suitably increased.
11.19.2 Power circuit in non‐residential building will have only one outlet per
circuit.
11.19.3 Each power circuit in residential building can feed following outlets :
a) Not more than 2 nos. 16A outlet
b) Not more than 3 nos. 6A outlets.
c) Not more than 1 no. 16A and 2 nos. 6A outlets.
11.19.4 Load more than 1 KW shall be controlled by suitably rated MCB and
cable size shall be decided as per calculations.
11.19.5 Power wiring with bus trunking: It is permitted to meet large scale power
requirement in a hall, or floor, with use of single phase or 3 phase bus
bars running inside a metal enclosure. This will be provided with
careful design and use of factory fabricated bus‐trunking of reputed

make, conforming to relevant BIS standards and with standard
accessories like End feed unit, tap off with necessary safety features like
over current, short circuit and earth fault protection. Such trunking will
be of specified breaking KA rating.
11.20 SOCKET OUTLETS :
11.20.1 Socket outlets shall be 6A 3 pin, 16A 3 pin or 16/6 amp 6 pin 5 pin
socket outlets will not be permitted. The third pin shall be connected to
earth through protective (loop earthing0 conductor, 2 pin or 5 pin
sockets shall not be permitted to be used.
11.20.2 Conductors connecting electrical appliances with socket outlets shall be

of flexible type with an earthing conductor for connection to the earth
terminal of plug and the metallic body of the electrical appliances.
11.20.3 Sockets for the power outlets of rating above 1KW shall be of industrial
type with associated plug top and controlling MCB.
11.20.4 Where specified, shutter type (interlocking type) of sockets shall be used.
11.20.5 Every socket outlet shall be controlled by a switch or MCB, as specified.

The control switch/MCB shall be connected on the “live” side of the line.
11.21 CABLES :
11.21.1 Copper conductor cable only will be used for submain/circuit/point
wiring.
11.22 INSTALLATION :
11.22.1 Copper conductor cable shall be PVC insulated, Fire retardant, low
smoke (FRLS) type confirming to BIS Specification.
11.22.2 Multi stranded: Cables are permitted to be used.
11.23 MODULAR COVER PLATE MOUNTED WIRING ACCESSORIES
11.23.1 Switches
All 6 and 16 amps switches shall be of the modular enclosed type flush
mounted 220 Volt AC of the best quality and standard. The switch
moving and fixed contacts shall be of silver nickel and silver graphite
alloy and contact tips coated with silver. The housing of switches shall be
made from high impact resistant, flame retarding and ultra violet
stabilized Project Managing plastic material. The switch shall be
connected on to the phase wire of the circuit.
Molded Cover Plates
Switches, receptacles and telephone system outlets in wall shall be

provided with moulded cover plates of shape, size and color approved
by the Project Manager made from high impact resistant, flame
retarding and ultra violet stabilized Project Managing plastic material,
and secured to the box with counter sunk round head chromium plated
brass screws. Where two or more switches are installed together, they
shall be provided with one common switch cover plate as described
above with notches to accommodate all switches either in one, two or
three rows.
One and two gang switch cover plate, telephone outlet cover plate, 6
and 16 amps switched/un switched plates, shall have the same shape
and size. Three and four gang switch cover plates shall have the same
shape and size. Six and eight gang switch cover plates shall have the
same shape and size. Nine and twelve switch cover plates shall have the
same shape and size. Wherever five switches, seven switches, ten
switches and eleven switches are to be fixed the next higher size of gang
switch cover plate to be used and openings shall be provided with
blank-off covers at no extra cost.
11.23.3 Wall Socket Outlets
All 6/16 amps wall socket outlets unless otherwise mentioned on the
drawings shall be switched, with round pins and fitted with automatic
linear safety shutters to ensure safety from prying fingers. Un switched
6/16 amp wall socket outlets where called for in the drawings shall be
of three pin type. The socket outlets shall be made from high impact
resistant, flame retarding and ultra violet stabilized Project Managing
plastic material. The switch and sockets shall be located in the same
plate. The plates for 6 amps.
Switched/ unswitched plugs and telephone outlets shall be of the same

size and shape. All the switched and un switched outlets shall be of the
best standard. The switch controlling the socket outlet shall be on the
phase wire of the circuit. An earth wire shall be provided along the
cables feeding socket outlets for electrical appliances. The earth wire
shall be connected to the earthing terminal screw inside the box. The
earth terminal of the socket shall be connected to the earth terminal
provided inside the box.
11.24 FLEXIBLE CABLE:
11.24.1 Conductor of flexible cables shall be of copper. The cross sectional area
of conductor for flexible cable shall be as per design.
11.24.2 Only 3 core flexible cables shall be used for connecting single-phase
appliances.
11.24.3 Unless the flexible cables are mechanically protected by armour, or

tough rubber, or PVC sheath, these shall not be used in workshops and
other places where they are liable to mechanical damage.
11.24.4 Flexible cable connection to bell push from ceiling rose shall be taken
through steel conduit/metallic casing and capping.
11.25 WIRING ACCESSORIES:
11.26 CONTROL SWITCH FOR POINT:
11.26.1 Control switches (single pole switch) carrying nit more than 16A shall be
modular type. The switch shall be ‘On’ when the knob is down.
11.26.2 Modular type switches of reputed make along with matching mounting
boxes shall be used in non- residential building and residential quarters
of all types. Modular type sockets, stepped type fan regulators shall be
used. All such boxes, switches and accessories shall be of same make of
modular switch manufacturer.
11.26.3 It is recommended to provide double pole MCB in proper enclosure as

power out let for window type AC units, geysers etc.
11.27 SWITCH BOX:
11.27.1 Switch box shall be hot dip galvanized, factory fabricated. Suitable in
size for surface/ recess mounting and suitable in size for
accommodating the required number of switches and accessories
(where required to be used for applications other then modular
switches/ sockets).
11.27.2 Switch box also can be of non-metallic material. The technical

sanctioning authority will approve specified makes of reputed quality
and specifications.
11.28 CEILING ROSE:
11.28.1 A ceiling rose shall not be used on a circuit, the voltage of which
normally exceeds 250V.
11.28.2 Only one flexible cord shall be connected to a ceiling rose. Specially
designed ceiling roses shall be used for multiple pendants.
11.28.3 A ceiling rose shall not embody fuse terminal as an integral part of it.
11.29 LAMP HOLDERS:
11.29.1 Lamp holders may be batten, angle, pendant or bracket holder type as
required. The holder shall be made of brass and shall be rigid enough
to maintain shape on application of a nominal external pressure. There
should be sufficient threading for fixing the base to the lamp holder part
so that they do not open out during attention to the lamp or shade.
11.29.2 Lamp holders for use on brackets and the like shall have not less than
1.3 cm nipple, and all those for use with flexible pendant shall be
provided with cord grips.
11.29.3 All lamp holders shall be provided with shade carriers.
11.29.4 Where center contact Edison Screw lamp holder is used the outer or
screw contact shall be connected to the ‘middle wire’. Or the neutral
conductor of the circuit.
11.30 FITTINGS:
11.31 TYPES:
The type of fittings shall be as specified in tender documents. Indoor

type fittings:
11.31.1 Where conductor are required to be drawn through tube or channel

leading to the fitting, the tube or channel must be free sharp angles or
projecting edge, and of such size as will enable them to be wired with
the conductors used for the final circuit without removing the braiding
or sheathing. As far as possible all such tubes or channels should be of
sufficient size to permit looping back.
11.31.2 Wires used within prewired fittings shall be flexible with PVC insulation
and 14/0.193mm (minimum) copper conductors. The leads shall be
terminated on built-in-terminal block, ceiling rose or connector, as
required.
11.31.3 Fitting using discharge lamps shall be complete with power factor
correction capacitors, either integrally or externally. An earth terminal
with suitable marking shall be provided for each fitting for discharge
lamps.
11.31.4 Fitting shall be installed such that the lamp is at a height of 2.4m above
floor level, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
11.31.5 Fittings made or CRCA shall be phosphatized and powder/epoxy

painted. For coastal areas and humid area like toilets, Kitchen, for
prolonging the life of such fittings, corrosion free materials like
engineering plastic, aluminium, stainless steel etc. Should be used.
11.32 OUTDOOR FITTINGS:

11.32.1 Outdoor fitting shall have suitable IP protection. It is preferable that
street light fitting are of cast aluminium body of IP65, for reducing
recurring maintenance cost and improved performance. Where required
IP66 fitting also can be provided for reducing maintenance frequency
and cost.
11.32.2 Other fittings, which are not available with tested IP 65/54 protection,
can be properly fabricated with weatherproof features, proper
Gasketing etc. As far as possible corrosion free material like cast
aluminium, stainless steel, engineering plastics may be used for
fabrication of such fittings, to prolong life such fittings. There should not
be any exposed wiring in such outdoor fittings.
11.33 ATTACHMENT OF FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES:

11.33.1 Conduit wiring system:
11.32.2 All accessories like switches, socket outlets, call bell pushes and
regulators shall be fixed in flush pattern inside the switch/regulator
boxes. Accessories like ceiling roses, brackets, batten holders etc. shall
be fixed on outlet boxes. The fan regulators may also be fixed on outlet
boxes, if so directed by the Engineer.
11.32.3 Aluminum alloy or cadmium plated iron screws shall be used to fix the
accessories to their bases.
11.32.4 The switch box/regulator box shall normally be mounted with their
bottom 1.25mm from floor level, unless other directed by the Engineer.
11.33.5 Fixing to walls and ceiling:
11.33.6 Wooden plugs for fixing to wall/ceiling will not be allowed. Fixing will be
done with the help of PVC sleeves/Rowel plugs/dash fasteners as
required.
11.33.7 Drilling of holes shall be done by drilling machines only. No manual
drilling of hole will be allowed.
11.34 FANS, REGULATORS AND CLAMPS:
11.35 CEILING FANS:
11.35.1 Ceiling fans including their suspension shall conform to relevant India
Standards.
11.35.2 All ceiling fans shall be wired to ceiling roses or to special connector
boxes, and suspended from hooks or shackles, with insulators between
hooks and suspension rods. There shall be no joint in the suspension
rod.
11.35.3 For wooden or steel joists and beams, the suspension shall consist of GI
flat of size not less than 40mm X 6mm, secured on the sides of the joists
or beams by means of two coach screws of sizes not less than 5 cm for
each flat. Where there is space be placed above the beam, a through-
bolt of size not less than 1.5 cm dia, shall be secured from movements
by means of another bolt and nut at the bottom of the beam. A hook
consisting of MS rod of size not less than 1.5 cm dia shall be inserted
between the MS flat through oval holes on their sides. Alternatively, the
flats may be bent inwards to hold tightly between them by means of a
bolt and nut, a hook of ‘s’ form.
11.35.4 In the case of ‘I’ beams, flats shall be shaped suitably to catch the
flanges And shall be held together by means of a long bolt and nut.
11.35.5 For concrete roofs, a 12mm dia. MS rod in the shape of ‘U’ with their
vertical legs bent horizontally at the top at least 19 cm on either side,
and bound to the top reinforcement of the roof shall be used.
11.35.6 In buildings with concrete roofs having a low ceiling height, where the
fan clamp mentioned under sub clause (v) above cannot be used, or
wherever specified, recessed type fan clamp inside metallic box shall be
used.
11.35.7 Canopies on the top of suspension rod shall effectively hide the
suspension.
11.35.8 The leading in wire shall be of nominal cross sectional areas not less
than 1.5 sq.mm. And shall be protected from abrasion.
11.35.9 Unless otherwise specified, all ceiling fans shall be hung 2.75m above
the floor.
11.35.10 In the case of measurement of extra down rod for ceiling fan including
wiring, the same shall be measured in units of 10cm. Any length less
than 5cm shall be ignored.
11.35.11 The wiring of extra down rod shall be paid as supplying and drawing
cable in existing conduit.
11.36 EXHAUST FANS:
11.36.1 Exhaust fans shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.

11.36.2 Exhaust fans shall be erected at the places indicated by the Engineer.
For fixing an exhaust fan, a circular opening shall be provided in the
wall to suit the size of the frame, which shall be fixed by means of rag
bolts embedded in the wall. The hole shall be neatly plastered to the
original finish of the wall. The exhaust fan shall be connected to the
exhaust fan point, which shall be wired as near to the opening as
possible, by means of a flexible cord, care being taken to see that the
blades rotate in the proper direction.
11.36.3 Exhaust fans for installation in corrosive atmosphere, shall be painted
with special PVC paint or chlorinated rubber paint.
11.36.4 Installation of exhaust fans in kitchens, dark rooms and such other
special locations need careful consideration: any special provisions
needed shall be specified.
11.37 REGULATORS:
11.37.1 The metallic body of regulators of ceiling fans/exhaust fans shall be
connected to earth by protective conductor.
11.38 MARKING OF SWITCH BOARDS:
11.38.1 Schematic diagram:
First a comprehensive schematic diagram for each building is to be
prepared, starting from Main LT Panel, rising main, submain boards,
DBs, etc. and the manner in which they are connected. This will include
essential and UPS systems. Sized of interconnecting main/ submain
cables shall be indicated.
11.38.2 Marking of each Main Board:
Each main boards/ submain board shall be marked indicating rating of
each incoming/outgoing switch and details of load/area it feeds.
Detail/size if incoming and outgoing cable shall be marked indicating
from where the incoming cable has originated.
11.38.3 Marking of Distribution Board:
Each Distribution Board shall be marked indicating detail of incoming
switch (size of cable from where it is fed) and marking of each outgoing
MCB indicating the area it feeds. Suitable marking sticker will be
suitably fixed to indicate such details.
11.38.4 Marking of Power/Light DBS:
Power/light DBs shall be marked ‘P’ and ‘L’
11.38.5 Marking for Non-essential/Essential/UPS/S witch Boards:
Each switchboard shall be marked Essential/non-essential/UPS to
indicate the nature of such switchboards.
11.38.6 Marking of Main earthing terminal:

Main earthing terminals in main/ submain switchboard shall be
permanently marked, as “safety Earth -don’t Remove”.
11.39 LT DISTRIBUTION SWITCHGEAR:
11.39.1 Only following type switchboards will be used:
a. Main/ Submain switchboard of cubicle type.
b. DBs-Only per-wired type MCB type DBs used.
c. Specially designed switchboards.
Also specially designed switchboards can be used with detailed

specification and fabrication drawings approved by the technical
sanctioning authority.
e. Switch board shall be located only in dry situation and well-

ventilated space. They shall not be placed in the vicinity of
storage battery or exposed to chemical fume.
f. Switch boards shall not be erected above gas stove, or sinks or

within 2.5 meter of any washing unit in washing rooms of
launderings or in the bath rooms, toilets, or Kitchen.
g. As far as possible main boards shall not be located in basement.

Such main boards can be located in ground floor.
h. It is preferable to locate floor main boards in rising main shafts

of adequate size, with steel doors (having ventilation) or in
suitable room.
i. Similarly DBs can be in suitable nitches in corridor walls having

doors.
j. Locating main boards under staircase or standing open in

corridor is not a desirable practice, besides being highly
anaesthetic,
k. The main switchboard, which receives power to the building,

should be invariably located in a switch room, having round the
clock access, foe emergency attendance to the switchboard.
11.41 GUIDELINES FOR PLANNING OFFICE BUILDINGS:
11.41.1 The main objective is to avoid possible fire hazards, which calls for
sound detailed designing and use of quality equipments and materials
executed with sound workmanship and supervision.
11.41.2 All control LT Panels, controlling power supply to the entire building will
be located in a centralized room, from where centralized control and
monitoring of the entire power supply system can be made.
11.41.3 Earth fault protection shall be provided for each individual building at
the LT receiving point i.e. Main LT Panel. ELCB shall not be provided as
a matter of routine in distribution boards. These can be provided. If
required, by the Chief Engineer.
11.41.4 Office buildings are prone to fire hazard during night hours. Therefore.
After office hour, all the LT Panels should be switched off. Based on
need of the building, only the specified Lt panel to kept ‘ON’ which feed
the loads during night hours. Such panel, called common service panel,
may feed following loads. Which are normally used after office hours :
i) Staircase/ Corridor/ Compound light.
ii) Fire protection loads.
iii) Pump sets.
iv) Other loads which are kept ‘ON’ after office hours.
11.41.5 Reliability of Power Supply:
Minimum two transformer s to be provides certain redundancy. Also a

smaller size transformer may be provided to take care of reduced load
during ‘after office’ hour to have energy saving transformer, after
proper technical evaluation.
11.41.6 It is preferable to plan for a separate service building, to combine all

electrical and Mechanical services of the building, so that the services
can be maintained comprehensively at a lower cost and also reducing
the overall area requirement. Such service building can combine
electrical substation, DG Sets, UPS, Air- conditioning Plant, water supply
pump sets, etc.
11.41.6 While planning, maintaining of various services to be ensured, like

providing facilities like access, approachability of various equipments,
maintenance space etc.
11.42 LED LIGHTING FIXTURES
11.42.1 LIGHT FITTINGS-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

a. Fittings shall be designed for continuous trouble free operation
under atmospheric conditions without reduction in lamp life or
without deterioration of materials and internal wiring. Degree of
protection of enclosure shall be IP-66 for outdoor fittings except
bulkhead fitting. Bulkhead fitting shall be provided with IP-54
protection. Fittings shall be so designed as to facilitate easy
maintenance including cleaning, replacement of lamps/ballasts.
b. All fittings shall be supplied complete with lamps. All mercury
vapour and sodium vapour lamp fittings shall be complete with
accessories like ballasts, power factor improvement capacitors,
starters, etc. Outdoor type fittings shall be provided with weather
proof junction boxes (IP-55) and IP-54 Control gear boxes. Each
fitting shall have a terminal block suitable for loop-out
connection by 1100 V PVC insulated copper conductor wires upto
4 sq.mm. the internal wiring should be completed by the
manufacturer by means of standard copper wire and terminated
on the terminal block. All hardware used in the fitting shall be
suitably plated or anodized and passivated.
c. Earthing: Each lighting fitting shall be provided with an earthing
terminal. All metal or metal enclosed parts of the housing shall
be bonded and connected to the earthing terminal so as to
ensure satisfactory earthing continuity throughout the fixture.
d. Painting/Finish: All surfaces of the fittings shall be thoroughly
cleaned and degreased and the fittings shall be free from scale,
rust, sharp-edges, and bums.
e. The housing shall be powder coated/stove-enamelled or
anodised as required. The surface shall be scratch resistant and
shall show no sign of cracking or flaking when bent through 90

deg. over 12 mm dia mandrel.
f. Metal used in BODY of lighting fixtures shall be not less than 22
SWG or heavier if so required to comply with specification of
standards. Sheet steel reflectors shall have a thickness of not less
than 20 SWG. The metal parts of the fixtures shall be completely
free from bums and tool marks. Solder shall not be used as
mechanical fastening device on any part of the fixture.
11.42.2 The light fixtures and fittings shall be assembled and installed complete
and ready for service, in accordance with details, drawings,
manufacturer’s instructions and to the satisfaction of the Project
Manager.
11.42.3 Wires brought out from junction boxes shall be encased in GI flexible
Conduits for connecting to fixtures concealed in suspended ceiling. The
flexible pipes shall be provided with a check nut at the fixture end.
11.42.4 Pendant fixtures specified with overall lengths are subject to change and
shall be checked with conditions of the job and installed as directed.
11.42.5 All suspended fixtures shall be mounted rigid and fixed in position in
accordance with drawings, instructions and to the approval of the
Project Manager.
11.42.6 Fixtures shall be suspended true to alignment, plumb, level and capable
of resisting all lateral and vertical forces and shall be fixed as required.
11.42.7 All suspended light fixtures etc. shall be provided with concealed
suspension arrangement in the concrete slab/roof members. It is the
duty of the Contractor to make these provisions at the appropriate stage
of construction.
11.42.8 All switch and outlet boxes shall be bonded to earth with insulated
stranded copper wire as specified.
11.42.9 Wires shall be connected to all fixtures through connector blocks.
11.42.10 Flexible pipes, wherever used, shall be of make and quality approved by
the Project Manager.
11.42.11 Measurement and Payment of Wiring
11.42.12 Wiring for lights, fans and convenience socket outlets shall be measured
and paid for on Point Basis as itemized schedule of quantities and as
elaborated as below (unless otherwise stated).
11.42.13 Fixtures in Hazardous area must be flameproof.
11.42.14 LED Street Light :
Single piece pressure die cast powder coated housing, Single piece
pressure die cast powder coated frame
Visor : Toughened, Glass Synthetic Gasket.
Hardware : S.S. Hardware
Ingress Protection : IP66
Integrated constant current driver, High efficiency thermal design.,

Optics equipped with secondary lens for greater light control and
distribution., Efficacy 100lm/w.
11.42.15 LED Weather Proof Luminaire : Housing Injection moulded corrosion
resistant polycarbonate body.
Visor : Injection moulded polycarbonate.
Hardware : M.S. Zinc plate & Passivated.
Ingress Protection : IP66.
More illuminating area for better optical performance.
Operating Temperature – 100C to 500C
Beam angle 1200
No flickering, No humming, instant start.
Wide spread of light to cover maximum area.
2 Nos. of S.S. Bracket provided for mounting.
11.42.16 LED High Bay : Housing : PC Housing
Visor : Clear polycarbonate sheet.
Gasket : Silicon gasket.
Internal wiring : 1.0 sq.mm copper conductor PVC insulated.
Hardware : M.S. zinc plated & passivated.

Ingress Protection : IP66. And weight is 1.6Kg
900 Beam angle provides uniform illumination over working plane.
Copper heat sink helps faster heat dissipation then conventional
Aluminium heat sink.
Ultra small size and lightweight simplify installation.
Integrated constant current driver.
Lumen efficacy 100lm/w
11.42.17 LED 2X2 Panel :
Surface mounting LED Panel 40W housing extruded aluminium
powder coated frame. Matt finish opal diffuser of glare free and
uniform lighting constant current type., with bracket.
11.42.18 CELENE – SURFACE LIGHTING:

Encloser : White epoxy powder coated CRCA housing
Visor : High quality PMMA acrylic.
Driver : Constant Current Type.
Hardware: S. S. hardware
Optimized led orientation for better light distribution.
No harmful UV/IR radiation and mercury free.
No flickering, No humming, Instant start.
Wide spread of light to cover maximum area.
11.43 WORKMANSHIP
11.43.1 Good workmanship is an essential requirement to be compiled with.

The entire work of manufacture/ fabrication, assembly and installation
shall conform to sound engineering practice.
11.43.2 The work shall be carried out under the direct supervision of a first class
licensed foreman, or of a person holding a certificate of competency
issued by the State Govt. for the type of work involved, employed by
contractor, who shall rectify then and there the defects pointed out by
the Engineer during the progress of work.
11.44 COMMISSIONING OF COMPLETION
11.44.1 Before the workman leaves the work finally, he must make sure that the
installation is in commission, after due testing.
11.45 COMPLETION PLAN AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
11.42.1 For all works completion certificate after completion of work shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
11.42.2 Completion plan drawn to a suitable scale in tracing cloth with ink
indicating the following alongwith three blue print copies of the same
shall also be submitted.
i) General layout of the building.
ii) Locations of main switch board and distribution boards,

indicating the circuit numbers controlled by them.
iii) Position of all points and their controls.
iv) Types of fittings, viz. fluorescent, pendants, brackets, bulk head,

etc. fans and exhaust fans.
v) Name of work, job number, accepted tender reference actual

date of completion, names of Division/Sub Division and name of
the firm who executed the work with their signature.
11.46 DRAWINGS
11.46.1 The work shall be carried out in accordance with the approved drawings
of as directed by Engineer.
11.46.2 All wiring diagrams shall be deemed to be ’Drawings’ within the

meaning of the term as used. They shall indicate the main switch board,
the distribution boards (with circuit numbers controlled by them), the
runs of various mains and sub mains and the position of all points with
their controls.
11.46.3 All circuits shall be indicated and numbered in the wiring diagram and
all points shall be given the same number as the circuit to which they
are electrically connected.
11.47 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
11.47.1 Conduits shall be of metallic or non -metallic type as specified :
A. All rigid PVC conduit pipes shall be ISI marked. The minimum
wall thickness shall be 1.6 mm (16 SWG) up to 32 mm dia and 2
mm (14 SWG) above 32 mm dia. The conduit shall be solid
drawn or reamed by welding and finished with galvanized or
stove enameled surface.
B. All non-metallic conduit pipes and accessories shall be of suitable

material complying with IS:2509-1973 and IS:3419-1976 for
rigid conduits and IS:6946-1973 for flexible conduits. The
interior of the conduits shall be smooth and free from
obstructions. The rigid pipes shall be ISI marked. The minimum
wall thickness of the rigid non -metallic conduits shall be 1.6 mm
up to 25 mm dia conduit.
C. No conduit less than 20 mm in diameter shall be used.
D. All metallic conduit accessories shall be only threaded type, pin

grip or clamp type accessories are not acceptable.
E. Accessories for non-metallic rigid type of conduits shall be

normally of grip type.
11.48 CASING AND CAPPING
11.48.1 Casing and capping shall be of good quality PVC, free from defects like
deformations, unevenness, blisters, cavities, etc.
11.48.2 The casing shall be of square or rectangular body with top of the side
walls suitable for tightly fitting slide-in type capping with double
grooving. All surfaces shall have smooth finish inside and outside.
11.49 STREET LIGHT POLES

Octagonal Poles (OH-PL/OPL)
Scope:
Supplying and erecting 8mtr/9mtr. high galvanized octagonal pole
details are as specified below.
Material:
8mtr/9mtr. high galvanized Octagonal Pole with details of given below :
Particulars CSR Item No. 8-3-3 CSR Item No. 8-3-4

Material Galvanised as per Hot dipped galvanized as
specification per specification BSEN ISO
1461
Top and bottom 100mm A/F and 200mm 70mm A/F and 155mm
dia. thickness A/F thickness 3mm HT A/F thickness 3mm HT
plate. plate
Bracket 1500mm long decorative 1500mm long decorative
sword type single arm sword type double arm
bracket bracket
Method of Construction :
The pole shall be erected in provided cement concrete foundation

specially designed. Erection shall be in plum.
Mode of Measurement :
Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e. each).
11.50 Brackets for Outdoor fittings (BKT)
Bracket welded to Pole Cap (BKT/BPC)
Fabrication of Street light bracket of specified diameter ‘B’ class G.I.

Pipe, of specified length welded to pole cap erected on top of the pole
for erection of either single/double, side entire WP
fluorescent/CFL/MV/MH/SV fitting(s). duly painted with one coat of red
oxide & one coat of Aluminium paint, and erecting the same with
provided leads.
Material:
G.I. Pipe: The galvanized iron pipes shall comply with IS: 1239—1973
and 1969 for the specified class. The specified diameter of the pipes
shall refer to inside diameter.
Pole Cap: Pole cap fabricated from 4 mm thick MS Sheet, of 30 cm in
length.
Corner support: 3 mm thick MS flat/sheet
Set screw: MS bolts, nits of 6 mm dia.
Paint: Red oxide & Aluminium paint.
Method of Construction:
The bracket shall be fabricated as per drawing No(s) BKT-1 (Fig.1 Fig.3)
BKt-2 (Fig.4 Fig.5) and shall be placed on the pole cap, Inner diameter
of pole cap shall be as per the outer diameter of pole with sufficient
clearance, so as to facilitate easy placing of the cap on top of pole. Two
holes minimum 6 mm diameter shall be drilled to pole cap. The nits
shall be placed on the pole cap duly aligned with the hole, and shall be
butt welded Bolts shall then be tightened through the nut so as to hold
the bracket in vertical position.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis (i.e. each)
11.51 STREET LIGHT BOXES (SB)
Providing and fixing of CRCA sheet metal/ FRP boxes on pole with
MS Clamps fixing to poles and terminating the cable.
Material:
CRCA sheet metal box: 16 swg CRCA sheet with mounting
arrangement for kitkat MCB.
Bakelite connectors: Bakelite connector of 2/4 ways,32A,250 V.
MS Clamps: Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, of 3

mm thick mild steel having 40 mm width.
Hardware: 10 mm mild steel nuts and bolts.
Paints for CRCA box: Superior quality aluminium / silver paint or
required shade enameled paints as per the requirement of site
engineer.
Primer/ Red oxide: Superior quality primer /red oxide for use on
sheet metal.
CRCA Sheet metal boxes:
Box shall be fabricated from 16 swg CRCA sheet as per dimensions
specified in item, with minimum 3 mm fold on front side of the box so
as to make it water proof ( Rubber beading/ gasket shall be pasted
on the edges/ asbestos rope beading.) Edges of front cover shall be
folded in such a manner so that it shall cover the front opening of the
box. The front cover shall be fixed either by screws or be hinged ( as
per requirement), with self-locking arrangement. There shall be
provision of fixing connector/ porcelain kitkat fuse/ single pole MCB,
inside the box. Provision of two holes of minimum 10 mm dia. For
fixing bolt of clamp and one hole of required dia. For PVC wire
leads, shall be made at the rear side of the box and provisions for
holes of required dia. At bottom for fixing the cable gland of
incoming and outgoing cables. Box shall have earth terminal. Box
shall have anti rust treatment and be painted with two coats of red
oxide and finally two coats aluminum/ silver paint. Rubber gasket
shall be provided for making the box watertight. Unless and
otherwise specified the mounting height of the box shall be minimum
1750 mm from the finished ground level for facilitating easy
maintenance.
FRP boxes:
FRP boxes manufactured with minimum wall thickness of 2.7 mm
either gray or blue in colour having provisions for fixing either
porcelain kitkat fuse or single pole MCB 4 way Bakelite connector,
and with provision of two holes of minimum 10 mm dia. For fixing
bolt of clamp and one hole of required dia. For PVC wire leads, shall
be made at the rear side of the box and one hole of required dia. At
bottom to for fixing the cable gland of incoming and outgoing
cables. The front cover shall be hinged, with locking arrangement
and lock and key. The mounting height of the box shall be minimum
1750 mm from the finished ground level for facilitating easy
maintenance. Whenever required fixing of box shall be done with MS
clamps of required length, so as to hold pipe pole/RSJ pole and shall
be painted in approved manner.
Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (I.e each)
11.52 PAINTING (PTG)
General:
This part of specification deals with the painting of all types of Fans,
Street Light Poles, Fluorescent fitting, Transformer, Fencing & Gate of
transformer substation, Feeder pillar, etc.
A) Painting of Fans (PFT)
Scope:
Spray painting of table fan / pedestal fan / cabin fan / ceiling fan /
exhaust fan including guards etc., shall be carried out in the workshop
by adopting following method:
a) Existing paint on the surface of the fan body and its accessories shall
first be scrapped off with the help of Emery paper of required grade or
by heating the surface with blowlamp. One coat of primer shall then be
uniformly applied with spraying gun and same shall be allowed to dry
out. The body of fan then shall be spray painted with 2 coats of enamel
paint of specified colour. When the colour is completely dried, rubbing
Wax compound shall be applied. With a smooth cloth, the surface shall
then be vigorously rubbed, until the painted parts start shining. Same
method shall be adopted for fan blades, base & stand of pedestal fan,
mounting frame of exhaust fan. After complete drying, fan shall be
covered in paper, to avoid abrasion.
b) Grills of the fan shall be soaked and then cleaned with solvent and
pressure dried. Paint shall be applied either by brush or with by
spraying. After complete drying, it shall be covered in paper, to avoid
abrasion.
c) The agency shall have to make arrangement of transportation of fans
from site to workshop & back to site, after completion of painting job.
Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis (i.e. each)
B) Painting of Poles/Channels (PTP)
Scope:
Painting of channel / steel tubular / Rail / RSJ / pipe pole along with
street light / pole brackets / clamps completely & providing one coat of
red oxide paint and two coats of aluminum paint (Black paint up to
1.5m from plinth is recommended)
a) Existing paint of the pole/channel shall be scrapped completely by

emery paper / wire brush then one coat of red oxide shall be applied on
cleaned surface. After drying out of the red oxide two coats of aluminum
paint shall be uniformly applied to the pole/ channel. In case of pole, it
is recommended to apply black paint for the portion, which shall get
embedded in soil/ foundation. Remaining portion of the pole shall then

be painted with two coats of aluminum paint as per instruction.
b) The agency shall make arrangement of ladders, tools, spares etc.

required for carrying out painting at site also due care shall be taken for
shut downs in case of lines in operation.
Executed quantity shall be measured on running meter basis. (i.e per

meter)
12.0 FIXING SWITCH BOXES AND ACCESSORIES

Switch boxes shall be mounted flush with the wall. All outlets such as
switches, socket outlets etc. shall be flush mounting type, unless
otherwise specified in the Additional Specifications.
12.1 FISH WIRE
12.1.1 To facilitate subsequent drawing of wires in the conduit. GI fish wire of
1.6mm/ 1.2mm (16/18 SWG) shall be provided along with the laying of
the recessed conduits.
12.2 BUNCHING OF CABLES
12.2.1 Cables carrying direct current may, if desired, be bunched whatever
their polarity, but cables carrying alternating current, if installed in metal
conduit shall always be bunched so that the outgoing and return cables
are drawn into the same conduit.
12.2.2 Where the distribution is for single phase loads only, conductors for
these phases shall be drawn in one conduit.
12.2.3 In case of three phase loads, separate conduits shall be run from the
distribution boards to the load points, or outlets as the case may be.
12.3 EARTHING REQUIREMENTS
12.3.1 The entire system of metallic conduit work, including the outlet boxes
and other metallic accessories, shall be mechanically and electrically
continuous by proper screwed joints, or by double check nuts at
terminations. The conduit shall be continuous when passing through
walls or floors.
12.3.2 Protective (loop earthing) conductor (s) shall be laid along the runs of
the conduit between the metallic switch boxes and the distribution
boards/switch boards, terminated thereto. These conductors shall be of
such size and material as specified. Depending upon their size and
material, the protective earth Conductors shall be either drawn inside
the conduits along with the cables, or shall be laid external to the
conduits. When laid external to the conduits, this shall be properly
clamped with the conduit at regular intervals.
12.3.3 The protective conductors shall be terminated properly using earth studs,
earth terminal block etc. as the case may be.
12.3.4 Gas or water pipe shall not be used as protective conductor (earth
medium).
13.0 TESTING OF INSTALLATION FOR WIRING
13.1 SCOPE
13.1.1 This chapter describes the details of tests to be conducted in the

completed internal electrical installations, before commission.
13.2 GENERAL
13.3 TESTS
13.3.1 One completion of installation, the following tests shall be carried out.
i. Insulation resistance test
ii. Polarity test of switch.
iii. Earth continuity test.
iv. Earth electrode resistance test.
13.4 WITNESSING OF TESTS
13.4.1 Testing shall be carried out for the completed installations, in the
presence of and to the satisfaction of the Engineer by the contractor. All
test results shall be recorded and submitted to the client & Electrical
consultants.
13.5 TEST INSTRUMENTS
13.5.1 All necessary test instruments for the tests shall be arranged by the
contractor if so required by the Engineer.
13.6 INSULATION RESISTANCE
13.6.1 The insulation resistance shall be measured by applying between earth

and the whole system of conductors, or any section thereof with all fuses
in place, and all switches closed, and except in earthed concentric
wiring, all lamps in position, or both poles of the installation otherwise
electrically connected together, a direct current pressure of not less than
twice the working pressure, provided it need not exceed 500 volts for
medium voltage, circuits, where the supply is derived from a three wire
D.C. or a polyphane A.C. system the neutral pole of which is connected
to earth either directly or through added resistance, the working
pressure shall be deemed to that which is maintained between the

phase conductor and the neutral.
13.6.2 The insulation resistance shall also be measured between all the
conductors connected to one pole, or phase conductor of the supply,
and all the conductors connect to the neutral, or to the other pole or
phase conductors of the supply with all the lamps in position, and
switches in off position, and its value shall be not less than that specified
in sub case.
13.6.3 The insulation resistance in megaohms measured as above shall not less
than 12.5 megaohms for the wiring with PVC insulated cable subject to
a minimum of 1 megaohm.
13.6.4 Where a whole installation is being tested, a lower value than that given
by the formula, subject to a minimum of 1 megaohm, is
acceptable.9.6.5A preliminary and similar test may be made before the
lamps etc. are installed and in this event the insulation resistance to
earth should not be less than 25 megaohms for the wiring with PVC
insulated cables, subject to a minimum of 2 megaohms.
13.6.5 The term outlet includes every point along with every switch except that a
switch combined with a socket outlet, appliance or lighting fitting is
regarded as one outlet.
13.6.6 Control rheostats, heating and power appliances and electric signs may,
if required, be disconnected from the circuit during the test, but in that
event the insulation resistance between the case or frame work, and all
live parts of each rheostat, appliance and sign shall be not less than that
specified in the relevant Indian Standard Specifications, or where there is
no such specification, shall be not less than one megaohm.
13.7 POLARITY TEST OF SWITCH
13.7.1 In a two wire installation a test shall be made to verify that all the
switches in every circuit have been fitted in the same conduits
throughout, and such conductor shall be labeled or marked for
connection to the phase conductor or to the non-earthed conductors of
the supply.
13.7.2 In a three wire or a four wire installation, a test shall be made to verify
that every non linked single pole switch is fitted in a conductor which is
labeled, or marked for connection to one of the phase conductors of the
supply.
13.7.3 The installation shall be connected to the supply for testing the terminals
of all switches shall be tested by a test lamp, one lead of which is
connected to the earth. Glowing of test lamp to its full brilliance, when
the switch is in ’ON’ position irrespective of appliance in position or not,
shall indicate that the switch is connected to the right polarity.
13.8 TESTING OF EARTH CONTINUITY PATH
13.8.1 The earth continuity conductor, including metal conduits and metallic
envelopes of cables in all cases, shall be tested for electric continuity.
The electrical resistance of the same alongwith the earthing lead, but
excluding any added resistance, or earth leakage circuit breaker,
measured from the connection with the earth electrode to any point in
the earth continuity conductor in the completed installation shall not
exceed one ohm.
13.9 MEASUREMENT OF EARTH ELECTRODE RESISTANCE
13.9.1 Two auxiliary earth electrode, besides the test electrode, are placed at
suitable distance from the test electrode (see figure). A measured current
is passed between the electrode ’A’ to be tested and an auxiliary current
electrode ’C’ and the potential difference between the electrode ’A’ and
auxiliary potential ’B’ is measured. The resistance of the test electrode
’A’ is then given by;
R = V/I
R = Resistance of the test electrode in
V = Reading of the voltmeter in volts.
I = Reading of the ammeter in amps.
13.9.2 Stray currents flowing in the soil may produce serious errors in the
measurement of earth resistance. To climate this, hand driven generator
is used.
13.9.3 If the frequency of the supply of hand driven generator coincides with
the frequency of stray current, there will be wandering of instrument
pointer. An increase or decrease of generator speed will cause this to
disappear.
13.9.4 At the time of test, the test electrode shall be separated from the
earthing system.
13.9.5 The auxiliary electrodes shall be of 13mm diameter mild steel rod driven
upto 1m into the ground.
13.9.6 All the three electrodes shall be so placed that they are independent of
the resistance area of each other. If the test electrode is in the form of a
rod, pipe or plate, the auxiliary current electrode ’C’ shall be placed at
least 30m away from it, and the auxiliary potential electrode ’B’ shall be
placed mid way between them.
13.9.7 Unless three consecutive readings of test electrode resistance agree, the
test shall be repeated by increasing the distance between electrodes A
and C upto 50m and each time placing the electrode B midway
between them.
13.9.8 On these principles, ’Megger Earth Tester’ containing a direct reading

ohm-meter, a hand driven generator and auxiliary electrodes are
manufactured for direct reading of earth resistance of electrodes.
13.10 TEST CERTIFICATE
13.10.1 One completion of an electrical insta.11a.tion (or an extension to an

installation) a certificates shall be furnished by the contractor,
countersigned by the certified supervisor under whose direct supervision
the installation was carried out. This certificate shall be in the prescribed
form as given in Appendix ’F’ in addition to the test certificate required
by the Local Electric Supply Authorities.
14.0 INSTALLATION
14.1 GENERAL
14.1.1 The installation shall be carried out in accordance with the Indian
Electricity Rules, the codes of Practice of Bureau of Indian Standards and
other relevant regulations.
14.2 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH BOARDS
14.2.1 Switch Boards shall be floor mounted in the room on the pre-formed
trenches constructed with top /bottom entry for cables or free standing
on floor with top entry for cables.
14.2.2 The portion of the trenches which is not covered by the switch board
shall be covered with 6 mm thick checkered steel plates with suitable MS
reinforcement if required.
14.2.3 All unused cables entries shall be closed with suitable blind plugs or
plates made from 4 mm thick sheet steel bolted to the gland plates.
14.3 MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARD
14.3.4 MCB Distribution Board shall be fixed with bolts and nuts grouted to the
wall concealed in the cupboards /niches provided or flushed /semi
flushed directly into the wall.
14.4 WIRING
14.4.1 PVC insulated wires shall be drawn through concealed PVC conduits
/open metal conduits.
14.4.2 The wires of a circuit shall not run through the conduits switch / socket
boxes of another circuit. A common draw box with hylam barrier
separating individual circuit wires may be adopted to minimize the
number of draw boxes.
14.4.3 Wires shall be terminated at the switch boxes with suitable crimping type
tinned copper lugs.
14.4.4 The wiring shall be carried out by looping the phase conductors all the
switch box and control conductors at the lights, fans and sockets. For
coping of sires in switch boxes, shrouded type multiway 10A / 20A rated
connectors shall be used.
14.5 CIRCUIT WIRING

14.5.1 The circuit wiring shall be from MCB distribution boards to first switch
box and looping the consecutive switch box in the circuit including
conduits and accessories.
14.6 POINT WIRING
14.6.1 The following shall be deemed to be included in Light / Ceiling Fan /
Exhaust fan / Call bell / 6A /15 A,AC , Water cooler, Compressor,
socket points etc :
• Conduit & conduit accessories (bends, tee, deep junction boxes, fan
hook boxes) from switch box T point.
• Wiring of point from switch to point.
• Earth wiring of each point from switch to point.
• Fixing accessories such as clips, nails, screws, fill plug, rent plug etc. as
required.
• Modular range of plate type cover plate, control switch, box etc.
• Junction boxes, pull boxes etc.
• Connectors for termination of points.
• Ceiling rose / Angel holder / Batten holder for light points.
• 6 A socket outlet .
• 6 A /15 A socket outlet and switch for socket points.
• Cutting and chasing the wall for conduit & boxes installation and
making good the same in original finish after installation complete as
required.
14.7 TELEPHONE WIRE
14.7.1 The telephone wire shall be drawn in the conduits provided for the
purpose. It shall be terminated with standard termination accessories at
the end of socket pin and Telephone junction boxes.
14.8 SWITCH / SOCKET BOXES
14.8.1 Switch / Socket Boxes shall be concealed in the wall and the mounting
height of the boxes shall be as indicated in the drawings.
14.8.2 The switch and socket front plates shall project beyond the switch /
socket box. In the case of concealed conduit wiring, the joints between
the box and the surrounding plaster are covered by the cover plate. The
cover plate shall be fixed with brass cup washers and full threaded brass
screws.
14.9 LUMINAIRES
14.9.1 The installation of luminaries shall be at fixed locations indicated in the
drawings or as directed by Engineer with necessary fixing accessories.
14.10 CABLES
14.10.1 The underground cable shall be laid in excavated trenches outside the
building. The trenches shall be excavated to a depth of not less than
800 mm and the cables shall be laid at a depth of 750 mm.
14.10.2 The cables shall be laid over a 50 mm thick sand cushion at bottom and
250 mm on top of cable and shall be with bricks at either ends of trench
and protected at top by slab/bricks. The gap between the cables and the
bricks shall be fill with sand, after that for 400 mm (i.e.) upto firm
ground level the cable trench shall be back filled suitably with soil.
14.10.3 The cable trench shall have the widths as indicated by suitably
excavating in types of soil to attain the required width.
14.10.4 Cable makers shall be installed at every 30 m interval along all straight
lines and at bends. The cable markers shall be of cast iron and shall
have a clear and legible inscription “LT CABLE”.
14.10.5 Wherever cables are required to enter the building the cable shall be
through Hume pipe or GI pipe. Suitable packing shall be made at both
ends of the pipes. Cables inside building shall be run in cable trays.
14.10.6 Where cables are required to cross the roads, cables and pipes of other
services the cables shall be drawn through Hume pipe or GI pipe.
Suitable sealing shall be made at both ends of the pipes.
14.10.7 Vertical runs of cables along the wall shall be laid through GI pipe of
suitable diameter upto a height of 900 mm above finished floor level.
The
14.10.8 GI pipe shall be clipped to the wall with GI clamps and GI screws. The
distance between the clamps shall not exceed 400 mm.
14.10.9 The cable laying shall be done in such a way that there is no damage /
injury to the cable. Adequate care shall be taken while pulling cable
from drum and while laying.
14.10.10 Sharp bends shall be avoided in the cable runs. The bending radius
shall not be less than 12 times the diameter of the cables.
14.10.11 No joints shall be permitted in the runs of the cables upto a run of 500
Meter.
14.10.12 Where more than one cable has to be laid along the same route, the
cables shall be laid horizontally touching each other and not one above
the other.
14.10.13 The armour of the cables shall be effectively earthed at termination
point through cables glands.
14.10.14 Suitable phase identifiers shall be provided at the terminals.
14.10.15 The cables shall be laid in preformed trenches wherever required. The
preformed trench shall be RCC casting on all the sides. 50 x 50 x 6 mm
MS angle at required intervals shall be fixed to the casting. The
preformed trench shall be covered with RCC cover which shall be
capable of taking the heavy vehicular load. The wall thickness of
preformed trench shall be suitable to take al type of loads.
14.11 STREET LIGHT POLES
14.11.1 Poles for external lighting shall be installed along the road / pathway
edges as indicated in the drawing and shall be provided with cement
concrete foundation below the ground level and above the ground level.
14.11.2 The concrete used for the foundation shall be fixed in 1:1.5:3
proportions with stone aggregate of 20 mm nominal size. Concreting
shall be done solidly to avoid honeycombing using shuttering.
14.11.3 The depth and height of the concrete work shall be as per requirement
of the pole heights as indicated in drawing or as advised by Engineer.
14.12 STREET LIGHT LUMINAIRE
14.12.1 The luminaries shall be installed at the locations indicated over the
poles. The lamps shall be fixed after the luminaries are installed.
15.0 IMPORTANT INSTRUCTION FOR POINT WIRING

ELECTRICAL WORKS
15.1 GENERAL
15.1.1 Rates quoted shall be for work to be carried out at all heights and levels
as required at site. No extra payment on this account shall be
admissible.
15.1.2 Wiring
15.1.3 Rates quoted for Point Wiring items shall be based on average wiring
and average Conduiting length in all areas of the project. Irrespective of
their being shown in tender drawings or not. No extra claim on this
account shall be admissible.
15.1.4 Cost of circuit wiring (wiring from DB terminal to the first switch in any
sub circuit) shall be measured separately.
15.1.5 Rate quoted for Point Wiring for ceiling fan points shall also include the
cost of providing fan hook cum outlet box in the ceiling. The switchbox
shall have space provision for electronic fan regulator.
15.1.6 Same rate shall be payable for wiring in surface Conduiting system or
recessed Conduiting system
15.1.7 Wiring colour code - Red, Yellow, Blue for three Phases, Black for
Neutral and Green for Earth - shall be maintained for entire wiring
except on UPS
15.1.8 All wiring accessories (switches, socket outlets, bell pushes etc..), shall be
as per approved make, type and colour. Sample of each type shall be
got approved by Project Manager before use on work.
15.1.9 Rates for wiring of IP 56/ Metal clad 20/32 amps single/three phase
socket outlets shall include the cost of matching plugs also.
15.2 SUB-MAINS AND MAINS
15.2.1 Payment of sub main wiring in conduit shall be as per the length of
conduit measured between conduit terminations. Wires without conduits
inside equipments for making terminal connections at either end shall

not be payable extra.
15.2.2 Payment of cables shall be based on length of cable laid between cable
termination glands on either end. Length of cable leads inside the cable
termination arrangement shall not be payable extra..
15.2.3 Annular space around cables, conduits, bus ducts and rising mains shall
be filled by fire resistant compound of approved make and type in
accordance with the compound manufacturer’s instructions.
15.2.4 Annular space around cables/earth strips entering below ground level
into the building shall be filled up with suitable mastic compound to
prevent ingress of rodents and water into the building.
15.3 SWITCHBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
Quoted rates shall be inclusive of the cost of the following.
• Details of sub-circuits being fed by DBs shall be affixed on the back of

the DB door of each DB Earth bonding of all hinged doors (of DBs and
SDB cubicles/panels) shall be effectively done by braided flexible copper
wire .
• All doors and operable covers shall be gas kitted with neoprene gaskets.
3 mm thick gland plate shall be provided at top/bottom of SDBs for
cable entry.
• 1 no. sample DB shall be got approved from Project Manager before
undertaking bulk procurement/fabrication.
• All DBs and SDBs shall be designated by engraved name plates of
approved material, finish and lettering fixed by countersunk Nickel
/cadmium plated screws. Danger plates shall be affixed on all three
phase boards.
• An as-built schematic wiring diagram in stencilled permanent ink and
housed in wooden frame with clear non- reflective acrylic cover shall be
provided near main LT panel in substation / electrical room.
• Framed safety instructions complete with emergency telephone numbers
shall also be provided inside each switch room and generator room..
• Contractor shall provide bus bar rating calculation for current carrying
capacity, short circuit thermal and electro dynamic stresses to comply to
the current and fault current withstand specified for each item of
switchboard, rising main, bus ducts etc. for approval of project manager
prior to fabrication. Changes if any required by contractor shall be
incorporated without any additional cost.
15.4 FIXING OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
Quoted rates shall include the following:
• All components that may be required to make the installation complete

in all respects such as,
• Suitable length of down rod, hanger and connecting wires where called
for.
• Internal wiring between accessories.
• Wiring for connecting the fixtures to the point through connection
blocks.
• Metal blocks to serve as base of fixtures. Bonding with earth.
• Drilling holes in supports where required.
• Fixing clamps, GI bolts and nuts, brass screws, saddles, rawl plugs and
other fixing accessories as required.
• For any fixtures and fittings required to be fixed to the RCC slab/Wall,
the Contractor shall drill the required holes with the use of an
appropriate drilling machine with drill bits and no extra charges shall be
payable on this account..
15.5 SUPERVISION
Installation & commissioning of LT Panels, etc. (Materials / Equipments

Supplied by owners).
• Movement from the point of unloading to the point of erection.

• Erection on provide duct / Foundation with necessary fabrication if
required.
• Termination of cables, earth connections etc.
• Assisting in commissioning.
• Any minor work to be carried out for completion.
15.6 WIRES AND CABLES
15.6.1 All wires and cables used shall be of the stipulated make. The contractor
shall provide a certificate from the manufacturer confirming that all
wires and cables supplied to site are of their make, irrespective of
whether the wires/cables are purchased from the manufacturer directly
or through a dealer suitable test certificates from manufacturers, as
required, shall be submitted to project manager.
15.6.2 Payment for Conduits / Wires / Cables / DB’S shall not be made without
the manufacturer's certificate being furnished to the project manager.
15.6.3 We confirm that the Special Instructions to Renderers’ have been

understood and our tender complies to the above in its entirety.
16.0 TESTING OF INSTALLATION
16.1 SCOPE
16.1.1 This chapter describes the details of tests to be conducted in the

completed internal electrical installations, before commissioning.
16.2 GENERAL
16.2.1 Tests On completion of installation, the following tests shall be carried

out:-
1) Insulation resistance test.
2) Polarity test of switch.
3) Earth continuity test.
4) Earth electrode resistance test.
16.2.2 Witnessing of tests
16.2.2.1 Testing shall be carried out for the completed installations, in the
presence of and to the satisfaction of the Engineer by the contractor. All
test results shall be recorded and submitted to the Department.
16.2.3 Test instruments
16.2.3.1 All necessary test instruments for the tests shall be arranged by the
contractor if so required by the Engineer.
16.3 INSULATION RESISTANCE
16.3.1 The insulation resistance shall be measured by applying between earth

and the whole system of conductors, or any section thereof with all fuses
in place, and all switches closed, and except in earthed concentric
wiring, all lamps in position, or both poles of the installation otherwise
electrically connected together, a direct current pressure of not less than
twice the working pressure, provided it need not exceed 500 volts for
medium voltage circuits. Where the supply is derived from a three wire
D.C, or a polyphase A.C. system, the neutral pole of which is connected
to earth either directly or through added resistance, the working
pressure shall be deemed to be that which is maintained between the

phase conductor and the neutral.
16.3.2 The insulation resistance shall also be measured between all the
conductors connected to one pole, or phase conductor of the supply,
and all the conductors connected to the neutral, or to the other pole, or
phase conductors of the supply with all the lamps in position and
switches in "off position.
16.3.3 The insulation resistance in mega ohms measured as above shall not be
less than 12.5 mega ohms for the wiring with PYC insulated cables,
subject to a minimum of 1 mega ohm.
16.3.4 Where a whole installation is being tested, a lower value than that given
by the formula, subject to a minimum of 1 mega ohm, is acceptable.
16.3.5 A preliminary and similar test may be made before the lamps etc. are
installed, and in this event the insulation resistance to earth should not
be less than 25 mega ohms for the wiring with PYC insulted cables,
subject to a minimum of 2 mega ohms.
16.3.6 The term "outlet" includes every point along with every switch, except that
a switch combined with a socket outlet, appliance or lighting fitting is
regarded as one outlet.
16.3.7 Control rheostats, heating and power appliances and electric signs may,
if required, be disconnected from the circuit during the test, but in that
event the insulation resistance between the case or frame work, and all
live parts of each rheostat, appliance and sign, shall be not less than
that specified in the relevant Indian Standard Specifications, or where
there is no such Specification, shall be not less than one mega ohm.
16.4 POLARITY TEST OF SWITCH
16.4.1 In a two wire installation, a test shall be made to verify that all the
switches in every circuit have been fitted in the same conductor
throughout, and such conductor shall be labeled or marked for
connection to the phase conductor, or to the non-earthed conductors of
the supply.
16.4.2 In a three wire or a four wire installation, a test shall be made to verify
that every non linked single pole switch is fitted in a conductor which is
labeled, or marked for connection to one of the phase conductors of the
supply.
16.4.3 The installation shall be connected to the supply for testing. The
terminals of all switches shall be tested by a test lamp, one lead of
which is connected to the earth. Glowing of test lamp to its full
brilliance, when the switch is in "on" position irrespective of appliance in
position or not, shall indicate that the switch is connected to the right
polarity.
16.5 TESTING OF EARTH CONTINUITY PATH
16.5.1 The earth continuity conductor, including metal conduits and metallic
envelopes of cables in all cases, shall be tested for electric continuity.
The electrical resistance of the same along with the earthing lead, but
excluding any added resistance, or earth leakage circuit breaker,
measured from the connection with the earth electrode to any point in
the earth continuity conductor in the completed installation shall not
exceed one ohm.
16.6 MEASUREMENT OF EARTH ELECTRODE RESISTANCE
16.6.1 Two auxiliary earth electrode, besides the test electrode, are placed at
suitable distance from the test electrode. A measure current is passed
between the electrode' A' to be tested and an auxiliary current electrode
'C', and the potential difference between the electrode' A' and auxiliary
potential 'B' is measured. The resistance of the test electrode 'A' is then
given by:
R=V/I
R - Resistance of the test electrode in ohms,
V - Reading of the voltmeter in volts. I - Reading of the ammeter
16.6.2 Stray currents flowing in the soil may produce serious errors in the
measurement of earth resistance. To eliminate this, hand driven
generator is used.
16.6.3 If the frequency of the supply of hand driven generator coincides with
the frequency of stray current, there will be wandering of instrument
pointer. An increase or decrease of generator speed will cause this to
disappear.
16.6.4 At the time of test, the test electrode shall be separated from the
earthing system.
16.6.5 The auxiliary electrodes shall be ofl3 mm diameter mild steel rod driven
upto 1 m into the ground.
16.6.6 All the three electrodes shall be so placed that they are independent of
the resistance area of each other. If the test electrode is in the form of a
rod, pipe or plate, the auxiliary current electrode 'c' shall be placed at
least 30 m away from it, and the auxiliary potential electrode' B' shall be
placed mid-way between them.
16.6.7 Unless three consecutive readings of test electrode resistance agree, the
test shall be repeated by increasing the distance between electrodes A
and C upto 50 m, and each time placing the electrode B midway
between them.
16.6.8 On these principles, "Megger Earth Tester", containing a direct reading

ohm-meter, a hand driven generator and auxiliary electrodes are
manufactured for direct reading of earth resistance of electrodes.
17.0 TEST CERTIFICATE
17.7.1 On completion of an electrical installation (or an extension to an

installation), a certificate shall be furnished by the contractor,
countersigned by the certified supervisor under whose direct supervision
the installation was carried out. This certificate shall be in the prescribed
form as given in tender in addition to the test certificate required by the
local Electric Supply Authorities.
18.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR INSTALLATION
18.1 GENERAL
18.1.1 The electrical installation shall be complete in all respects and any item
not included in the specification but essential for proper installation and
functioning of the electrical system shall deemed to be included in the
scope of the specification whether specifically mentioned or not. The
system under the scope of work shall conform to the latest codes and
standards as amended in the respective technical specification and
schedule of works. Nothing in the specification shall be construed to
relieved the successful Bidders from the responsibilities where specifically
mentioned in the tender or not.
18.1.2 The following standards as amended shall also to be covered.
18.2 INSTALLATION
18.2.1 All electrical works shall comply with following standards:
18.2.1.1 Indian Electricity Rules - 1956.
18.2.1.2 State Code of Practice for Installation.
18.2.1.3 CEIG Guidelines on electrical installation.
18.2.1.4 IS - 10028 - Code of Practice for installation of transformers.
18.2.1.5 IS - 732 - Code of Practice for electrical wiring installation.
18.2.1.6 IS - 5216 - Guide for safety procedures & practices in electrical work.
18.2.1.7 IS - 10118 - Code of practice for section, installation and maintenance

of LT switch gears & control gears.
18.2.1.8 Workmanship shall be highest standard and quality.
18.3 EQUIPMENTS
18.3.1 All equipments shall be installed strictly in accordance with

manufacturers instructions / drawings.
18.3.2 All HT and LT panels shall be erected on suitable base frame.

18.3.3 Distribution boards shall be erected on wall such that height of top of
board will be at 1800 mm.
18.3.4 Switch boards / MCC’s shall be erected with a front clearance of not
less than 1000 mm and a clearance of not less than 750 mm at the
rear clearance of there are cable entries or with a rear clearance of less
than 200 mm in case there are no cable entries or attachments at the
rear.
18.4 CABLES
18.4.1 Cable shall be taken on trays fixed on ceiling / wall.
18.4.2 Cable tray shall be of prefabricated galvanized iron with welded runs.
18.4.3 All cable shall be provided with punched aluminium identification tags
at every 100 m interval at both
18.5 EARTHINGS
18.5.1 Earthing shall be as per IS 3043.
18.5.2 All electrical power items shall be earthed by two separate and distinct
earth connections from main earth bus.
18.5.3 General grounding shall be done to achieve earth resistance of less

than 1 Ohms.
18.5.4 Special grounding shall be done to achieve earth resistance of less than
5 Ohms.
18.5.5 Earth electrodes shall be erected 1500 mm away from the building edge
and minimum spacing between the electrodes shall be 3000 mm.
18.5.6 Earth electrodes - 80 mm dia 3 m long GI Rod type earthing.
18.5.7 Size of earth
18.5.8 Main earth bus : 25 x6 mm GI.Flat
18.6 TYPE OF WIRING
18.6.1 Basement, substation, electrical rooms, AHU, kitchen & lift shaft : open
wiring using M.S/GI/PVC conduit as specified in BOQ.
18.6.2 Staircase areas: wiring concealed PVC conduit

18.6.3 Office, shopping and other areas, above false ceiling & concealed
wiring, below false ceiling : Open conduit wiring using MS/ GI/PVC
conduit as specified in BOQ
18.7 LIGHTNING PROTECTION:
18.7.1 Lightning protection shall be as per IS 2309.
18.7.2 Size of lightning shall be as per IS 2309.
18.7.3 Terrace conductor : 25 x 3 mm Cu.Flat
18.7.4 Down conductor : 25 x 3 Cu.Flat Or 70 Sq.MM Cu cable
18.7.5 Earth electrode : 600 x 600 x 3 mm Copper plate.
18.7.6 Test link shall be mounted at a height of 1200 mm from FGL.
18.8 MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
18.8.1 All DB’s shall be phase segregated type as required by the Electrical
Inspectorate.
18.8.2 All DB’s shall be phase powder coated, double door type.
18.8.3 All MCB breaking capacity shall be 10 KA.
18.8.4 Light Fittings
18.8.5 All light fittings and lamps shall be supplied by the Client/ or purchased
by contractor as per specified in BOQ.
18.8.6 All equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned of packing materials, scales,

rust, oil, grease etc prior to commencement of the installation work.
18.8.7 All equipments shall be checked physically for the completeness of all
devices before taking up installation.
18.8.8 All equipments and accessories shall be installed strictly in accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions/ drawings. Equipments supplied in
sections or dismantled condition shall be reassembled at site with all
associated accessories as per the manufacture’s instructions. All
accessories required like hardware, junction box glands, hylam sheets
etc to be supplied by contractor.
18.9 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
18.9.1 Distribution boards shall be erected on wall with concealed system

inside the premises areas and open system in all electrical rooms.
Erection cost shall be inclusive of all fixing brackets, hardware etc.,
Necessary clearance shall be maintained in front of the Distribution
Boards for operation and maintenance.
18.10 LIGHTING
18.10.1 The Installation charges shall include all connecting wiring, down rods
support brackets, earthing, clamping etc, in accordance with the
requirements of this specification.
18.10.2 The AC lighting shall operate at 230V, 1 Phase, the supply being taken
from the lighting DB.
18.11 INDOOR LIGHTING
18.11.1 Open conduit system using MS /GI conduits above false ceiling and
concealed conduit system below false ceiling, shall be adopted, as
required.
18.11.2 In all Utility areas, Electrical room, AHU room, Basement area open
conduit wiring using MS /GI conduit shall be adopted and in all
Staircase area concealed conduit wiring using PVC conduit shall be
adopted.
18.11.3 Conduit pipes, whenever necessary, shall be fixed by 16 SWG saddles
with spacers, in an approved manner at intervals of every 300mm.
18.11.4 Saddles shall be fixed on either side of couplers, bends or similar fittings
at a distance of 300mm from the center of such fittings.
18.11.5 The cost of saddles, clamp etc., shall be deemed to have been included
in the installation charges.
18.11.6 Switches of lighting circuits shall be mounted at 1300mm above finished
floor level.
18.11.7 Where fittings are suspended, ball and socket type suspension units
shall be used.
18.11.8 Earth continuity shall be maintained throughout the entire installation.
18.12 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

18.12.1 Exterior Lighting shall be controlled from the External Lighting Switch
boards/ DB located in Substation. Exterior lighting shall be wired
through armoured cables, buried in excavated trench. Three phase
distribution shall be adopted with alternate fittings connected to different
phases.
18.13 CABLING
18.13.1 No cable shall be laid alongside a water main. Spacing equal to the
diameter of the cable shall be maintained between adjacent power
cables.
18.13.2 Selection of cable drums for each run shall be so planned as to

minimize straight through joints. In each cable run, extra length shall be
kept at a suitable point to enable one straight through joint to be made,
should the cable develop a fault at a later date.
18.13.3 All due care shall be taken during unreeling, laying and termination of
cable, to avoid damage due to twist, kink and sharp bends, etc.
Wherever cables pass through floor or through wall openings, it shall be
taken through Al. pipe sleeves.
18.13.4 The open ends of the sleeves shall be sealed by cold setting compound
after cables are pulled through them to prevent entry of vermin and
ingress of water.
18.13.5 While laying cable, cable rollers shall be used at an interval of 2.0 Mts.
The cables shall be pushed over the rollers by a gang of people
positioned between rollers. The cable shall not be pulled from the end
without intermediate pushing arrangement. The bending radius shall not
be less than that specified by the manufacturer.
18.13.6 Each cable shall be provided with an identification tags at entrance and
exit from any equipment. The tag shall be of aluminium, with the
number punched on it and securely attached to the cable by not less
than two turns of GI wire.
18.13.7 Single core cables shall be laid in trefoil formation and clamped with
trefoil clamps at every 600mm intervals.
18.13.8 All multi core cables shall be secured to the cable tray by clamps at
every 600mm intervals.
18.13.9 Cables from overhead cable trays to the equipment shall be taken in
prefabricated cable tray with cover/GI Pipe sleeves.
18.14 DIRECT IN GROUND
18.14.1 Power and control cables laid directly in ground shall be laid generally
conforming to the requirements of code of practice IS: 1255. Generally
cables shall be taken at a depth of 750mm from finished ground level
and shall be provided at least 150mm sand cushioning both at top and
bottom and brick protection.
18.14.2 Control cables shall be laid touching each other without any horizontal
spacing. However the distance of the control cable from the nearest
power cables shall be 150mm. Power and control cables shall be laid
separately in groups.
18.14.3 Wherever power or control cables crosses fire hydrant or any other
pipelines of earth flat the cable shall be taken 300mm below the
pipeline.
18.14.4 After laying of cables, the trench shall be back filled with good
excavated soil and well rammed in successive layer not less than 300
mm depth. The width of the trench shall be in accordance with the
number of cables to be laid and in no case shall be less than 300 mm.
18.14.5 Cast Iron cable route markers(Cast Iron) shall be provided at every
100M intervals and at bends.
18.15 LAID ON CABLE TRAY
18.15.1 The cables inside the plant buildings shall be taken on trays fixed on the
ceiling.
18.15.2 Cable trays shall be of prefabricated GI (2.0mm thick) with necessary

accessories like Tees/Bends etc. and shall be supplied along with
fasteners.
18.15.3 Cable trays shall be hot dip galvanised as per IS : 2629.
18.15.4 The top tray shall be provided with cover.
18.15.5 Galvanized angle supports for trays shall be welded to insert plates. The
support shall be spaced at 1500 mm centers.
18.15.6 Cables inside the premises shall be taken on cable trays running on
ceiling.
18.15.7 Vertical spacing between cable racks/trays shall be minimum 300 mm.
Different voltage grade cables shall be laid in separate trays when trays
are arranged in tiers.
18.15.8 Contractor shall include in their scope of supply all Insert plates, Anchor
fasteners, etc. required for the laying of cable trays. Fastening on
walls/RCC columns shall be by Anchor Fasteners only.
18.16 CABLE TERMINATION
18.16.1 Termination and jointing of XLPE /PVC armoured cables shall be by

means of compression method using double compression type glands
and compression type lugs. Control cables are to be terminated by
means of terminal lugs, the same shall be of tinned copper compression
type.
18.16.2 Cable tails shall be sufficiently long to run all cores to the farther most
terminal and then back to the appropriate point of connection.
18.17 EQUIPMENT ERECTION
18.17.1 Circuit breakers, power transformers, and switch boards shall be

handled and erected as per the relevant codes of practice and
manufacturer's drawings and instruction manuals.
18.17.2 HT & LT Panels shall be erected on suitable base frame .
18.17.3 The details of foundation pockets required for grouting the frame, shall
be furnished by the Electrical Contractor.
18.17.4 For power transformer drying out and oil filling as required, after
checking and testing the dielectric strength shall be carried out by the
contractor. Oil filtration shall be carried out by the contractor.
18.18 EARTHING
18.18.1 The overall earth resistance of the system shall not be greater than one
(1) ohm.
18.18.2 All panels, Distribution boards shall be provided with two (2)
independent earth connections of adequate capacity to discharge the
max. earth fault current.
18.18.3 The size of Earth bus and earth electrode shall be as per specification
and as per schedule.
18.18.4 Minimum spacing between earth electrodes shall be provided as per

IS:3043.
18.18.5 Water stops shall be provided wherever earthing conductor enters the
building from outside, below grade level.
18.19 INSPECTION
18.19.1 After completion of erection/installation, each piece of equipment shall

be thoroughly inspected in the presence of Contractor for correctness
and completion of erection and operation.
18.20 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
18.20.1 The contractor shall supply and install the safety devices as required by
the statutory authorities but not limited to the following, for each
Substations
a) Danger boards for HT and LT Panels & Transformers
b) Rubber mats for switchgear panels, power distribution boards etc.
c) Rubber gloves, first aid charts, first aid box etc.
d) Fire extinguishers and Fire Buckets.
e) Discharge rods.
19.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR TESTING &

COMMISSIONING
19.1 GENERAL
19.1.1 The testing and commissioning for all electrical equipment at site shall
be according to the procedures laid down below:
19.1.2 All electrical equipment shall be Installed, tested and commissioned in

accordance with the latest relevant Standards and Codes of Practices
published by Indian Standards Institution wherever applicable and
stipulations made in relevant general specifications.
19.1.3 The testing of all electrical equipment as well as the system as a whole
shall be carried out to ensure that the equipment and its components
are in satisfactory condition and will successfully perform its functional
operation. The inspection of the equipment shall be carried out to
ensure that all materials, workmanship and installation conform to the
accepted design, engineering and construction standards, as well as
accepted codes of practice and stipulations made in the relevant general
specifications.
19.1.4 All tests shall be carried out by the Contractor using his own instruments,
testing equipment as well as qualified testing personnel.
19.1.5 The results of all tests shall be conform to the specification requirements
as well as any specific performance data guaranteed during finalization
of the contract.
19.2 PREPARATION OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM FOR COMMISSIONING
19.2.1 After completion of the installation at site and for the preparation of
Electrical system commissioning, the contractor shall carry out check and
testing of all equipment and installation in accordance with the agreed
standards, codes of Practice of Indian Standards Institution and specific
instruction furnished by the particular equipment suppliers.
19.2.2 Checking required to be made on all equipment and installations at site

shall comprise, but not be limited, to the following:
19.2.3 The following checks shall be made on all equipment and installations
at site:
19.2.3.1 Physical inspection for removal of any foreign bodies, external defects,
such as damaged insulators, loose connecting bolts, loose foundation
bolts etc.
19.2.3.2 Check for grease, insulating/lubricating oil leakage and its proper
quantity.
19.2.3.3 Check for the free movement of mechanism for the circuit breakers,
rotating part of the rotating machines and devices.
19.2.3.4 Check for tightness of all-cable, busbars at termination/ joints ends as

well as earth connections in the main earthing network.
19.2.3.5 Check for clearance of live busbars and connectors from the metal
enclosure.
19.2.3.6 Check for proper alignment of all draw out device like draw out type
circuit-breakers.
19.2.3.7 Continuity check in case of power cables.
19.2.3.8 Checking of all mechanical and electrical interlocks including tripping of

breakers using manual operation of relay.
19.2.3.9 Checking of alarm and annunciation circuits by manual actuation of

relevant relays.
19.2.3.10 Check and calibrate devices requiring field adjustment/ calibration like
adjustment of relay settings etc.
19.2.3.11 Check proper connection to earth network of all noncurrent carrying

parts of the equipment and installation.
19.2.3.12 The tests that shall be carried out on the equipment shall include but not
be limited to the above.
20.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
20.1 GENERAL
20.1.1 The telephone system shall include providing main / sub distribution
frames, interconnecting cabling, tag blocks inside the buildings,
interconnecting telephone wires between tag block and telephone socket
outlets. The telephone socket outlet shall be modular type or as specified
in the bill of quantities.
20.2 MAIN TAG BLOCK
20.2.1 The main / sub distribution frame shall be enclosed type made out of
CRCA sheet steel of suitable thickness (2 to 3.15 mm). This shall house
necessary number of terminations with tags as specified, with provision
for terminating incoming and outgoing cables. The termination and the
frame shall be of standard make.
20.2.2 The frame shall be suitable for outdoor application with IP 55

protection. This shall be mounted on suitable civil foundation with
necessary GI pipe sleeves for taking incoming and outgoing cables.
20.2.3 Outdoor termination block, if require to be used, shall be with weather

proof IP-65 enclosure with locking facility housed with necessary brick
and RCC foundation and excavation in soil etc. as required.
20.3 TELEPHONE CABLES
20.3.1 All telephone cables shall be PVC insulated, copper conductor

conforming to latest IS and EC standards. Telephone cables shall be
armoured / unarmoured to suit the nature of application and as
indicated in the Bill of quantities.
20.3.2 All cables shall be run in vertical or horizontal trucking, conduits or

cable trays suitably prepared for distribution and separated from
electrical cabling / wiring in an appropriate manner so as to eliminate
electromagnetic interference. All telephone wiring shall be run in
dedicated conduits separate from power wiring. All telephone locations

to be in accordance with instruction of Engineer.
20.3.3 All cables shall be identified by tags and a schedule identifying each
termination shall be issued to Engineer upon completion of the cabling
installation.
20.4 TELEPHONE TERMINAL BLOCKS
20.4.1 Telephone termination block shall be krone make as per latest

standards. The termination block should have loop in - loop out
arrangements, as required.
20.5 TESTS AND TEST REPORTS
20.5.1 The Contractor shall furnish test reports and preliminary drawings for
the equipment to the Project Manager for approval before commencing
supply of the equipment. The Contractor should intimate with the tender
the equipment intended to be supplied with its technical particulars. Any
test certificates etc., required by the local Inspectors or any other
Authorities would be supplied by the Contractor without any extra
charge. All test reports shall be approved by the Project Manager prior
to energizing of installation.
21.0 DIESEL GENERATING SET :

Specification D.G Set at site, carrying out all preparatory works,
assembling, installing, making adjustments, confirming all pre-
commissioning requirement as per manufacturer’s instruction,
commissioning, final testing, putting in to operation and handing over
of the complete system of D.G set including inspection from inspectorate
office. The work include necessary minor Civil works including opening
on wall/Slab/floor and making good as it was etc. & comprehensive
maintenance of the DG set for 5 year comprehensive maintenance from
the date of commissioning.
Material:
Diesel Generator set with continuous rating, 3 Phase, 415V, 50 Cycles
A.C. supply of specified capacity, comprising of totally enclosed
air/water cooled diesel engine with standard control panel & tool kit.
(Refer drawing no. GEN-DG-1 & GEN-DG-2)
Diesel Engine
The engine shall be of standard design of original manufactures. It
should be a totally enclosed air/water cooled Diesel engine with 4 stroke
multi cylinders developing suitable BHP (As per Table 11/3) for giving
power rating of (As per table 11/3) at the load terminals of alternator at
1500 R.P.M at armature temperature of 400 C for height at 1000 Meter
above M.S.L at 50% R.H. The engine shall be capable of delivering
specified power at variable loads for P.F. of 0.8 (lag) with 10% over
load available in excess of specified output for one hour in every 12
hours. The average load factor of the engine over period of 24 hours
shall be 0.85 for power output. The engine shall confirm to IS: 10000
and Amended up to date
The engine shall be fitted with following accessories:
1. Dynamically balanced fly wheel.
2. Necessary flexible coupling and guard for alternator and engine

applicable
3. Lubricating oil cooler
4. Air cleaner Dry/Bath type
5. Lubricating oil pressure gauge
6. Lubricating oil filter with replicable element
7. Dry exhaust manifold with suitable exhausts heavy duty residential
type exhaust silencer and vertical hot air duct both logged with
asbestos rope exhaust piping of required length to reduce noise
level.
8. 12/24 V. Electric starting equipment complete with standard
batteries, dynamo, cut-out, ammeter necessary wiring, self starter
etc. The system shall be capable of starting D.G set within 20 to 30
second even in winter condition with an ambient temperature down
to 00 C.
9. Mechanical Governor of Class A2 for up to and including 62.5 KVA
capacity and electronic governor of Class A1 for capacity above 20
KVA shall be provided as per standard design of manufacturer.
Governor shall be a self contained unit capable of monitoring
speed.
10 Radiator
11.Daily fuel Tank
Daily fuel service tank of minimum capacity as per Table 11/1, below,
fabricated from M.S. sheet with inlet, outlet connections air vent tap,
drain plug and level indicator (gauge) M.S. fuel piping from tank to
engine with valves, unions, reducers, flexible hose connection and floor
mounting pedestals, twin fuel filter. The location of the tank shall
depend on standard manufactures design.
Table 11/1 : Minimum capacity of Daily fuel tank for Generators
Sr. No Capacity of D.G. Set Minimum Fuel Tank Capacity

1. Up to 25 KVA 100 Liters
2. Above 25 KVA to 62.5 KVA 120 Liters
3. Above 62.5 KVA to 125 KVA 225 Liters
4. Above 125 KVA to 200 KVA 285 Liters
5. Above 200 KVA to 380 KVA 520 Liters
Engine Control Panel:

Engine control panel should be fitted with following accessories/
indicators and shall have display:
• Start/stop key switch
• Lube oil pressure indication
• Water temperature indication
• RPM indication
• Engine Hours indication
• Battery charging indication
• Low lube oil trip indication
• High water temperature indication
• Over speed indication
Battery Charger:
The battery charger shall be to Trickle & Boost type, and suitable to
charge required numbers of batteries at 12V/24 complete with,
transformer, rectifier, charge rate selector switch, indicating ammeter,
voltmeter, battery over charging protection with audible alarm.
Connections between the battery charger & batteries shall be provided
with suitable copper leads with lugs.
Battery:
Battery capacity and copper cable sizes for various engine capacities
shall be as per the details given in Table No 11/2. Cable sizes shown
are for maximum length of 2m length, if higher size of cable is required,

it shall be selected in such a way that voltage drop does not exceed 2 V.
Table 11/2
Battery Capacity and Copper Cable Sizes for Various Engine Capaciites
S.No D G set Capacity Battery Copper Electrical

Capacity Cable size in System
(AH) mm2 (Voltage)
1 Upto 25 KVA 86 35 12
2 Above 25 KVA to 62.5 kVA 120 50 12
3 Above 62.5 kVA upto 82.5 150 50 12
kVA
4 Above 82.5 kVA upto 125 180 50 24
kVA
5 Above 125 kVA upto 500 180 70 24
kVA
For AMF applications, a static battery charger working on mains supply

recommended to keep the batteries charged at all times.
Alternator:
Alternator of specified rating, 415 volts, 1500 RPM, 3 Ph, 50 HZ, A/c
Supply with P.F 0.8 lagging a 400 C armature temperature for height
1000 mtr. Above MSL at 50% R.H alternator shall be brush less type self
regulated having static excitation system having capacity of desired
output confirming to IS: 4722-1968 with automatic voltage Regulation
+ 5% operated voltage from no load to full load, two numbers of earth
terminal on opposite sides. Terminal box shall be suitable for
underground cables and same shall be with stand mechanical and
thermal stresses developed due to any short circuit at the terminals. The
alternator shall be in accordance with following standards:
• IS: 4222 The performance of rotating electrical machines:
• IS: 4889 Rules for method of declaring efficiency of electrical
Machine
• IS: 13364 Part I 1992 Alternator-voltage Regulation up to 20 KVA
• IS: 13364 Part II 1992 Alternator Voltage regulation above 20 KVA

to 80 KVA
Performance:
Voltage dip shall not exceed 20% of the rated voltage for any step load
or transient load as per IS: 8528 (Part I). The winding shall not develop
hot spots exceeding safe limits due to unbalance of 20% between
characteristics of the alternator shall be as below-
(a) Efficiency at full load 0.8 P.F
(I) Up to 25 KVA-not less than 82%
(II) Above 25 KVA and up to 62.5 KVA-not less than 86%
(III) Above 62.5 KVA/upto 250 KVA-not less than 90%
(IV) Above 250 KVA-not less than 93%
(b) Total Distortion factor

(i) 10% Overload One Hour in every 12 hrs of continuous operation
(ii) 50% overload 15 seconds.
Common Base Plate:

Engine and alternator shall be coupled by means of flex plate/flexible
coupling as per manufacturer standard design and both units shall be
mounted on a common base plate together with all auxiliaries to ensure
perfect alignment of engine and alternator with minimum vibrations.
The base plate shall be suitable for installation on suitable anti-vibration
mounting system comprising of 6 anti-vibrations pads duly provided.
Control Panel:
Floor/wall mounted control panel Box comprising of voltmeter,
ammeter, selector switches MCCB/MCB of adequate capacity, indicator
lamp duly wired with HRC fuses. Alternator & control panel shall be
connected with provided suitable capacity armored cable with necessary
cable glands & lugs etc.
Exhaust System:
It shall comprise of following parameters:
Exhaust system should create minimum back pressure.
Smooth bends shall be used for minimizing the back pressure.
Minimum number of bends shall be used for minimizing the back
pressure.
Pipe sleeve of larger diameter should be used while passing the pipe
through concrete wall & gap shall be filled with felt lining.
Exhaust piping inside the Acoustic enclosure / Generating set room
should be lagged with asbestos rope and covered with aluminium sheet
cladding to avoid heating of the area.
Class ‘B’ MS pipes and long bend / elbows should be used.
The exhaust outlet should be in the direction of prevailing winds and
should not allow exhaust gases to enter air inlet / windows, etc.
Factory Testing:
DG set shall be tested in presence of Engineer in charge or his
authorized representative in the factory for following before dispatch.
• Full load trail for 12 hour. Fuel, lubricating oil, etc shall be arranged by
the agency.
• 10% overload trail for one hour within 12 hrs test.
Certificates:
• Manufacture’s test certificate for Engine, Alternator and of the set.
• Necessary certificate for the engine model so selected along with
compliance of noise and emission norms as per latest CPCB guidelines
for D.G. set should be furnished from the manufacturer along with
manufacturer’s technical details.
• Permission from Electrical Inspector.
The DG set with canopy shall be erected with due care and ensuring the
perfect level with the help of Sprit level, on provided cement concrete
foundation and connecting the provided earthing connections. The
exhaust system shall be connected to the exhaust manifold. After
ensuring the filling of fuel, lubricating oil and medium of coolant , the
set shall be commissioned, with giving necessary full load trials or with
the available load at site. The set shall be handed over to the
department along with the installation report given by the manufacturer
and with all the necessary certificates and permissions obtained.
Executed quantity will be counted on number basis (i.e each)
Table No 11/3
Rating of Alternator and minimum BHP of Engine
S No. KVA Capacity of Minimum BHP of Average Fuel

Alternator Diesel Engine consumption litre per
hour at 100% Load
1 10 12 3.0
2 15 19 4.1
3 20 26 6.0
4 25 32 6.4
5 30 42 8.3
6 40 50.5 10.3
7 50 65.8 13.0
8 62.5 76 15.6
9 75 91 16.0
10 82.5 102 18.6
11 100 127 22.8
12 125 154 28.0
13 140 166 30.0
14 160 198 34.3
S No. KVA Capacity of Minimum BHP of Average Fuel

Alternator Diesel Engine consumption litre per
hour at 100% Load
15 180 235 40.0
16 200 254 44.0
17 250 313 54.0
22.0 AUTOMATIC MAINS FAILURE PANEL (AMF)

The work includes supplying, installing, Testing & commissioning of
automatic mains failure control panel including auto by-pass,
suitable for specified rating of DG set complete with accessories and
comprehensive maintenance of the panel up to 1 year from date of
commissioning.
AMF Panel shall comply following IS specification:
IS: 2147 1962 Degree of protection.

IS: 4722 H.V. testing for panel.
Material:
Panel shall consist of following:
Power module a pair of electromechanically interlocked contactors
for all the phase / phases & neutral. ( For mains & generator)
Overload relay for generator contactor, neutral contactor for mains
and generator.
Control and Metering module: Line voltage monitor. Generator
voltage monitor, Ammeter,3 times attempt to start facility.
MCB/MCCB of suitable rating for auto/manual operation.
Auto/manual switch.
Emergency stop push buttons.
Manual start push button.
Frequency meter.
Engine hour and RPM meter. (Taco meter)

Two earthing studs.
Protection module: The engine shutdown in the unlikely even of low
lube oil pressure, high cylinder head temperature, high water
temperature (For water cooled engine)
Indicators with alarm for Full/Maximum Load on generator.
Indicators for Load on mains, Load on F.G. set, Engine fails to start,
Emergency stop.
Battery charger complete with transformer/ rectifier, D.C Voltmeter
and Ammeter, selector switch for trickle, off boost charging and
current adjustment.
Main supply failure monitor.
Timers.
Fault reset push button.
AMF Panel complete with relays, timers, set of CT’s for metering &
protection and energy analyzer to indicate currents, phase and line
voltages, frequency, power factor, KWH, KVARH & provision for
overload, short circuit, fault, under frequency control cabling from
AMF panel to diesel engine and elsewhere if required, complete with
metering as per materials list.
System Operation:
The above-mentioned facilities provided shall be functional for
following operational requirements:
1. Auto Mode
• A line voltage monitor shall monitor supply voltage on each phase
when the mains supply voltage fails completely or falls below set
values (variable between 80 to 95 % of the normal value) on any
phase, the monitor module shall initiate start-up diesel engine. To
avoid initiation due to momentary disturbance, a time delay
adjustment between 0 to 5 second shall be incorporated In start-up

intimation.
• A three attempt starting facility shall be provided 6 seconds ON, 5
seconds OFF, 6 seconds ON, 5 seconds OFF, 6 seconds ON. if at
the end of the third attempt, the engine dose not start it shall be
locked out of start and a master timer shall be provided for this
function, suitable adjustment timers are to be incorporated which will
make it feasible to vary independently ON*OFF setting periods from
1-10 seconds, if alternator does not build up voltage after the first or
second start as may be the case, further starting attempt will not be
made until the starting facility is reset.
• Once the alternator has built up voltage, the alternator circuit
breaker shall close connecting the road to the alternator. The road is
now supplied by the alternator.
When the main supply is restored and is healthy as sensed by the line
voltage monitor setting, both for under voltage or unbalance, the
system shall be monitored by a suitable timer which can be set
between 1 minute to 10 minutes for the load to be transferred
automatically to main supply.
• The panel shall start the set in the event of fault condition of under
over voltage, phase reversal, high frequency, neutral snapping, short
circuit, etc. on the mains side. if the above fault condition arises if the
load is being fed from the DG set, then, the panel start cut off the
load from the set with an audible alarm, and the set shall run on no
load.
2. Manual Mode:
• In a manual mode, it shall be feasible to start-up the generator set by
the operator on pressing the start push button.
• Three attempts starting facility shall be operative for the start-up
function.
• Alternator circuit breakers closing and trip operations shall also be

through operator only by pressing the appropriate button on the
panel and closed shall be feasible only after alternator has built up
full voltage.
3. Test Mode:
• When under test mode, pressing of test button should complete the
start up sequence simulator and engine shall be started.
• Engine shall build up voltage but the set shall not take load by
closing alternator circuit breaker when the load is on the mains,
monitoring performance for voltage / frequency etc. shall be feasible
without supply to load
• If during test mode, the power supply has failed the load shall
automatically get transferred on DG set.
• Bringing the mode selector to auto position shall shut down the set
provided main supply is ON if the mains supply is not available at
that time, the alternator shall take laod.
Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
23.0 CABLE JOINTS & END TERMINATION KITS

(LT/HT CABLES) (JT/LT/HT)
23.1 Scope:
Specification No (CB-JT/LT/HT)
Providing straight through cable jointing kit of approved make and

jointing cable as per the manufacturer’s instructions and duly marking
name of jointer and date.
23.2 Material:
Joint kit: Kit manufactured by reputed manufacturer with PVC moulds

made in two parts, with epoxy compound, earth continuity lead of
appropriate cross section having lugs at both ends, aluminium ferrules
of the size of the cable, cross shaped epoxy spacer, MS clips for holding
the moulds, adhesive for pasting the moulds.
23.3 Method of Construction:
Outdoor/Indoor end termination Kit: LT/HT Cables
Before providing end termination kit to the cable, the cable end of the
equivalent length of the moulds, shall be prepared by removing the
outer PVC insulation along with the steel armouring. The ferrule shall
then be inserted over the bare core of the cable, and shall be crimped
with hydraulic / mechanical type heavy duty crimping tool. The crimping
shall be done in such a manner that there shall be no air gap. Then the
crimped portion shall be wrapped first with the PVC insulation tape and
then with the insulation tape used for wrapping HT conductor. The
above method shall be carried out for all the cores strictly following the
colour code. The leads of the cable now shall be placed into the mould
by using the epoxy spacer, for having sufficient gap in-between the
leads. The earth continuity lead shall be clamped to the ends of the
cable. After covering the cable leads with the PVC moulds, the edges
shall be clipped after applying the adhesive on the inside face of the
moulds. The pasting of moulds shall be rigid and as far as possible leak
proof, so that the epoxy compound shall not spill out. Now the duly
stirred epoxy compound shall be poured and fill till the compound rises
through the risers provided on the moulds. After completing the above
procedure, the joint shall be allowed to dry out for at least 8 to 10 hours
(for epoxy compound to get hardened) depending upon the size of
cable. Before connecting to supply, the dry and hardened joint shall be
tested for its insulation level with 1000 V/ 5000 V Meggar.
23.4 Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (i.e. each).

24.0 HT METERING CUBICLE
24.1 Scope:
Supplying, erecting, testing, commissioning 11 KV H.T. metering cubical

(Compact Type) approved by MSEDCL/Licensee fabricated with
2mm.(14 SWG) M.S. sheets with supporting angle and channel, painted
with powder coating / epoxy paint of required shade copper bus bar
size 25x6 mm electronic security lock and heavy duty mechanical lock,
with counter meter for measuring no of times the opening of doors, top
side cover ( C.T.P.T COVER) interlock with meter doors, epoxy coated 3
nos C.T having required ratio between 5/5A to 100/5A burden 10 VA
class 0.5 I.L. 12/28/75 KVP epoxy terminal block suitable for provided
trivector meter, and provision for incoming and outgoing cables etc
complete duly tested by Licensee with necessary Test Certificates and
erected on provided plinth/ C.C foundation .
24.2 Material :
a) Current transformer : Rated output : 5/5 A to 100/5 A , 10VA,

Class :0.5S STC , Insulation 12/28/75 KVP, IS 2705-1992.
b) Potential Transformer : VA : 50VA , CL:0.5 11000/v3 / 110V/v3

V Freq : 50Hz , IS:3156,
c) 25x3mm Copper strip with earthing terminals brought out of the

cubicle.
d) Godrej Lock with keys .
e) Testing with the MSEDCL.
d) Steel Sheet.
24.3 Statutory Permissions to be obtained by the Agency / Contractor:
Before commencement of work, the drawing of the installation shall be

got approved from the Electrical Inspector, I.E.&L. Department. The
installation should be got inspected from Electrical Inspector and obtain
written permission to charge the Metering Cubicle.
24.4 Commissioning:
After above formalities the Cubicle , should be charged / commissioned

in presence of Engineer in-charge or his representative along with load
trials and shall be handed over to the department for beneficial use.
Following test certificate shall be submitted :
1) Manufacturer’s original certificate of Cubicle as stipulated in I.S.
2) Test certificate for CTs & PTs
3) Test results of I.R. values.
24.5 Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each).

25.0 LED STREET LIGHT FIXTURES
Scope:
Supplying and erecting approved make LED street light fitting 100 to
300 Watt having PF>0.95 class IP 66 or above Housing of pressure die
cast aluminium alloy and heat sink extruded aluminium.
(A) Luminaire Specifications:
• LED streetlight/flood light Luminaire with lumen packages as specified

elsewhere in tender complete with single piece pressure die cast aluminum
housing with supplier word mark / name engraved / embossing on the die cast
housing, (Stickering / screen printing is not acceptable).
• The housing should be single piece PDC aluminum with a toughened glass
diffuser fixed firmly to the frame for all the wattages, with a suitability for side-
entry street light poles
• The Luminaire shall be designed so as to have lumen maintenance of at least
70% at the end of 50,000 hours(L70) at design temperature & third
temperature picked by the manufacturer should be >/= 105 deg C
• The luminaire should be able to operate with constant light output from 140 V-
280V supplied voltages using the same driver, delivering nominal 100
lumens/watt at system level.
• Power Factor of the electronic driver should be at least > 0.95 and with
THD<10%
• The luminaire should be full cut off type as per IS 1944, the throw & spread
should be able to deliver uniform light with exactly the desired intensity, and
offer best pole spacing, along with better light control. The tenderer should
submit the certified photometric report as per LM-79, from UL/ERTL/Govt.
NABL recognized lab to validate the photometric claims.
• The Luminaire shall employ Structured LED array for optimized roadway / area
photometric distribution with photometric lenses designed to optimize
application efficiency and minimal glare, individual optical lens to be provided
on each LEDs on a lens plate.
• The fixture should have minimum impact resistant of IK 07 while the ingress
protection with suitable protection by using cover for driver and LEDs should
confirm to IP 66. The fixture should have double-wall construction with silicone
gasket designed for IP66 without using any glue to prevent breakdown of the
water and dust proof seal for both the LED & the driver compartments.
• Driver compartment shall be Top maintainable and should offer independent
IP66 level of protection.
• Driver shall have inbuilt short circuit, over voltage, overload, reverse polarity &
over voltage cut off features.
• Heat dissipation should be managed through a built-in external heat-sink.
• The delivered lumen efficacy of the system shall deliver more than 100
Lumen/Watt at luminaire level, Color Rendering Index of minimum 70 with
color temperature 5700K with variation limits of ± 355K) per ANSI C78.377A
CCT.
• Standard makes of LEDs: CREE, NICHIA, LUMELEDS only.
• Internal Surge protection > 5KV with an External surge protection of 10KV to
be integrated in the luminair. Also 10 KV additional surge protection should be
put in the output of switching point/Feeder Pillar to ensure protection against
surge arising from power line.
• For Driver an Internal type test report complying with international standards
with reference to various general and safety requirements & parameters needs
to be submitted. The efficiency of the driver shall be more than 85 % in all
cases at all times during project period.
• LED street light fitting should be supplied with serial number which should be
attached to the fitting. The label should mention: Name of Manufacturer,
model name and number, system lumen pack, nominal CCT, Wattage of
fitting, Date of Manufacture, and other labeling details as per IS.
• The fixture should be equipped with analog dimmable driver for continuous
dimming facility other than ON-OFF states. The dimming should be
programmable as per the client's requirement.
• Luminair capable for individual / group control for ON/OFF/diming via.

Zigbee / Power line / wifi Technology.
Performance Standards:
Tenderer/ Bidder need to furnish the details of LED lighting module
specification:
1. LM80 compliance certificate to be adhered by the LED chip manufacturer. LED

data sheet should comprise of Lumen depreciation (life) data, lumen output,
junction temperature, pad temperature, thermal resistance, and LED drive
current, efficacy of LED should not be less than 130m/watt (±5%). (LM 80
report should be scanned & uploaded) (IESNA: Approved Method for
Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources and LED lumen
depreciation time to L70 based on LM-80 data) (Approved method for the
Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products).
2. LM-79 compliance certificates from UL/ERTL or Govt/NABL approved third

party laboratory for LED subject to submission of required certificate. (LM 79
report should be scanned & uploaded)
3. Electrical safety as per IEC. - As per IEC safety standards IEC61000, 61547,
61347.
4. The luminaire should be tested as per IEC 60598 standards and following test
reports should be submitted: Heat Resistance Test, Thermal Test, Ingress
Protection Test, Electrical / Insulation Resistance Test, Endurance Test, Humidity
Test.
5. The luminaire should be tested for 'Drop test' as per IEC 60068-2-31/IS9000
Part 7 / Sec 3 standards.
6. The luminaire should be tested for 'Vibration test' as per ANS1/IEC 68-2-6
standards.
7. Lighting Design in Dialux software latest version satisfying all illumination

parameters mentioned in the tender.
8. Following reports to be submitted along with luminaire : Photo biological safety

report, REACH, ROHS, Authorization from original LED source manufacturer.
The lighting manufacturer should have following testing facility / R&D facility
either recognized by Govt, or NABL accredited:
• GLOW wire test
• HV Tester
• Adequate number of electrical meters for measurement of different electrical
parameter
• Megger (500 Volt)
• Tracking test
• Resistance to heat
• Measuring gauges such as Vernier caliper, Micrometers, Dial gauges
• NON contact IR based digital thermometer
• Harmonic anlyser and THD meter
• Digital Weighting machine
• Power analyser
• Surge Tester
• Temperature simulation facility to test various temperature parameters
• Ingress protection test facility for dust and water jet
• Transportation drop test
• Vibration test
• Compression test
• Humidity test
• Electronically controlled Gonio Photometer
• Thermal Endurance Tester
(B) SPECIFICATIONS FOR LED LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM (INTEGRAL FEEDER

FILLAR WITH DIMMING & MONITORING FACILITY FOR LED STREET LIGHTS)
This section covers the design, construction and testing of Lighting Control System
(LCS) with programmable timer unit, contactors, relays, internal wiring with remote
operation and housing. All components of the lighting control system shall be housed
in the existing / additional electrical enclosure.
The Lighting Automation System shall feature a web-based solution for remote
management of lighting.
The system shall control and monitor lighting distribution boards remotely via wireless
communications such as GPRS as one of the primary communications network to the
server.
The system shall be modular and easily scalable to include platforms, yards, streets
and over bridges.
The centralized solution shall provide on/off control for burn hour optimization,
simplified maintenance and a remotely operated system.
Programming shall be enabled remotely and can be changed at any time. The ON /
OFF times shall be optimized for the different daylight hours every day for energy
optimization. That is, it would be optimized to follow the sunrise and sunset times
every day.
Electrical cabinet monitoring configurations shall be enabled remotely and can be

changed at anytime.
Power supply voltage input to electrical cabinets shall be available On-Demand.
All alarm/fault detection events shall be logged and available for report-out printing
for analysis.
Standards and Approvals:
Communication modules used shall be FCC/CE certified.
System Specifications:
Outdoor Lighting Control CPU:
The CPU module shall be equipped with a 32 Bit microcontroller. The CPU modules
shall have internal memory capable of storing data of minimum of 4GB.
The CPU shall monitor and control all other modules in the LCS. Direct
communication between the modules shall takes place by means of an industrially
proven RS-485 technology. The same interface shall also be used for power supply
between the modules.
The CPU module shall serve as a WAN communications and data concentrator
module. It shall be capable of two-way communication with the central server takes
place via.
• GPRS
• SMS/WIFI
• Ethernet
The module shall have the ability to automatically switch between different available
communications carriers in order to provide stable arid reliable communication.
It shall be upgradable for used with WIFI and WIMAX in future using the USB or the
Ethernet port on the module.
It shall support remote Software and configurations updates from the server enabling
it to autonomously execute tasks. It shall monitor Voltage values on all three phases of
main supply.
Battery shall be supplied with backup power via the A-Bus in the event of power
failure enabling the CPU module to store data and send a main power failure alarm
to the central server before it shuts down safely.
It shall be light weight compact and DIN rail mountable, supporting Tri band
GSM900 / EGSM900, GSM1800,1900 MHz. Compliant to GSM Phase 2/2+.
It shall have a local Real time clock synchronized with remote time server, to enable
functionality even in case of communication network failure.
Guard for Overvoltage Protection:
This module shall provide Overvoltage protection specifically for the CPU, capable of
withstanding surge pulses up to ± 6 kV and burst pulses up to + 4 kV. The module
shall consist of four independent protected mains rated channels which each have a
built-in thermal protection, Surge protection level ± 6 kV according to EN61000-4-5,
Burst protection level ± 4 kV according to EN61000-4-4, Three mains rated phase

(line) inputs: LI, L2 and L3 and shall be DIN Rail Mounted.
Switching Point Control Panel Features –
a. Input to the Switching Point shall be 3 phase grid power input and with 3 phase
output for load.
b. Switching point shall able to measure Voltage, Current, Power Factor, Active
Power, Apparent Power, Metering Cumulative Active Energy, Metering
Cumulative Apparent Energy
c. Configuration – Switching Point Controller shall be able to
d. Communication –
i. GPRS communication between Switching Point Controller and

Server/Cloud
ii. Zigbee RF communication between Switching Point Controller and Street

Lights
e. Shall able to calculate LED Luminaires Glowing Hours
f. Able to calculate number of hours mains supply not available
g. Alerts –
i. Phase wise over current/Short circuit
ii. Phase wise over voltage
iii. Group failure of lights
iv. Individual Light failure
v. No output supply
h. E-meter – 3 phase 10-60A Class 1 accuracy meter with ISI/IS-13779

i. Battery Backup – Switching point controller supports battery backup up
to 48 hours
j. Switching point controller Unit shall analog measurement capability 1 x Analog

voltage, 1 x Current input measurement channels
k. Switching point controller VA rating – 20kVA for 10kVA load.
l. Enclosure –Metallic IP65 level of protection.

DIN Rail Battery:
The Battery module shall supply other modules with emergency power in the event of
power failure. This Battery module shall be installed together with CPU module, and
shall be recharged by the CPU.
If the main power fails, Battery shall instantaneously take over the power supply,
enabling the CPU module to store data and send a main power failure alarm to the
central server via GPRS/SMS before it shuts down safely.
Annual Recurring Charges:

Server hosting charges and Monthly usage charges of GSM shall be recurring costs. 1
year subscription for server hosting charges is inclusive in the offer. GSM SIM &
Charges shall be inclusive in the offer.
Additional System Requirements:
• The system shall generate power failure alarm or Individual Phase failure
alarm
• The system should able detect the panel door open condition and should notify
the user
• The system shall support to integrate both analog and digital type of Photocell
• The system shall allow configuring priority levels for commands (Eg. Fixed
programs, Manuel switching, twilight switching)
• The system shall provide API for integrating with third party applications like
SCADA or ERP applications for basic monitoring and control.
• The system shall be modular to support dimming with configurable scenes with
varying dimming levels.
• The system shall provide facility for inventor/ management for luminaires
Web application Requirements –
a. Control and Monitoring –
i. Allows user to communicate with individual and networked switching

points.
ii. Allows user to communicate with individual and group street lights
under particular switching point
b. Intensity Control/Dimming –The Intensity level (10%-100%) of street Lights shall

be controlled instantly/ automatically by adjusting/ pre-programmed intensity
level.
c. The Street Light Status such as ON hours, voltage, current, power, Energy
consumed, Intensity and operating Mode (Auto/Manual) shall be monitored
d. Remote configuration – It is possible to configure switching points through we

application. Remote configuration includes new ON/OFF timings, RTC time,
Real time data of each switching point, Energy meter parameters
e. Fault Alarms/Alerts – Switching point failures, Network Down failures, Group
Luminaires failure, excess voltage/current drawn, no mains power, Luminaires
failure and contactor failure.
f. Google Map – Allows user to trace switching points through google maps.
g. Reports – Allows user to generate various reports like energy consumed, failure
reports, uptime % etc
Server/Cloud Requirement –
a. The server/Cloud platform shall be of dedicated Windows server (IIS) with

minimum of 16GB RAM with unlimited bandwidth.
b. Following software shall be installed in server

i. ASP.NET4
ii. MySQL Server
iii. MySQL Workbench
c. The server/Cloud platform should support unlimited storage
d. Server/Cloud platform provider shall have capable to perform auto backup

and restore facilities.
e. Server/Cloud platform provider shall have regular maintenance of the server

and immediately address in case of server down.
f. Server/Cloud platform shall have minimum uptime of 99%
g. Server/Cloud should able to handle minimum of 1000 concurrent connections.

Network connectivity
The charges for same are inclusive in the offer for the period including one
year defect liability period. GPS connection to be taken in the name of CIDCO.
Reporting
• It shall be possible to create reports, both as html pages or as Excel files.
• It shall be possible generate an alarm report, filtered on alarm severity, alarm

type, alarm state, alarm period, no. of parent nodes.
• It shall be possible to generate a report on the meter readings.
• It shall be possible to generate a burn time report.
• It shall be possible to create an action report, based on modules, light

commands, report, alarm, photocell or light status.
• It shall be possible to create a lamp surveillance report for critical lamp failure,
preventive lamp replacement or failures before burning hours.
• It shall be possible to generate reports from Historical data available in

Lighting control system server for following:
o Switching operations
o Alarms/ Warning generated

o Run Time of Circuits
Programming
• It shall be possible to create programs based on a fixed time table.
• In the fixed time table program, it shall be possible to define ON and OFF
commands.
• It shall be possible to activate the fixed time table on a daily, weekly or monthly
basis
• It shall be possible to activate the fixed time table based on a time period; from
day/month to day/month.
• It shall be possible to create programs based on a twilight table,
• It shall be possible to generate a twilight table based on a geographic location.

• It shall be possible to combine a twilight table with a primary and secondary

photocell.
• In the twilight table program, it shall be possible to define a Twilight table

sunrise offset
• In the twilight table program, it shall be possible to define a Twilight table

sunset offset
• In the twilight table program, it shall be possible to include ON and OFF

commands at fixed times between sunset and sunrise.
• In the twilight table program, it shall be possible to define a photocell event

delay for the primary and for the secondary photocell.
Software upgrade
It shall be possible to upgrade the software locally on the CPU using a USB stick.
It shall be possible to upgrade the software remotely through the webpage

application.
Customers, permission groups and users
• It shall be possible to define "Customers" to limit access for users within these
"Customers" to only a part of the node tree.
• It shall be possible to define permission groups to define different levels of user

access.
• It shall be possible to design user accounts within customers, and assign a

permission group and a password to each user.
• It shall be possible to subscribe users to alarms via SMS or email.
• It shall be possible for a user to control ON, OFF, DIM1 and DIM 2 via SMS.
Control Room Application
• The streetlight automation system shall feature a map application that gives an
overview of all boxes on top of a street map or a satellite image.
• It shall be possible to visualize the light status of the boxes or the alarm status
of the boxes.
• It shall be possible to see the geo-location data of a selected box.
• It shall be possible to see the serial number of a selected box.
• It shall be possible to see the node of a selected box.
• It shall be possible to see the name of a selected box.
• It shall be possible to see the communication status of a selected box.
• It shall be possible to see the alarm status of a selected box.
• It shall be possible to see the phone number of a selected box.
• It shall be possible to see the communication status of the carriers of a selected

box.
• It shall be possible to see the light status of a selected box.
• It shall be possible to upload and view .jpg pictures of the box.
• It shall be possible to set the Configurable communication class with Control

station / server- Ethernet, GPRS or SMS.
Warranty : - Warranty integral feeder pillar 1 years from the date of

commissioning of panel.
C) INSTALLATION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF STREET
LIGHTINHG INSTALLATION
The specifications covers the requirement of installation, testing and
commissioning of electrical equipment related with street lighting installation.
1.0 STANDARDS:
The electrical equipment installation work shall comply with the latest
applicable standards, regulations, rules, safety codes.
2.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS

The installation, testing and commissioning of the electrical equipment shall be
carried out in accordance with general technical requirement furnished below.
3.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

3.1 GENERAL SCOPE :
3.1.1 The contractor shall furnish all tools, welding equipment, testing
equipment, kits etc. required for installation, testing and commissioning
of the equipment.
3.1.2 The contractor shall co-operate with other contractors at site so as not to
obstruct activities of others.
3.1.3 The work shall be carries out strictly as per the instructions and layout
drawings of the owners, their consultants and the equipment
manufacture.
3.1.4 The contractor shall carryout touch-up painting on the equipment if

required. The paint shall be supplied by the contractor.
3.1.5 The contractor shall ensure workmanship of good quality, employeed

shall also be skilled careful and experienced.
3.2 INSTALLATION SCOPE :
3.2.1 The contractor shall install, test and commission all the equipment either
furnished of supplied by him. All material necessary for completion of
the work including hardware, consumable shall be provided by the
contractor.
3.2.2 The equipment shall be installed in a neat workman like manner so that
it is leveled, plumbs & properly aligned and oriented. No equipment
shall be permanently bolted down to the foundation or structure unless
the alignment has been checked and accepted
3.2.3 Care shall be taken in handling the equipment to avoid any distortion to
the supporting structure or damage to the delicate instruments &
electrical parts.
3.2.4 The contractor shall use crane for lifting & placing the outdoor
equipment on structure. No part of existing structure shall be used to lift
any equipment without prior permission of the owners.
3.2.5 Foundation of poles shall be constructed. However minor modifications

to the foundations wherever found necessary for proper installation shall
be carried out by the erection contractor. The foundation bolts pockets
shall be cleaned before placing the bolts & the equipment on the
foundation concerning of bolts shall also he included in the scope of this
contract.
3.2.6 Before commissioning of street lighting following points to be checked &

ensured for safe & successful commissioning.
1. Check any physical damage, tightness of all nuts, clamps &
terminals.
2. All the fitting, earthing arrangements are properly connected.
3. Lux level illumination check.
4. Voltage drop checking.

5. Current to be measured at the incoming in the junction box.
6. The earthing measurement at each pole.
7. Cable are property connected & crimped.
8. Tightness of connections.
D) EARTHING:
The intent of these specifications is to give general guidelines for the

equipments/materials proposed to be used and best efforts are made to
cover all CIDCO/MSEDCL requirements and IE specifications. However,
if any changes, modifications or additions are to be done as indicated
by CIDCO/MSEDCL, the same shall be done without any extra cost or
financial implication.
1.0 SCOPE:
This specification covers supply of necessary materials and erection at

site, of complete earthing system including earth pits at the locations
indicated, earth conductors from earth pit to the respective equipments,
switchgears, pillars, etc. and making connections, testing at site,
commissioning and handing over.
2.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS:
The entire work of earthing system, shall conform to IS 3043, Indian

Electricity Act and Rules and Relevant CIDCO/MSEDCL regulations.
3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
3.1 The earthing shall generally be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of Indian Electricity Rules 1956 as amended from time to
time and relevant regulations of MSEDCL. The following IE Rules are
particularly applicable I.E. Rule Nos. 32, 51, 61, 62, 67, 69, 88 (2) and
90.
3.2 All earth connections shall be carefully made, visible for inspection, and
testing of individual earth electrode shall be possible.
3.3 All materials, fittings, etc. used in earthing shall conform to IS

specifications and in the absence of which the approval of competent
authority shall be obtained.
3.4 The earthing electrode shall be at a minimum distance of 2 meters away

from the outer face of the building wall. A minimum clearance of twice
the depth of the electrode shall be maintained between two earthing
stations. Wherever adequate distances cannot be maintained due to site
constraints the decision of the Engineer-in-charges will be final and
binding.
3.5 A brick masonry chamber to facilitate easy identification and for

carrying out periodical tests and inspection shall be constructed on top
of the earth pit.
3.6 All metal conduits, trucking, cable sheaths, HT and MV switchgears,

transformers, distribution boards, meters, light fixtures, fans, and all
other metal parts forming part of the work shall be bonded together and
connected to earthing network as specified.
3.7 Earthing system shall be mechanically robust and the joints shall be
capable of retaining low resistance even after passage of fault currents.
3.8 Joints shall be soldered, tinned and double riveted. All the joints shall be
‘mechanically, electrically continuous and effective. Joints shall be
protected against corrosion.
4.0 EARTH ELECTRODES:

4.1 The materials of earth electrode and earth conductors shall be
galvanized iron unless specified otherwise in Schedule ‘A’, specifications
or drawings.
4.2 The earth electrodes shall be free from paint, enamel, grease, etc.
4.3 The earth electrodes shall be embedded as far as practicable in a moist
soil and below permanent moist level.
4.4 The earth electrode shall not be installed in the proximity of a metal
fence.
5.0 TYPES OF EARTH ELECTRODES:

5.1 The earth electrodes shall be either a pipe electrode or plate electrode,
the details of which are as given in the following sections of
specifications, drawings and schedule ‘A’. Generally plate electrodes
shall be used for substations and large medium voltage network and
pipe electrodes for small medium voltage network and installations.
6.0 PLATE ELECTRODE:

6.1 The plate electrode shall consist of either copper plate of size 60 cm x
60 cm x 3.15 mm or G.I. plate of size 60 cm x 6.3 mm and as specified
in the bill of quantities or drawings.
6.2 The electrode shall be buried vertically in a specially prepared earth pit
which shall be dug upto 2.5 M depth from the ground level. The earth
plate shall be placed in the earth pit with its faces vertical and
embedded in the alternate layers of coal and salt for a minimum
thickness of 15 cms.
6.3 The earth conductor shall be same material as of the earth electrode.
For copper earth electrode a copper strip shall be provided as conductor
and for GI earth electrode a GI strip shall be used as earth conductor.
The size and materials of the earth conductor shall be as specified
separately to the earth electrode (plate) with two nos. of nut bolts, check
nuts and washers (all of G.I.) and shall be brought top in the masonry
chamber at the ground level.
6.4 The earth conductor shall be extended via the earth test link provided in
the masonry chamber. The test link shall be connected to earth
conductor from the earth plate and earth conductor going to
equipments with two nos. of nut bolts, check nut and washer (all of GI)
to make secured connections. This link can be removed in the chamber
for testing the earthing.
6.5 A 20 mm dia. G.I. pipe shall be provided from the masonry chamber to
the top of the earth plate for watering purpose. The G.I. pipe shall be
provided with a funnel at the top with wire mesh inside.
6.6 A masonry chamber with a cast iron cover hinged to the cast iron frame
embedded in the top portion of the masonry shall be constructed on top
of the GI pipe to house the funnel and the earth connection. The
approximate size of the chamber shall be 400 mm x 400 mm and 300
mm deep.
6.7 The earth conductor from electrode shall be taken out of the masonry
chamber through a protecting pipe embedded in the masonry.
6.8 The top of the masonry chamber shall be 50 mm above the finished
ground level.
7.0 EARTH CONNECTION:
7.1 All metal clad switches and other equipment carrying single phase
current shall be connected to earth by a single connection. All metal
clad switches carrying three phase medium voltage and high voltage
shall be connected with earth by two separate and distinct connections.
7.2 The earthing conductors inside the building, whenever exposed shall be
properly protects from mechanical injury by running the same to G.I. of
adequate size. Earthing conductors outside the building shall be laid
600 mm below the finished ground level.
7.3 The over lapping of strips at joints where required shall be minimum 75
mm. The joints shall be riveted in an approved manner. Lugs of
adequate capacity and size shall be used for all termination of wire
above 6 sq.mm. size and bare copper wire above 2.5 mm dia. Lugs
shall be bolted to the equipment body to be earthed after the metal
body is cleaned of paint and other city substance and properly tinned.
8.0 CONNECTION OF EARTHING CONDUCTOR:
The earthing conductors are broadly divided in the following categories.
a. Main earthing conductor shall be taken from the earth electrode to the
earth bus/connection at the main switch board.
b. Sub-main earthing conductor shall run from the main switch board to
the sub-distribution boards.
9.0 PROHIBITED CONDUCTORS:

Use of following as earth conductor is not recommended and strictly
prohibited for earthing an installation or even effecting as a link in an
earthing system. Neutral conductor, sprinkler pipes or pipes conveying
gas, water or inflammable liquid, structural steel steel work, metallic
enclosures or armour or cables and conductors, metallic conduits and
lightening protection system conductors are all prohibited to be used as
earth conductor.
10.0 TESTING:
On completion of the entire installation, the earthing network shall be
tested for their resistance to earth in accordance with IS:3043. All
meters, instruments and labour required for the test Shalala be provided
by the contractor. The test results shall be submitted in triplicate to the
owners/MSEDCL for approval. The following tests shall be conducted.
1. Earth resistance of electrodes.

2. Impendence of earth continuity conductors.
3. Effectiveness of earthing.
11.0 DOCUMENTS, CERTIFICATIONS, DRAWING:
The intent of this specification is to give guideline to contractor to furnish

all relevant papers and list of spares for continuous performance of
installation. Nothing shall absolve contractor for not furnishing
documents or paper that have not been specially stated herein.
11.1 DOCUMENTS:
All relevant documents for maintenance like manuals, procedures, etc.

of all electrical equipments erected by contractor shall be furnished in
two sets.
11.2 CERTIFICATES:
The contractor shall also submit certificate issued by the original

manufacture towards guarantee of materials supplied. As-built drawing
of the complete installation. Including location of feeder pillar,
distribution control panel, poles, main switches, cable routing,
connection, diagram circuit, conductor size length test results, reading,
etc.
11.3 TESTING & COMMISSIONING:
11.3.1 TESTING OF EQUPMENTS:
All equipments before installation on site shall be tested and such results
need to be submitted to the CIDCO as well as MSEDCL. Nothing shall
absolve the contractor from performing any test that the contractor has
been called up by the CIDCO.
11.3.2 MANAUFACTURERS TESTS:
The contractors shall specifically Performa all test such as routine test,
type test on all equipments in the presence of CIDCO & MSEDCL
officials, All cost incidental to such test shall be deemed to have been
included in the specific item of that equipment and no extra pipe.
11.3.3 PRECOMMISSIONING TESTS:
All test required or called by the local electricity supply authority,

Government officials and as laid in relevant Indian Standard
Specifications, Rules Regulations & Acts shall be strictly completed.
11.3.4 COMMISSIONING:
The contractor shall obtain the written permission or sanction for

commissioning of the electrical equipment if required from I.E. & L.
Department of Government of Maharashtra. All cost, visit fees, etc.
incidental for abstaining the sanction to be to the contractors account.
11.3.5 The contractor should take special note that pole/structure painting shall
be of good quality and best workmanship. The painting work shall be
guaranteed for minimum one year from the date of handing over on the
installation.
A. High Bay Luminaire
• LED Highbay light Luminaire with lumen packages as specified elsewhere in

tender complete with single piece pressure die cast aluminum housing with
supplier word mark / name embossing on the die cast housing, (Stickering
/ screen printing is not acceptable) to allow traceability till the end of life.
• The housing should be single piece PDC aluminum aesthetically designed
with Black / Silver Grey color corrosion resistant polyester powder coating
with a toughened glass diffuser fixed firmly to the frame for all the wattages
with a suitable mounting arrangement. Shall consist of separate optical and
control gear compartment. Driver should be easily replaceable in the field
condition. Heat dissipation should be managed through a built-in external
heat-sink made from high pressure die cast aluminium.
• The luminaire should be able to operate with constant light output at
constant operating voltage of 230 V supplied voltages using the same
driver, delivering minimum 125 lumens/watt (+-5%) at system level. The
total lumen output should be at least equal to 14500/10000 lumens with

wattages as less as possible.
• Power Factor of the electronic driver should be> 0.9 and with THD<20%
for all wattages.
• The Luminaire shall employ Structured LED array for optimized area
application efficiency and minimal glare, individual optical lens to be
provided on each LEDs on a molded lens plate fixed mechanically (Glue
fixing of individual lens on led is not allowed).
confirm to minimum IP 65.
• The Color Rendering Index of typical 70 with color temperature 5700K with
variation limits of ±355K) per ANSI C78.377A CCT.
• Standard makes of LEDs: CREE, NICHIA, LUMILEDS only.
• Driver type test report from internal or external NABL accredited lab
complying with international standards with reference to various general
and safety requirements as per IEC/ BIS as follows
a. performance test
b. EMI test
c. Emission and (b)
d. Immunity (surge burst, dips, Interrupts, ESD)
e. Harmonics
f. Surge protection
g. The efficiency of the driver should be more than 85%.
• LED streetlight should be tested as per IEC (International Electronic

commission) / or relevant equivalent Indian standards and following test
reports should be submitted at the time of approval : Thermal test, Ingress
protection test, Electrical & Insulation resistance test, Endurance test,
humidity test, Resistance to heat, fire and tracking, drop & vibration. Test
report should be submitted from NABL approved test laboratory.
• The fitting should work satisfactorily in the temperature range of minus (-) 5
deg C to 50 deg C and humidity range of 10% to 90% RH.
• The luminaire should be tested as per IEC 60598 standards and following
test reports should be submitted: Heat Resistance Test, Thermal Test, Ingress
Protection Test, Electrical / Insulation Resistance Test, Endurance Test,
Humidity Test. The luminaire should be tested for 'Drop test1 as per IEC
60068-2-31/IS9000 Part 7 / Sec 3 standards. The luminaire should be
tested for 'Vibration test' as per ANSI/IEC 68-2-6 standards. Should comply
with IESNA LM-79 (Approved method for the Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products). The Photometric distribution
& electricals parameters should be tested at all dimming wattages. The LED'
used should comply to LM-80 standards (IESNA: Approved Method for
depreciation time to L70 based on LM-80 data)
• Random samples from supplied lot should be tested at NABL accredited
laboratory and report submitted for acceptance. as requested by the
department.
• LED street light fitting should be supplied with separate tracking serial
number barcoded / QR coded for LED board / Driver / Housing which
should be provided in the fitting. General label as per IS should mention at
least: Name of Manufacturer, model name and number, system lumen
pack, nominal CCT, Wattage of fitting, Date of Manufacture.
• The bidder should submit the lighting design as per the tender document in
Dialux software. Maintenance factor of 0.85 should be used for all lighting
design purposes.
B. LED Street light luminaire
• LED Highbay light Luminaire with lumen packages as specified elsewhere in

tender complete with single piece pressure die cast aluminum housing with
supplier word mark / name embossing on the die cast housing,{Stickering /

screen printing is not acceptable) to allow traceability till the end of life.
• The housing should be single piece PDC aluminum aesthetically designed
with Black / Silver Grey color corrosion resistant polyester powder coating
with a toughened glass diffuser fixed firmly to the frame for all the wattages
with a suitable mounting arrangement. Shall consist of separate optical and
control gear compartment. Driver should be easily replaceable in the field
condition.Heat dissipation should be managed through a built-in external
heat-sink made from high pressure die cast aluminium.
• The luminaire should be able to operate with constant light output at
constant operating voltage of 230 V supplied voltages using the same
driver, delivering minimum 105 lumens/watt (+-5%) at system level. The
lumen efficacy of the LED at the chip level should be more than 130 Lm/W
@700mA drive current @ Tj = 85Deg C.
• Power Factor of the electronic driver should be> 0.9 and with THD<20%
for all wattages.
• The Luminaire shall employ Structured LED array for optimized area
application efficiency and minimal glare, individual optical lens to be
provided on each LEDs on a molded lens plate fixed mechanically {Glue
fixing of individual lens on led is not allowed).
confirm to minimum IP 66.
• The Color Rendering Index of typical 70 with color temperature 5700K with
variation limits of ±355K) per ANSI C78.377A CCT.
• Standard makes of LEDs: CREE, NICHIA, and LUMILEDS only.
• Driver should have an internal surge protection for 4 KV and external surge
protection of 10 KV for efficient surge protection.
• Driver type test report from internal or external NABL accredited lab
complying with international standards with reference to various general
and safety requirements as per IEC/ BiS as follows
h. performance test
i. EMI test
j. Emission and (b)
k. Immunity (surge burst, dips, Interrupts, ESQ)
I. Harmonics
m. Surge protection
n. The efficiency of the driver should be more than 85%.
• LED streetlight should be tested as per IEC (International Electronic

commission) / or relevant equivalent Indian standards and following test
reports should be submitted at the time of approval : Thermal test, ingress
protection test, Electrical & Insulation resistance test, Endurance test,
humidity test, Resistance to heat, fire and tracking, drop & vibration. Test
report should be submitted from NABL approved test laboratory.
• The fitting should work satisfactorily in the temperature range of minus (-) 5
deg C to 50 deg C and humidity range of 10% to 90% RH.
• The luminaire should be tested as per IEC 60598 standards and following
test reports should be submitted: Heat Resistance Test, Thermal Test, Ingress
Protection Test, Electrical / Insulation Resistance Test, Endurance Test,
Humidity Test. The luminaire should be tested for 'Drop test' as per IEC
60068-2-31/IS9000 Part 7 / Sec 3 standards. The luminaire should be
tested for 'Vibration test' as per ANSI/IEC 68-2-6 standards. Should comply
with IESNA LM-79 (Approved method for the Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products). The Photometric distribution
& electricals parameters should be tested at all dimming wattages. The LED'
used should comply to LM-80 standards (IESNA: Approved Method for
depreciation time to L7Q based on LM-80 data)
• Random samples from supplied lot should be tested at NABL accredited

laboratory and report submitted for acceptance. as requested by the
department.
• LED street light fitting should be supplied with separate tracking serial
number barcoded / QR coded for LED board / Driver / Housing which
should be provided in the fitting. General label as per IS should mention at
least: Name of Manufacturer, model name and number, system lumen
pack, nominal CCT, Wattage of fitting, Date of Manufacture
• • The bidder should submit the lighting design as per the tender
document in Dialux software. Maintenance factor of 0.85 should be used
for all lighting design purposes.
Surface Mounted Down lighter
• Integral LED downlighter with Die cast aluminium housing and

polycarbonate diffuser firmly fixed to the frame. The heat sink should be
provided for efficient heat distribution. System lumen output for the same
should be more than 100 lumens/W and color temp of 6500 K.
• The power factor should be more than 0.9, CRI > 70, CCT = 6500 K. THD
< 10% For Constant current driver. Wattage not to exceed 15 W
26.0 PVC/XLPE Cables (CB)
(A) Armoured Cables (HT & LT)
1. General
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall
carry ISI mark. If any particular category of material for which ISI mark
is not available in market, it shall be as included in approved list.
Work shall be carried out as per the method of construction specified by

BIS. If there is no reference for particular method of construction in IS,
such work shall be carried out as per the approved method of
construction specified in chapter 16 of P.W. Dept. Handbook.
Material and Work not qualifying to any provision mentioned above

shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.
2. Cables: (Armoured)
The following list records those Indian Standards in force,

which are acceptable as good practice, and accepted
standards.
SP 30: 1984 : National Electrical Code

SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 : : National Building Code
IS 1255: 1983 : Code of practice of Installation &
Maintenance of armored cables up to 33 kv
IS 3961: Part 2: 1967 : : Recommended current ratings of PVC cables-
PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electrical cables
Part1 for working voltages up to and including
1100 Volts.
IS 1554: Part 1, 1988 : : PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables:
Part 1 for working voltages up to and
including 3.3 kV to 11 kV
IS 10810. Part 63; 1993 : : Method for test of cables Part 63 Smoke
density of electric cables under fire condition.
3. Scope: (Armoured cables)
Specification No. (CB-LT/AL, CB-LT/CU, CB-HT)
Providing armoured cable of specified voltage level, size & specified

conducting material Aluminum / Copper) as per Table no. 7/3
including requiied material, hardware’s for erection and erecting on
wall, ceiling, RCC slab or drawing the same through pole, pipe, laying
in provided conduit, trench, ducts, trays as per approved method of
construction including glands, lugs, etc.
4. Material:
Cables:
Cables shall be PVC for LT/MP and XLPE for HT as per Table no. 7/3
and of required construction, colour, shall carry ISI mark, IS No,
manufacturer’s name, size, duly embossed / screen printed at every
metre and having the total count of progressive length in meter at each
mark.
Earth wire: Galvanized Iron (G I) wire of appropriate gauge as per
Table No 7/1.
Cable glands: Flange type heavy duty. Made of high purity brass
metal with brass washers, rubber rings, threaded stud with washers
and nuts.
Lug: Lug shall be of high purity aluminum/ copper / bimetallic of
required type, with required size of hole and smooth finished both
from inside and outside.
Saddles: Saddles fabricated from Gl sheet of required gauge and size

depending on dia of i cable aeither galvanized or painted with superior
quality enamel black paint with necessary shearing mechanical
strength, semi circular shaped with extended piece having suitable holes
for fixing.
G I Strip: 22 q x 25 mm width G I Strip.
Clamps: MS Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, having

the size of 3/6 mm thick mild steel having 25/50 mm width (as per size
of cable), rounded ends with wooden / resin cast grip for holding the
cable.
Identification tags: For identifying root, connection position Gl strip with
identification mark / name embossed / painted with arrangement to tie
should be fix on cable or arrangement of ferrules to be done.
Hardware: Sheet Metal screws of lequired sizes, plugs / wooden gutties,
etc.
4. Method of Construction:
General:
a) Irrespective of method of construction the cable ends shall be

terminated with appropriate size & type of glands with lugs duly
crimped, as directed by Site engineer.
b) Wherever the cable has to be bent, the turning radius shall be as
mentioned in Table No 7/2. Grouping of cables shall be done with
adequate distance between cables as mentioned in IS so as to minimize
de-iating. Cables shall be tagged/ferruled with identification name /
mark at the point from where distribution starts and at ends. Bare earth
wire of appropriate size -»s per Table no. 7/1 shall run along with the
cable. Earth wire running with the cable shall be terminated at the earth
terminal nearest io cable termination.
5.1 Erection of Cable on Surface:

Erection shall be done as per the routes and layout finalized, in perfect
level and in plumb. Before fixing the cable shall be straightened as far
as possible for good aesthetics look, continuous bare Gl earth wire of
required gauge as per Table'No 7/1 shall be run. Cable with G I wire
shall be fixed by saddles firmly clipped on cable and shall be fixed to
wall with minimum 50 x 8 mm SM screws with plugs/wooden gutties',
etc. (Distance between two supports / saddles shall be maximum 450
mm). Wooden gutties shall be used wherever required (Especially for

stone wall). The entries made in wall, floor slab, etc for laying the cable
shall be made good by filling and finishing with plastering the same.
5.2 Erection of Cable on Trusses:

Cable along with bare Gl earth wire, while erecting on trusses, shall be
firmly clamped by wrapping Gl strip of 22 q. 2-5 mm width of requited
length fixed to truss with nuts and bolts.
5.3 Erection of Cable on Pole:

Cable along with bare Gl earth wire, while erecting on pole, shall be
firmly clipped by suitable wooden / epoxy resin cast grips, clamped with
25 x 3 mm or50x6 mm MS strip of required length and fixed to pole
with nuts and bolts.
5.4 Laying of Cable in provided Trench/Pole:

While laying Cable along with bare Gl earth wire, utmost care shall be
taken to prevent damage to the insulation of the cable and to the open
end. Cable shall be biought out from trench vertically straight (minimum
1.0 metre above G L). Care shall be taken to inspect the trench so that
depth of cable shall not be less than as shown in Table No 7/4.
Suitable size of cable loops shall be provided near termination point at
adequate depth.
5.5 Erecting cable in constructed Trench I duct:

Erection of cable/s In constructed trench / duct, shall be as per guide
lines of IS 1255.
5.6 Erection of cable/s on trays:
Cable/s shall be tied with PVC tags on Gl trays. At bending point
care shall be taken so that sharp edges of sheet will not damage
insulation of cable.
5.7 Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on the

basis of running metre per run of cable.
6. Dismantling
Cable laid underground, or fixed on any surface shall be dismantled

carefully without damaging complete with all its accessories, making
coil and stored as directed. The surface of the dismantled cable shall be
made clear by removing of unwanted material, cement mortar, etc.
When cable is dismantled from trench refill back the trench and making
the surface proper.
7. Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on the

basis of running metre per run of cable.
Table No 7/1
Size of Bare Gl Earth wire to be used with LT Cables upto 1.1 kV
S.No. Size of cable Size of bare Gl Earth wire to be used

with cable
1 2.5 Sqmm to 50 Sqmm of all cores. 12 SWG
2 70 Sqmm to 95 Sqmm of all cores. 10 SWG
3 120 Sqmm and above of all cores.
(B) SWG
(B) PVC/XLPE Cables (CB)
Armoured Cables (HT & LT)
1. General
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall carry ISI
mark. If any particular category of material for which ISI mark is not available
in market, it shall be as
included in approved list.
Work shall be carried out as per the method of construction specified by BIS. If
there is no reference for particular method of construction in IS, such work
shall be carried out as per the approved method of construction specified in

chapter 16 of P.W. Dept. Handbook.
Material and Work not qualifying to any provision mentioned above

shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.
The following list records those Indian Standards in force, which are
acceptable as good practice, and accepted standards. *
SP 30: 1984 National Electrical Code

SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 National Building Code
IS 1255: 1983 Code of practice of Installation & Maintenance of
armored cables up to 33 kV.
IS 3961: Part 2: 1967 Recommended current ratings of PVC cables.
IS 1554: Part 1; 1988 PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables; Part 1
for working voltages up to and including 1100
Volts.
IS 1554: Part 2; 1988 PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables; Part 1
for working voltages up to and including 3.3 kV to
11 kV.
IS 10810. Part 63; 1993 : Method for Test of cables, Part 63 Smoke density of
electric cables under fire condition.
Specification No. (CB-LT/AL, CB-LT/CU, CB-HT)
Providing armoured cable of specified voltage level, size & specified

conducting material Aluminum / Copper) as per Table no. 7/3 including
required material, hardware's for erection and erecting on wall, ceiling, RCC
slab or drawing the same through pole, pipe, laying in provided conduit,
trench, ducts, trays as per approved method of construction including glands,
lugs, etc.
4. Material:
Cables:
Cables shall be PVC for LT/MP and XLPE for HT as per Table no. 7/3 and of
required construction, colour, shall carry ISI mark, IS No, manufacturer's
name, size, duly embossed / screen printed at every metre and having the
total count of progressive length in meter at each mark.
Earth wire: Galvanized Iron (G I) wire of appropriate gauge as per Table No
7/1.
Cable glands: Flange type heavy duty. Made of high purity brass metal
with brass washers, rubber rings, threaded stud with washers and nuts.
Lug: Lug shall be of high purity aluminum/ copper / bimetallic of required
type, with required size of hole and smooth finished both from inside and
outside.
Saddles: Saddles fabricated from Gl sheet of required gauge and size

depending on dia of cable either galvanized or painted with superior quality
enamel black paint with necessary shearing mechanical strength, semi circular
shaped with extended piece having suitable holes for fixing.
GI Strip: 22 q x 25 mm width G I Strip.
Clamps: MS Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, having the size
of 3/6 mm thick mild steel having 25/50 mm width (as per size of cable),
rounded ends with wooden / resin cast grip for holding the cable.
Identification tags: For identifying root, connection position Gl strip with
identification mark / name embossed / painted with arrangement to tie should
be fix on cable or arrangement of ferrules to be done.
Hardware: Sheet Metal (L'.A) screws of required sizes, plugs / wooden gutties,
etc.
General:
a) Irrespective of method of construction the cable ends shall be terminated with

appropriate size & type of glands with lugs duly crimped, as directed by Site
engineer.
b) Wherever the cable has to be bent, the turning radius shall be as mentioned
in Table No 7/2. Grouping of cables shall be done with adequate distance
between cables as mentioned in IS so as to minimize de-iating. Cables shall
be tagged/ferruled with identification name / mark at the point from where
distribution starts and at ends. Dare earth wire of appropriate size ^s per
Table no. 7/1 shall run along with the cable. Earth wire running with the
cable shall be terminated at the earth terminal nearest to cable termination.

Erection shall be done as per the routes and layout finalized, in perfect level
and in plumb. Before fixing the cable shall be straightened as far as possible
for good aesthetics look, continuous bare Gl earth wire of required gauge as
per Table No 7/1 shall be run. Cable with G I wire shall be fixed by saddles
firmly clipped on cable and shall be fixed to wall with minimum 50 x 8 mm
SM screws with plugs/wooden gutties, etc. (Distance between two supports I
saddles shall be maximum 450 mm). Wooden gutties shall be used wherever
required (Especially for stone wall). The entries made in wall, floor slab, etc
for laying the cable shall be made good by filling and finishing with
plastering the same. 1

Cable along with bare Gl earth wire, while erecting on trusses, shall be firmly
clamped by wrapping Gl strip of 22 q. 25 mm width of requited length fixed to
truss with nuts and bolts.

Cable along with bare Gl earth wire, while erecting on pole, shall be firmly
clipped by suitable wooden / epoxy resin cast grips, clamped with 25 x 3 mm
or50x6 mm MS strip of required length and fixed to pole with nuts and bolts.

While laying Cable along with bare Gl earth wire, utmost care shall be taken
to prevent damage to the insulation of the cable and to the open end. Cable
shall be brought out from trench vertically straight (minimum 1.0 metre
above G L). Care shall be taken to inspect the trench so that depth of cable
shall not be less than as shown in Table No 7/4. Suitable size of cable loops
shall be provided near termination point at adequate depth.
5.5 Erecting cable in constructed Trench / duct:

Erection of cable/s '.n constructed trench / duct, shall be as per guide lines of
IS 1255.
Cable/s shall be tied with PVC tags on Gl trays. At bending point care
shall be taken so that sharp edges of sheet will not damage insulation of
cable.
5.7 Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on the basis of

running metre per run of cable.
6. Dismantling
Cable laid underground, or fixed on any surface shall be dismantled carefully

without damaging complete with all its accessories, making coil and stored as
directed. The surface of the dismantled cable shall be made clear by
removing of unwanted material, cement mortar, etc. When cable is
dismantled from trench refill back the trench and making the surface proper.
7. Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on the basis of

running metre per run of cable.
Table No 7/1
Size of Bare Gl Earth wire to be used with LT Cables upto 1.1 Kv
S.No. Size of cable Size of bare Gl Earth wire to be

used with cable
1 2.5 Sqmm to 50 Sqmm of all cores. 12 SWG
2 70 Sqmm to 95 Sqmm of all cores. 10 SWG

3 120 Sqmm and above of all cores. 8 SWG
Table No 7/2
Minimum bending Radius for Cable
S.No. Voltage level of cables Single core Multi core Multi core
Unarmoured Armoured
1 Up to 11 kV 20 D 15 D 12 D
2 Up to 22 kV 25 D 20 D 15 D
3 .Up to 33 kV 30 D 25 D 20 D
Note: D diameter of cable.

Wherever possible, 25 percent larger radii than the specified above should be used.
Table No 7/3
Current Rating (In Ground) for PVC/XLPE Insulated 1.1 kV Grada Cables
Copper Conductor
Nominal area Aluminum Conductor
of conductor (Rating in A)
Single Core Multi Core Single Core Multi Core
Sqmm PVC XLPE PVC XLPE PVC XLPE PVC XLPE
10 51 55 46 50 65 71 60 65
16 66 74 60 68 85 95 77 87
25 86 98 76 90 110 125 99 115
35 100 118 92 108 130 150 120 138
50 120 137 110 126 153 175 145 161
70 140 172 135 158 190 220 175 202
95 175 ;?>14 165 187 220 260 210 239
120 195 234 185 215 250 301 240 276
150 220 ^62 210 240 280 336 270 308
185 240 298 235 273 305 381 300 350
240 270 344 275 316 345 441 345 405
300 295 387 305 355 375 496 385 455
400 325 458 335 420 400 586 425 538
500 345 495 - - 425 635 - -
630 390 555 - 470 710 - -
800 440 625 - - - - - -

1000 490 685 - - - - -
Rating Factors for Variation in Ambient Air Temperature

Air Temperature (°C) 40 45 50
Rating Factor (XLPE) 1.00 0.94 0.88
Rating Factor (PVC) 1.00 0.90 0.81
Table No 7/4
Minimum laying Depth of cables (IS:1255)
S.No. Voltage level of cables Minimum depth from top of the

cable
1 Up to 1.1 kV 750 mm
2 3.3 kV to 11 kV 900 mm
3 22 kV to 33 kV 1050 mm
4 At road crossing 1000 mm
5 At railway crossing (from Bottom of 1000 mm
sleepers to Top of pipe)
Notes below Table No 7/4:
1. PVC Insulated electrical cable for voltage grade up to ,1.1 kV is based on 8 volts drop.
2. The distances are given in meters and after rounding.
3. The distances are given in meters and after rounding.
For Temperature Correction please see as detailed below:
Ground temp. 20 degree C 25 degree C 30 degree C 35 degree C

Rating factors: 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80
Table No 7/5
Distance up to which different sizes of UG Aluminum Conductor Cables 1.1 kV grade, can bo
used for different current ratings of S Volts drop. (PVC insulated, PVC Sheathed, 3 cores or 4
cores)
Maximum Conductor temperature - 70 degree C
S. Current Distance in meters for the following cable sizes in Sqmrr.
No Amp 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 1S0 185 240 300
1 5 165 26 415 725 895 1300 1925 2360 3065 3555 4300 5770 6460
0
2 10 80 13 205 360 450 650 960 1180 1530 1775 2150 2885 3230
0
Maximum Conductor temperature - 70 degree C

S. Current Distance in meters for the following cable sizes in Sqmrr.
No Amp 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 1S0 185 240 300
vJ IS 55 85 140 240 300 430 640 785 1020 1185 1430 1920 2155
4 20 40 65 100 180 225 325 480 590 765 890 1075 1440 1615
5 25 30 50 80 145 180 260 385 470 610 710 860 1150 1290
6 30 25 40 70 120 150 215 320 390 570 590 715 960 1075
7 40 20 30 50 90 110 160 240 295 380 445 535 720 805
8 50 - 25 40 70 90 130 190 235 305 355 i 430 575 645
9 60 - - 35 60 75 110 160 195 255 295 355 480 535
10 70 - 30 50 65 90 135 165 215 255 305 410 460
11 80 - - - 45 55 80 120 145 190 220 265 360 405

12 90 - - - 40 50 70 105 130 170 195 235 320 360
13 100 -- - - 35 45 65 95 115 150 175 215 290 320
14 110 - - - - 40 60 35 105 140 160 195 260 290
15 120 - - - - 35 55 80 95 125 145 180 240 270
16 130 - - - - - 50 75 90 115 135 165 220 250
17 140 - - - - - 45 70 80 110 125 150 205 230
18 150 - - - - - - 65 75 100 115 140 190 215
19 160 - - - - - - 60 70 95 110 130 180 200
20 170 - - - - - 55 70 90 105 125 170 190
21 180 - - - - - - 50 65 85 100 120 160 180

22 190 - - - - - - - 60 80 90 110 150 170
23 200 - - - - - - - 60 75 90 105 145 160
24 225 - - - - - - - - 65 80 95 125 145
25 250 - - - - - - - - - 70 85 115 130
26 275 - - - - - - - - - - 80 105 115
27 300 - - - - - - - - - 70 95 105
(C) Cable Joints & End Termination Kits (LT/HT Cables ) (JT/LT/HT)
1. Scope:
Specification No. (CB-JT/LT/HT)
Providing straight through cable jointing kit of approved make and

jointing cable as per the manufacturer’s instructions and duly
marking name of jointer and date.
2. Material:
Joint kit : Kit manufactured by reputed manufacturer with PVC
moulds made in two parts, with epoxy compound, earth continuity
lead of appropriate cross section having lugs at both ends, aluminum
ferrules of the size of the cable, cross shaped epoxy spacer, Ms clips
for holding the moulds, adhesive for pasting the moulds.
3.1 Straight through joint Kit: LT/HT Cables
Before providing joint to the cable. The cable ends of the equivalent
length of the joint moulds. Shall be prepared by removing the outer
PVC insulation along with the steel armouring. The ferrule shall then
be inserted over the bare core of the cable, and shall be crimped
wot5h hydraulic/ mechanical type heavy duty crimping tool. The
crimped portion shall be wrapped first with the PVC insulation tape
and then with the insulation tape used got wrapped HT conductor.
The above method shall be carried out for all the cores strictly
following the colour code. The leads of the both the cables now shall
be placed into the mould by using the epoxy spacer, for having
sufficient gap in- between the leads. The earth continuity lead shall
be clamped to the both ends of the cable. After covering the cable
leads with the PVC moulds, the edges shall be clipped after applying
the adhesives of the inside face of the moulds. The pasting of moulds
shall be rigid and as far as possible leak proof, so that the epoxy
compound shall not spill out. Now the duly stirred epoxy compound
shall be poured and fill till the compound rises through the risers
provided on the moulds. After completing the above procedure, the
joint shall be allowed to dry out for at least 8 to 10 hours (for epoxy
compound, to get hardened) depending upon the size of cable.
Before connecting to supply, the dry and hardened joint shall be

tested for its insulation level with 1000V/5000 V Meggar.
The cable should be fixed or laid in such manner that there should
not be pressure on end of moulds or on jointing position of cables.
(Refer drawing No. CB – JT-1)
3.2 Outdoor/Indoor end termination Kit: LT/HT Cables

Before providing end termination kit to the cable, the cables end of
the equivalent length of the moulds, shall be prepared by removing
the outer PVC insulation along with steel armouring. The ferrule shall
then be inserted over the bare core of the cable, and shall be
crimped with hydraulic / mechanical type heavy duty crimping tool.
The crimping shall be done in such a manner that there shall be no
air gap. Then the crimped portion shall be wrapped first with the PVC
insulation tape and then with the insulation tape used for wrapping
HT conductor. The above method shall be carried out for all the
cores strictly following the colour code. The leads of the cable now
shall be placed into the mould by using the epoxy spacer, for having
sufficient gap in – between the leads. The earth continuity lead shall
be clamped to theends of the cable. After covering the cable leads
with the PVC moulds, the edges shall be clipped after applying the
adhesive on the inside face of the moulds. The pasting of moulds
shall be rigid and as far as possible leak proof, so that the epoxy
compound shall not spill out. Now the duly stirred epoxy compound
shall be poured and fill till the compound rises through the risers
provided on the moulds. (Refer drawing No. CB-JT-2)
After completing the above procedure, the joint shall be allowed to
dry out for at least 8 to10 hours (for epoxy compound to get harden)
depending upon the size of cable. Before connecting to supply, the
dry and hardened joint shall be tested for its insulation level with
1000V/5000V meggar.
4. Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (i.e.each)
(D) Cable Glands (GL)
Scope:
Specification Nos (CB- GL)
Termination of cable ends with cable glands for preparing and fixing
the cable leads for connection. Cable glands shall be of Flange type.
Material:
Cable glands: Flange type heavy duty. Made of high purity brass
metal with brass washers, rubber rings, threaded stud with washers
and nuts.
Method of Construction
Before erection of gland, the cable end shall be prepared by
removing the outer PVC insulation up to the point where gland to be
fixed, by assessing the length of leads required.
Bottom portion of gland shall be inserted over the steel armouring,
and then armour strips shall be bent for the length of collar of gland,
remaining length of armoring shall be cut. The cable end shall then
be, inserted through the entry of plate where the cable is to be
terminated. The top portion of gland with washer shall be then
inserted in such a manner that the bent armour strip should be
touching the surface of the entry. The nuts shall be tightened with
spring washers over the projected stud portion. Fixing of gland shall
be at right angle to the gland plate. Tightening shall assure continuity
of earth. Hole to the gland plate shall be punched / knocked out, of
correct diameter with respect to gland size.
Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (i.e. each).
27.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE FIGHTING

WORK LATEST EDITION CODES TO BE USED
1. Life Safety code - NFPA 101
2. Standard for installation of sprinkler system - TAC/NBC
3 Fire Hydrant System - TAC/NBC
4. Fire Pumps - TAC
5. Fire Sprinkler System - TAC/NFPA11
6. Addressable Fire alarm & detection System - TAC/IS:2189/NFPA72
1.0 FIRE FIGHTING SERVICES
1.1 Work under this sub-head consists of furnishing all Labour, Materials,
equipment and accessories necessary and required to completely install
the Fire Fighting equipment etc., specified hereinafter and given in the
Schedule of Quantities.
1.2 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the work of Fire
Fighting System shall include the followings:
a) Providing M.S. steel pressure pipe line main for above ground &
underground pipe line & Butterfly valves for above ground pipe
lines, gear operated butterfly valve, check valve, ball valves,
strainers, Fire Hydrants, Excavation for Pipe, RCC Hume pipe,
Laying of pipe, anti-corrosion material, Painting of pipe and
Making Connection to supply system.
b) Black Steel Pipe, Mains Laterals, Branches, Valves, Hangers and

Appurtenances.
c) Hose Reels, Rubberized fabric lined hose pipes, air release

valves, Hose cabinets, Sprinkler heads, water flow switches, level
controller and Landing Valves, alarm check valves, air release
valve, structural supports, hanger supports along with Portable

Fire Extinguisher as local norms.
d) Making RCC Pedestal for aboveground pipe lines.
e) Fire Fighting Pump set electrical driven 1no. as working(hydrant

& sprinkler system),1no. as Jockey, & 1No.booster pump set &
1No. Diesel engine driven pump set as standby all accessories
such as day tank, battery set, diesel engine controller etc with
complete set, panels and all connected accessories including
suction & delivery pipes.
f) Testing Commissioning and giving live demonstrations to the

various Inspection Authorities such as consultant, Chief Fire
Officer PMC, client authorized representative and Obtain Final
"No Objection Certificate" (NOC) from local authority i.e. Chief
Fire Officer PMC.
2.1 All materials shall be of the best quality conforming to the Specifications
and subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2.2 Pipes and Fittings shall be fixed truly Vertical, Horizontal or in slopes as
required in a neat workman like manner.
2.3 Pipes shall be fixed in a manner so as to provide easy accessibility for

repair and maintenance and shall not cause any obstruction in shaft,
passage etc.
2.4 Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceiling by suitable clamps at
intervals specified. Only approved type of anchor fasteners shall be used
for RCC ceilings/columns.
2.5 Valves and other appurtenance shall be so located that they are easily
accessible for operation, repairs and maintenance.
3.0 PIPES
3.1 All pipes above ground outside/inside the buildings/factory sheds and
vertical shafts shall be M.S. Pipes as follows:
3.1.1 Pipes 150 mm dia and below IS: 1239 Heavy Class
3.1.2 Pipe 200 mm dia and above IS 3589 of thickness specified in bill of
quantity.
3.2.1 All underground pipes shall be M.S. Pipes heavy class with soil corrosion
protection.
4.0 PIPE FITTINGS
4.1 Pipes and fittings means tees, elbows, couplings, flanges, reducers etc.
And all such connecting devices that are needed to complete the piping
work in its totality fittings for 50mm dia and below should be socket
welded/ and for pipes 65mm dia & above should be butt welded.
4.2 Fabricated fittings shall not be permitted for pipe diameters 50 mm and
below.
4.3 When used, they shall be fabricated, welded and inspected in

workshops under supervision of Project Managers whose welding
procedures have been approved by project manager/consultant & same
will be as per Chief Fire Officer M.I.D.C. for sprinkler system and
applicable to hydrant, internal hose reel and sprinkler system. For "T"
connections, pipes shall be drilled and reamed. If Cutting by gas or
electrical welding beyond 65mm dia & above sizes pipe then it will be in
proper round as per respective pipe joint size with grinding & ensuring
any burr will not fallen inside the pipes.
5.0 JOINTING
5.1 Threaded (50 mm dia pipes and below)
Joint for black steel pipes and fittings shall be threading joints.
5.2 Welded (65 mm dia and above)
Joints between M.S. pipes and fittings shall be made with the pipes and
fittings having "V" groove and welded with electrical resistance welding
in an approved manner. Buried pipes will be subject to X Ray test from
an approved agency as per the TAC norms at the cost of contractor.

(With welded M.S. fittings heavy class with V-Groove). The welding
machine shall be 3 Phase of required current and capacity.
5.3 Flanges.
Flanged joints shall be provided on:
a) Both ends of any fabricated fittings e.g. bend tees etc. of 80 mm dia or
larger diameter.
b) For jointing all types of valves, appurtenances, pumps, connections with

other type of pipes, to water tanks and other places necessary and
required as good for engineering practice.
d) Flanges shall be as per BS: 10 TABE E with appropriate number of G.I.

nuts and bolts, half threaded of GKW make or equivalent with 3 mm
insertion neoprene gasket complete for above ground pipe lines.
5.4 Unions
Provide Approved type of dismountable unions on pipes lines 65 mm

and below in similar places as specified for flanges shall be provided.
6.0 PIPE PROTECTION
6.1 All pipes above ground and in exposed locations shall be painted with
one coat of Red Oxide Primer and two or more coats of Synthetic
Enamel Paint of approved shade.
6.2 All black steel pipes below ground shall be provided with protection
against corrosion by application of 100mm wide and 4mm thick layer
of PYPKOTE/ MAKPOLYKOTE over the pipe, as per manufacturer's
specifications.
7.0 PIPE SUPPORTS Above Ground Pipe
7.1 All pipes shall be adequately supported from ceiling, columns, trusses,
purlins or walls from existing/new inserts by Structural clamps fabricated
from M.S. Structural e.g. Rods, Channels, Angles, rod and Flats as per
details given in drawings and specifications. All clamps shall be painted
with one coat of red lead and two coats of black Enamel paint.
7.2 Where inserts are not provided, the Contractor shall provide anchor
fasteners. Anchor fastener shall be fixed to walls and ceilings by drilling
holes with Electrical drill in an approved manner as recommended by
the manufacturer of the fasteners.
Underground Pipe
7.3 Proper rigid surface to be made before laying pipe in excavated

trenches.
8.0 TESTING
8.1 All pipes in the system shall be tested to a hydraulic pressure of 1.5
times of the working pressure or minimum of 15 Kg/Cm2 without drop
in the pressure for at least 2 hours.
8.2 Rectify all leakages, make adjustment and retest as required.
9.0 HOLIDAY TEST
On completion of the coating, it shall be tested using high voltage

holiday detectors, to 11 Kv. All holidays found shall be repaired and the
repairs be tested to ensure that adequate repairs have been made.
Holiday testing shall be carried out once the pipes have been lowered in
trenches and should be carried out with the help of detachable rings
only. Testing by brush shall not be acceptable.
10.0 PAINTING
Paint shall be thoroughly stirred before pouring in small containers and

while applying to ensure uniform consistency. The operation for each
coat shall consist of a stroke of the brush given form the top
downwards, another from the bottom upward over the first stroke and
similarly sideways before it dries. No brush marks, hair marks or
clogging of paint puddles shall be left. Each coat shall be allowed to dry
before the next coat is applied. After the work is complete, the brushes
shall be cleaned of paint and linseed oil by rinsing by turpentine. Initial
cleaning of the pipes by buffing wheel, to be followed by 2 coats of Red

Oxide primer and followed by 2 Coats of Fire Red enamel paint.
11.0 RCC PEDESTAL SUPPORT
Contractor shall provide suitable RCC pedestal supports of ample

dimensions at all bends, tee connection and other places required and
necessary for overcoming pressure thrusts in pipes. RCC pedestal shall
be of including required plaster as per civil engineering standard.
12. VALVES
12.2 Butterfly valves shall be tested to a minimum of 10 kg / cm2. The valves

shall fulfill the requirements of BS: 5155 or AWWA C 504, API 609 and
MSS-SP-67. The disc shall be heavy duty cast iron with anti corrosive
epoxy or nickel coating. The valve seat shall be high grade elastomer or
nitrile rubber. The shaft shall be of EN8 grade carbon steel. Gear
operated above 150mm dia.
12.3 Check valves shall be ductile iron Double Flanged with a rating of
PN1.0 valves shall be swing check type. The body shall confirm to CI
body confirming to IS 5312.
12.4 Brass Ball Valve full port with P.T.F.E. seat screwed female ends suitable
for water including either side fittings with rating of PN1.0.
13.0 EXTERNAL YARD HYDRANTS
13.1 The Contractor shall provide External Fire Hydrant shall comprise "Single
Headed Single Outlet Gun-metal Valve" conforming to type 'A' of IS:
5290-1977. in the Ring or on External Fire Line, as per specifications as
specified in Schedule of Quantities and as shown in drawings. The
spacing of the hydrants and the distance from the building shall be
maintained as per relevant requirements of latest relevant codes, unless
specified herewith.
13.2 Each External Fire Hydrant shall be provided with an External Fire Hose
Cabinet of M.S or fiber glass, as specified in Schedule of Quantities of
size specified, as approved by the Architect to equip 2 nos. of 63 mm
dia R.R.L hose and accessories as required. The cabinet shall be
installed near the Hydrant as per details specified in drawings, approved
by the Engineer /consultant.
14.0 INTERNAL HYDRANTS
14.1 The Internal Hydrant outlet shall comprise "Single Headed Single Outlet
Gun metal Landing Valve" conforming to type 'A' of IS: 5290¬1977.
Separate valve on the head shall form part of the landing valve
construction.
14.2 A Gun metal cap with chain is provided on one head of the outlet. The
hydrant will have an instantaneous pattern female coupling for
connecting to Hose Pipe.
14.3 The Landing Valve shall be fitted to a Tee connection on the wet riser at
the landing.
15.0 FIRST-AID HOSE REEL EQUIPMENT
15.1 First aid hose reel equipment shall comprise reel, hose guide fixing
bracket hose tubing ball valve, union and nozzle. This shall conform to
IS: 884 - 1969. The hose tubing shall confirm to IS: 1532-1969.
and ball valve shall be of 19 mm size.
15.3 The hose tubing shall be 25 mm dia and 30m long. The G.M nozzle
suitable/standard size and ball valve shall be of 25 mm size along for
internal fire hose reel system except for landing hydrants.
15.4 The fixing bracket shall be of swinging type. Operating instructions shall
be engraved on the assembly. This heavy duty mild steel and cast iron
brackets shall be conforming to IS:884 - 1969. The first-aid hose reel
shall be connected directly to the M.S. pipe riser taken independently
from ring.
16.0 HOSE PIPES, BRANCH PIPES AND NOZZLES
16.1 Hose pipes
16.1.1 Two numbers Hose Pipes shall be rubber lined woven jacketed and
63mm in dia. 15m long. They shall confirm to type A (Reinforced rubber
lined) of IS: 636 - 1979. The hose shall be sufficiently flexible and
capable of being rolled.
16.1.2 Each run of hose shall be complete with necessary coupling at the ends
to match with the landing valve or with another run of hose pipe or with
branch pipe. The couplings shall be of instantaneous spring lock type &
MOC will be Gun Metal. This shall be conforming to IS: 903.
16.2 BRANCH PIPE
16.2.1 Branch pipes
Branch pipe shall be of Gun Metal as given in BOQ 63 mm dia and be

complete with male instantaneous spring lock type coupling for
connection to the hose pipe. The branch pipe shall be externally
threaded to receive the nozzle.
16.3 Nozzle
The nozzle shall be of Gun Metal, as specified in BOQ 20 mm in

(internal) diameter. The screw threads at the inlet connection shall match
with the threading on the branch pipe. The inlet end shall have a
hexagonal head to facilitate screwing of the nozzle on to the branch
pipe with nozzle spanner.
16.3.1 End Couplings, Branch pipe, and Nozzles shall conform to IS: 903 -
1985.
16.3.2 Two R.R.L. hoses of 15m length with couplings shall be provided with
each External (Yard) Hydrant. Two R.R.L. hoses of 15m length, as
specified, with couplings shall be provided with each Internal Hydrant.
One nozzle and one branch pipe with coupling shall be provided with
each Yard Hydrant and Internal Hydrant.
17.0 HOSE BOX
17.1 The External/internal hose cabinet shall accommodate the Hose Pipes &
Branch Pipe and shall be fabricated from 2 mm thick or 14 mm gauge
M.S sheet as specified in Bill of Quantities. The overall size shall be
750x600x250 mm (external) & 750x600x250 mm (Internal), or as
specified in the consultants' drawing. This shall have lockable centre
opening glazed doors as per the requirement and as per consultant's
drawing along with support arraignment shown in drawings including
required civil pedestal, pad plates & fasteners etc. complete. Glass
thickness shall be min. 4mm with required rubber beading.
17.2 The hose box shall be painted red and stove enameled and woods FIRE
written in front glazed portion.
18.0 FIRE BRIGADE INLET CONNECTIONS
18.1 Fire Brigade Inlet connection shall be provided near the pump house
and to the ring main system as specified and as described in the BOQ,
for the following purposes:
i) Fire Brigade suction connection for fire static tank with provision of foot
valve.
ii) Fire brigade inlet connection to fire static tank.
iii) Fire brigade inlet connection to ring main system. Each connection shall
be provided with similar dia of Butterfly valve.
18.2 The locations of these Fire brigade connections shall be suitably decided
with the approval of Consultant/Landscape Architect and with a view
that these are easily accessible to the fire brigade, without any possible
Hindrance.
19.0 SPRINKLER HEADS
19.1 Sprinkler heads shall be provided at approximate spacing to cover as

per FM Global requirements per Sprinkler head. The spacing shall
however, be in conformity with the drawings and properly coordinated
with Electrical Fixtures, Ventilation Ducts and Grills and other services
along the ceiling.
19.2 Sprinkler heads shall be Chrome finished Brass/Gunmetal with quartz

bulb with a temperature rating of 68°C Sprinkler heads shall be of type
and quality approved by UL or FM. The inlet shall be screwed. Sprinkler
heads shall be pendent Sprinkler types as shown in drawings. All
Sprinklers should have the UL or FM.
19.3 Contractor shall supply spare Sprinkler Heads of each type as per
requirement and one Spanner for each type of sprinkler neatly installed
in a steel box with glass shutters at locations approved by the Engineer.
At Extra Cost
20.0 ALARM VALVE & AUTOMATIC WATER MOTOR GONG VALVE
The alarm valve & water motor gong valve with required trims is to be
provided on the each sprinkler individual tap point as per shown in
drawings & same shall be UL or FM approved.
21.0 FIRE FIGHTING HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMP SETS
21.1 Fire and Jockey Pumps
21.1.1 The selected pump capacity is in line with the recommendations of NBC
- Part IV. The pumps shall be capable of delivering not less than 150 %
of the rated capacity of water at a head of not less than 65 % of the
rated head. The shut off head shall not exceed 120 % of the rated head.
The fire pumps shall be single stage split casing type horizontal
centrifugal pumps with CI body and bronze impellers. Connecting shaft
shall be stainless steel with bronze sleeve and grease lubricated
bearings as per TAC regulations. The pumps shall be connected to the
drive by means of spacer type love – joy coupling which shall be
individually balanced dynamically and statically. The coupling, which
joins the prime mover with the pump, shall be provided with a sheet
metal guard. Pumps shall be installed on anti - vibration pads.
21.1.2 Pumps shall be connected to the drive by means of pin-bush type

coupling, which shall be individually balanced dynamically and
statically.
21.1.3 The coupling joins the prime mover with the pump shall be provided
with a sheet metal guard.
21.1.4 Pumps shall be capable of delivering not less than 150% of the rated
capacity of water at a head of not less than 65% of the rated head. The
shut-off head shall not exceed 120% of the rated head.
21.1.5 The pump shall meet the requirements of the NFPA 20 and unit shall be
design proven in fire protection services.
21.2 Motors for Electric Driven Pumps
21.2.1 Electrically driven pumps shall be provided with totally enclosed fan
cooled induction motors. For fire pumps, the motors should be rated not
to draw starting current more than 3 times normal running current.
21.2.2 Motors for fire protection pumps shall be at least equivalent to the horse
power required to drive the pump at 150% of its rated discharge and
the should follow the NFPA curve.
21.2.3 Motors for fire pumps shall meet all requirements and specifications of
the tariff advisory committee.
21.2.4 Motors shall be suitable for 415 volts, 3 Phase,50 cycles A.C supply and
shall be designed for 33o C ambient temperature. Motors shall conform
to IS: 325.
21.2.5 Motors shall be designed for auto start system.
21.2.6 Motors shall be capable of handling the required starting torque of the
pumps.
21.3.0 DIESEL ENGINE
The engine shall be cold starting type without the necessity of

preliminary heating of the engine cylinders or combustion chambers.
The engine shall be multi cylinder, 4 stroke cycle, water cooled engine
developing suitable HP at the operating speed specified to drive the
pump. Continuous capacity available for the load shall be exclusive of
the power requirement of auxiliaries of the diesel engine and after
correction for altitude, ambient temperature and humidity for the
specified environmental conditions as mentioned. This shall be atleast
20 % greater than the maximum HP required to drive the pump at its

duty point. It shall also be capable of driving the pump at its duty point.
It shall also be capable of driving the pump at 150 % of the rated
discharge at 65 % of rated head. The engine shall be capable of
continuous operation for 8 hours and atleast 3000 hours of operation
before major overhaul.
The engine shall have 10 % overload capacity for one hour in any
period of 12 hours continuous run.
The engine shall accept full load within 15 seconds from the receipt of
signal to start. The diesel engine shall come along with baseplate,
coupling, coupling guard, foundation bolts, antivibration pads,
batteries, battery charger cum diesel engine controller, fuel tank,
exhaust piping and exhaust insulation / painting, one complete fill of
diesel for testing and one for operation. The capacity of the fuel tank
shall be for a continuous operation of 8 hrs.
Starting system
The starting system shall comprise of necessary batteries, starter motor

of adequate capacity and axle type gear to match with the toothed ring
on the flywheel. Metallic relay protection suitably integrated with engine
protection system shall be included within the scope of work to protect
starting motor from excessively long cranking runs.
The battery capacity shall be suitable for meeting the needs of the
starting system. The batteries shall be maintenance free batteries. The
battery capacity shall be adequate for 10 consecutive starts without
recharging with cold engine under full compression.
The scope shall cover all cabling, terminals, initial charging etc. Exhaust
system
The exhaust system shall be complete with residential type silencer

suitable for outdoor installation and silencer piping including bends and
bird / water canopy. The total backpressure shall not exceed the engine
manufacturer's recommendation. The exhaust piping shall be suitably

lagged.
Engine shutdown mechanism
This shall be manually operated and shall return automatically to the

starting position after use.
Governing system
The engine shall be provided with an adjustable governor to control the

engine speed with 5 % of its rated speed under all conditions of load
upto full load. The governor shall be set to maintain rated pump speed
at maximum pump load.
Engine instrumentation
• Lubricating oil pressure gauge.

• Lubricating oil temperature gauge.
• Water pressure gauge.
• Water temperature gauge.
• Tachometer.
• Hour meter.
The instrumentation panel shall be suitably mounted on the engine.

Engine protection devices
• Low lubricating oil pressure.

• High cooling water temperature.
• High lubricating oil temperature.
• Over speed shut down.
Anti vibration mounting
Suitable anti vibration mounting duly approved (10 mm thk / 6 * 6 inch

long rubber pads) shall be employed for mounting the unit so as to
minimise transmission of vibration to the structure. The isolation
efficiency achievable shall be clearly indicated.
Battery Charger cum engine controller.
Necessary float and boost charger shall be incorporated in the control

section of the power and control panel, to keep the battery under trim
condition. Voltmeter to indicate the state of charge of the batteries shall
be provided. The control panel shall be wall mounted, provided with
breaker, ammeter, voltmeter, selector switch, Hz meter lamps, terminal
block special relay, interlock, autostart facility to be offered with engine
fault shut down system.
All pump sets data sheet, G.A. drawing & characteristic curve to be
furnished along with technical bid in addition to be below given data
sheet format.
21.3.3 Pipe work

All pipe line with fittings and accessories required shall be provided for
fuel oil, lube oil and exhaust piping systems, heat exchanger water
cooling piping of adequate sizes shall be used for lube oil and fuel oil.
21.3.4 Anti Vibration mounting

Suitable vibration mounting duly approved by Engineer shall be
employed for mounting the unit so as to minimize transmission of
vibration to the structure. The isolation efficiency achievable shall be
clearly indicated.
21.3.5 Battery Charger

Necessary float and boost charger shall be incorporated in the control
section of the power and control panel, to keep the battery under trim
condition. Voltmeter to indicate the state of charge of the batteries shall
be provided.
21.3.6 Diesel Engine Controller
Diesel Engine controller will be the part of fire MCC Panel.

22.0 Air Vessel
The air vessel shall be provided to compensate for slight loss of pressure
in the system and to provide an air cushion for counter acting, pressure,
surges, whenever the pumping sets come into operation. Air vessel shall
conform to IS: 3844. It shall be normally half full of water, when the
system is in normal operation. Air vessel shall be fabricated with 8 mm
thick M.S. plate with dished ends and suitable supporting legs. It shall
be provided with one 50mm dia connection from delivery header, one
25 mm drain with valve, one water level gauge and 25 mm sockets for
pressure switches. The air vessel shall be tested to pressure for 12 hours
at 2 times the operating pressure or 1.5 times the shut-off.
23.0 CABLES
23.1 Contractor shall provide all power control cables from the motor control
centre to various motors, level controllers and other control devices.
23.2 Cables shall conform to IS: 1554 and carry ISI mark.
23.3 Wiring cables shall conform to IS 694.
23.4 All power and wiring cables shall be aluminium conductor PVC
insulated armoured and PVC sheathed of 1100 volts grade.
23.5 All control cables shall be copper conductor PVC insulated armoured
and PVC sheathed 1100 Volt grade.
23.6 All cables shall have stranded conductors. The cables shall be in drums
as far as possible and bear manufacturer's name.
23.7 All cables joints shall be made in approved manner as per standard
practice.
23.8 The cable jointing shall be Crimping type.
24.0 CABLE TRAYS
24.1 Contractor shall provide G.I. perforated cable trays at locations as

shown on the drawings and of sizes as given in the bill of quantities,
with G.I. sheet thickness of 1.5mm.
24.2 Cable trays shall be supported from the bottom of the slab at intervals
of 60cms at both ends by welding support rods with insert plates OR
Anchor fasteners.
24.3 Cost of clips, bolts, nuts, support rods and any other materials required
to fix the trays in proper manner shall be included in the rate for trays.
25.0 EARTHING
25.1 There shall be an independent earthing station. The earthing shall

consist of an earth tape connected to an independent plate made of
copper or G.I. having a conductivity of not less than 100% international
standard. All electrical apparatus, cable boxes and sheath/armour
clamps shall be connected to the main bar by means of branch earth
connections of appropriate size. All joints in the main bar and between
main bar and branch bars shall have the lapping surface properly
tinned to prevent oxidation. The joints shall be riveted and sweated.
25.2 Earth plates shall be buried in a pit of 1.20x1.20M at minimum depth of

3M below ground. The connections between main bar shall be made by
means of three 10mm brass studs and fixed at 100mm centres. The pit
shall be filled with coke breeze, rock salt and loose soil. A G.I. pipe of
20mm dia with perforations on the periphery shall be placed vertically
over the plate to reach ground level for watering.
25.3 A brick masonry manhole 30x30x30xcm size shall be provided to

surround the pipe for inspection. A bolted removable link connecting
main bar outside the pit portion leading to the plates shall be
accommodated, in this manhole for testing.
25.4 Following sizes of earth conductors shall be used for motors:
Upto 5 KW 8 SWG G.I. Wire
5 KW to 30 KW 25 mm x 3 mm G.I. Flat
Above 30 KW 32 mm x 6 mm G.I. Flat.
The complete earthing system for the fire fighting system shall be
included in the scope of work.
This shall include earthing for MCC, motors, distribution boards, Diesel
engine controller etc. and any other interconnections to make the system
complete.
26.0 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
26.1 MCC shall be cubical type i.e. one motor feeder completely in one
cubicle, and shall be fabricated from 14 gauge M.S. sheet with dust &
vermin proof construction. It shall have Powder Coated finish and shall
be fitted with suitable etched plastic identification plates for each motor.
The cubicle shall comprise of the following: -
INCOMING
1 no. suitable rating TPN SFU
1set of suitable rating Amps. TPN AI. Bus bars with colours coded heat
shrinkable PVC sleeves.
1 set of RYB indicating lamps with individual HRC control fuses. 1 No.
96 mm x 96mm. 400 Amps. Ammeter with selector switch and suitable
rated current transformers. 1 No. 96mmx96mm. voltmeter with selector
switch.
Outgoing
feeder for main pumps -2Nos. 1No.suitable rating TP SFU .
Star delta starter for 60 hp with over load relay, single phase preventor
and indicating lamps for pressure ok, on, off and automode with
ON/OFF push button. feeder for jockey pump -1No.
1 No. suitable rating TP MCB .
S/D starter for suitable hp with over load relay, single phase preventor
and indicating lamps for pressure ok, on, off and automode with ON
/OFF push button.
1 No. Automanual selector switch
Feeder for booster pump -N.A.
1 No. suitable rating TP MCB.

S/D starter for 12.5 hp with over load relay, single phase preventor and
indicating lamps for on,off,with ON /OFF push button. Manual mode
only DIESEL ENGINE PUMP 1 No.
a) suitable rating DPMCB -4 Nos.

b) battery charger with transformer with rectifier resistance DC
voltmeter , trickle /booster /off selector switch/ or smps chargers
- 1 No.
c) 1 set of indicating lamps for the following :
1. battery charger on
2. DC supply on
3. control switch on
4. Engine fails to start
5. Engine fails to stop
6. Pressure sw not opretable (at start)
7. pump on
8. Low oil pressure
9. High water temperature

10. auto manual selector switch
d) 1 set of push button stations for the following :
1. Engine start
2. Engine stop
3. Engine hooter ACK
4. Engine fault reset
e) selector switches (Engine control ,mode selector) -1 No.
f) Auxilary relays / Engine controller for sequence operating for

starting and stopping of the engine - 1 set
g) Hooter for audio alarm in case of main pump start and any
pump over load or engine fault with test and ACK.
ACK push button (industrial type ) -1 No.
All the components shall be housed in a common cubical made of 14

swg. M.S. sheet with required stiffeners (if required ). The panel shell
have top cable entry provisions and panel shall be mounted on pedestal
of 300 mm height.
Also panel shall have min. 6Nos. Per pump set NO /NC contacts for
extending the status of fire pumps to the fire alarm panel. Overloading
status to be connected to hooter located on panel.
27.0 AIR RELEASE VALVE
The mounting shall be screwed type. The material shall be gunmetal.

This should be of spring type.
28.0 FOOT VALVE
28.1 Foot valves with strainer shall be C.I., confirming to I.S:4038 - 1979, as
specified in bill of quantities.
29.0 PRESSURE SWITCH Connection size Switch
Fluid Type
Working temperature
Element type & material type
Water Ambient V2" NPT (FM)
Bellows type & phosphor bronze Snap acting micro switch
Size of cable entry V2" NPT +/-
Accuracy 0.5%
Type of enclosure Dust proof
Voltage 230V, 50 Hz
Operating Pressure Electrical contact closure
30.0 PRESSURE GAUGE
Fluid Water
Working pressure 10.0 Kg / sq.cm

Element Bourdon tube element of SS 316
Dial Size 150 mm diameter & scale division
shall be in Metric units marked in
B/W
Operating pressure 0 to 16 Kg/cm2
Connection size V" NPT (M)
FIRE FIGHTING WORKS
31.0 ALARM SYSTEM:
31.1 The Fire detection.& Alarm system along with fire fighting equipments
mentioned in the above scope has been designed so that it protects the
entire building including passages, stores, rooms, still service plant
rooms, substation equipments rooms etc. but excludes car parking area.
31.2 The General type of detectors to be used should be Ionization smoke

detectors & heat detectors. The use of temperature type detectors shall
be installed in very small area only & where fire load so necessitates.
The application & selections however will depend upon the technical
characteristics of the particular motive of the detector.
31.3 The each floor/area will have certain no. of detectors & will be provided
suitably in the false ceiling / surface of the ceilings. The bell push &
sounders shall also be provided at suitable location for ease of use at
difficult time of fire. These detectors push buttons etc. shall be controlled
in operation through a wall mounted panel in the lobby. The detectors
zones shall be divided in such a way that it shall cater to entire area of
the floor. The floor Panel/Repeater panel (where necessary) shall be
connected to the Main Control Panel to be located in Main reception
area for easy location & identification.
31.4 The main control panel shall be given an audio / visual indication of the
floor & shall also Transmit faulty zones/area there by indicating
probably fire areas.
31.5 The individual detectors located in the closed rooms. ducts. etc. shall be
wired to visual response indicators located just out side the area housing
that particular detector . to enable authorized fire fighting personnel to
pin point at a glance the affected area, immediately on entry into the
affected zone & there by proceed with fire fighting operations without
losing time.
31.6 The technical requirement of each of the important components of fire

detection & alarm are mentioned in the specifications.
32.0 DESIGN
32.1 The fire fighting hydrant equipment such as fire pumps, hose panel
stations, wet risers, different types of extinguisher has been designed so
that the capacity & quantity is adequate to cover the worst conditions of
fires in the any area of Factory complex.
32.2 The general requirement of wet riser for the building with provision of
adequate capacity of fire fighting pumps shall be of M.S. pipe
permanently charged with water under pressure, rising the full height of
the building / reaching all areas.
32.3 The extinguishers shall be of appropriate type for the various class of
fires causing from Electrical system or otherwise.
32.4 The location mountings & operation of such equipments shall be easy &
the use of this is made by the fire fighting personals immediately. on
entry into the affected area by starting operations without loss of time.
32.5 The technical requirement of each of the important components of the

fire fighting equipments & extinguishers are covered in this specification.
33. 0 MAIN CONTROL PANEL
33.1 The main control panel shall be fabricated from 16 SWG M.S. sheet.
It should be suitable for wall mounting. The Main panel shall be of with
extensible zones. All components should be so designed / chosen that
the reliability of control panel shall not be affected due to deterioration,
resulting from variation in temperature, humidity and corrosion over the
years. The panel shall be completely dust and vermin proof All manual
control should be of robust design/ construction positive in location to
avoid accidental operation.
Manual controls should be clearly labeled to clearly indicate mode of

operation and their functions.
33. 2 The panel should have Electronic solid - state circuitry with different
colors LED lamps to indicate origin in fault or fire alarms with district
and discrete audible sound audible signal acknowledge / silence button
including LED lamps to indicate its operation.
33. 3 The panel shall be provided with Test facility to check fire alarm circuit
and indicators should also be provided. The panel shall be located on
the reception area to have visualization. The exact location will be
decided at site in consultation with Architect/ consultant.
33. 4 Failure of any indicator circuit should not prevent the fire alarm from
sounding.
33. 5 A switch to actuate alarm in main control panel to one or more floor
area should be provided.
33. 6 The panel should have public Address system with Talk back facility with
all floor/building areas.
33. 7 The Main Control Panel shall be provided with following indicators.
a. Power On.
b. Fire in the zones.
c. Wiring Fault
d. Charger Fault.
e. Battery Fault.
f. Main failure.
g. Auxiliary fault.
h. Zone Isolation
i. Fireman's switch arrangement of the lift.
33. 8 The panel shall be suitable for operation on 230V A.C. Supply and
backed up with 24V, D.C. Battery supply. The battery should be self-
charging and shall be capable of keeping the system running for a
minimum 12 hours.
33. 9 The panel shall be provided with following auxiliary functions.
a. Public Address System.
b. Tripping of air handling units. A/C plants, fire dampers etc.
33. 10 The panel should be painted as per the required shade to be decided at
later date by Client/Consultants.
33.11 The control panel shall be complete with interconnections, interlocking

wiring and lamp/Alarm/Test push button. Circuit labels comprising of
the white engraved letter on block PVC sheets printed circuit diagram
fixed on the covers of the panels.
34.0 FLOOR CONTROL PANEL/REPEATER PANEL:
34.1 The panel shall be fabricated from 16SWG CRCA H.S. sheet. It should
be suitable for wall Mounting. The panel shall be with extensible zones.
All the components should be so designed/ Chosen that the reliability of
control panel shall not be affected due to deterioration resulting from
variation in temperature, humidity and corrosion over the years. The

panels shall be completely dust and vermin proof. All manual controls
should be robust design/ construction, positive in location to avoid
accidentals operation. Manual controls should be clearly labeled to
clearly indicate mode of operation and their functions.
34.2 The panel should have Electronic solid state circuitry with different colour
LED lamps to indicate origin in fault or fire. fault and fire alarms with
distinct and discrete audible sound audible signal acknowledge/silence
button including LED lamps to indicate its operators.
34.3 The panel should be provided with Test facility to check fire alarm circuit
and indicators should also be provided. The panel shall be located at
suitable place near staircase for easy visualization.
34.4 Failures of any indicator circuit should not prevent the fire alarm from
sounding.
34.5 A switch to actuate alarm from main control panel to one or more floors
should be provided.
34.6 The panel should have public address system with Talk back facility with
all floor/areas.
34.7 The floor control panel shall be provided with following indicators.
a. Power on
b. Fire in the Zones
c. Wiring Faults
d. Charger Faults
e. Battery Fault.
f. Main Failure.
g. Auxiliary Fault.
h. Zone Isolation.
34.8 The panel shall be suitable for operation on 230V AC supply and
backed up with 24 V D.C. battery supply. The battery should be SMF
type.
34.9 The panel shall be provided with following auxiliary functions.
a. Public Address system
b. Tripping of Air Handling units, A/C plant and window air conditioners,
fire dampers etc.
34.10 The panel should be painted as per the required shade to be decided at
later date by Client / Consultants.
34.11 The control panel shall be complete with interconnections interlocking

wiring Lamp/Alarm/Test push button, circuit labels comprising of the
white engraved letter on black PVC sheet printed circuit diagrams fixed
on the inner covers of the panels.
34.12 The panel should be provided with test facility to check fire alarm circuit
and should also be provided. The panel shall be located in the reception
area to have easy visualization. The exact location will be decided at the
site with consultation &Client/Consultants.
34.13 The panel should have public address system with Talk back facility with
all floors.
34.14 The panel shall be suitable for operation on 230V A.C. supply, and
backed up with 24V D.C. battery supply. The battery should SMF type.
The battery should be self-charging and shall be capable of keeping the
system running for minimum 12 hours.
34.15 The main control panel shall be fabricated from 16 SWG M.S. shade it
should be suitable for wall mounting. The main panel shall be of
minimum 12 zones All components should be so designed/chosen that
the reliability of control panel shall not be affected due to deterioration
resulting from variation in temperature, humidity and over the years.
The panels shall be completely dust and vermin proof. All manual
control should be robust design / controls should be clearly labeled to

clearly indicate mode of operation and their functions.
34.16 The control panel shall be complete with interconnections, interlocking

wiring lamp/Alarm/Test push button, circuit labels comprising of the
white engraved letter on black PVC sheet printed circuit diagrams fixed
on the inner covers of the panels.
35.0 OPERATIONS :
The following standardized control units shall be available.
a) Switch unit for fully or semi - automatic switch ON / OFF of

individual zones of Complete zone units.
b) Relay units for controlling foul air extraction system fans etc.
35.1 All the main switching circuit for control units must be supervised and
any fault must Automatically release an acoustical and visual signal.
35.2 The acoustical alarm shall have two stages alarm facility where by only
an "alert alarm" is initiated automatically by the operation of a smoke
detector , followed by an "evacuation alarm" to be operated manually
from the main control room , should the need arise.
35.3 The "alert alarm" shall be interrupted acoustical signal, where as the "
evacuation alarm" shall be continuous. The alarm should be silenced be
only by the manual operation of a push button provided on the main
control panel.
35.4 An indicating light with inter-changing labeling must be provided to

identify each detector zone.
35.5 Remote signaling in various places must be possible. Each detector zone
must be connectable Disconnect able individually.
35.6 Switches & lamps must be easily identified even in closed. An " alarm off
" switch is particularly important . on " alarm off " position all acoustical
alarm signals are to stop while visual Signals are to maintain the alarm
indication. The alarm indictor lamp in particular must stay on.
35.7 A test switch must permit the checking of any signal detector without
tripping audible alarm Test alarm must automatically stop after some
time - say 15-20 sec s continuous functioning of push button, alarm
zones or certain vital detector zones must be ensured during test or in
"Alarm off " position.
36.0 BREAK GLASS TYPE - MANUAL CALL POINTS.
Each floor will have at least two manual call point. The call points shall
from integral part of the fire detection system, manual call points shall
be wall -mounted type. the housing Should be Mild steel / Thermo
plastic and should be dust proof . Once the glass is broken alarm
should sound on the floor as well as on the main control panel and
visible indication its operation. Provision for inserting a hand set for
direct communication to main panel shall be made near the manual call
point, within the tendered rate.
37.0 ELECTRONIC HOOTERS :
Depending on the floor area its layout external audible alarm devices
shall be provided with a pair of devices in parallel. The circuit feeding
power from zonal panel to these alarm devices in parallel. The circuit
feeding power from zonal panel to these alarm devices shall be a ring
circuit . If ring circuit is not provided then design provision to give fault
signal on zonal panel in the events of short circuit or disconnection of
power to sounders shall be made.
38.0 CABLES:
38.1 The PVC insulted cables shall be in accordance with IS 1554 part I The
cable conductor shall be of stranded copper .
38.2 The cable shall be laid as per standard with spaces, saddles, screw,
fabricated supported etc . The cables shall be cleared at regular interval
of 1.0 meter.
38.3 The cable shall be terminated with "SIEMENS" type compression glands.
38.4 All end terminations shall be provided with crimping type copper lugs.
38.5 The interconnections between the main control panel, floor control
panel and fire detector shall be carried out by means of 660 / 1100V
grade, heavy duty, twin or multi core PVC armored control cables with
copper conductor or by means of copper wire drawn in suitably sized
concealed conduits.
39.0 POWER SUPPLY
a) The fire detection system will normally be fed with power from a
constant voltage, ripple free pure D. C. stabilized power supply unit
operating on 230 V, 50 cycles A.C. mains.
b) In the events of mains failure the system shall automatically switch over
to battery supply of the required operating voltage. The battery shall be
SMF type and shall be capable of keeping the system running for a
minimum of 3 hours.
40.0 WIRING SYSTEM
40.1 All the cable shall be FRLS & ISI approved. Normally 2c x 1.5 Sq.mm
copper armored cable per detector zone should be sufficient. The wires
required a greater section even when used with the maximum length
and maximum number of detector / per zone.
41.0 SIGNAL PANEL :
41.1.0 The control units must be enclosed in a dust casting and protected
against handling by Unauthorized persons. Surface as well as flush
mounting must be possible.
41.1.1 Standard voltage of 240 V A.C. should be considered. An emergency

power supply must be provided to keep the system energized at least for
12 hours.
41.1.2 After at least 4 hours of emergency power supply, a 15 minutes alarm

with all important signaling devices must still be guaranteed.
41.1.3 The emergency power batteries must be constantly maintained at full

capacity and automatically recharged. An audiovisual alarm should be
provided on the main panel for semi-discharged condition.
41.1.4 The signal panel should be designed to take up individual standard

units so that it can easily be enlarged as the system demands. Simple
screw or plug connection are not to be done.
41.1.5 The following provisions shall be included in the local / main console
panel.
a) Smoke dampers of the respective affected floor shall open

automatically when the local panel is actuated
b) Smoke exhaust fans shall be simultaneously started the main

panel when any one of the local is panel actuated.
c) The local control panel shall trip off the air - handling unit of the
affected floors. The main air conditioning plant shall be shut
down by the panel it the same has not been switch off within a
period of about 5 minutes from time of sounding emergency in
any of the zones.
42.0 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:
42.1.1 The extinguishers shall be provided on each floor for extinguishing fire
resulting from Electrical System & any other than Electrical system.
42.1.2 The different type of extinguisher shall be properly distinguished with the
help of labels.
42.1.3 CO2 Gas type extinguisher shall be used for fighting fire in Electrical
rooms such as main & floor Distribution panel, A.H.U room etc.
Extinguisher shall confirm to IS 2878.
42.1.4 Light water type extinguisher shall be used for fighting class B fire
involving in flammable liquids In are as Kitchen, Cafeteria etc.
42.1.5 The extinguishers shall be located ideally to approach them and for
indicate use event of fire.
42.1.6 The extinguishers to be installed in various areas mentioned shall have

proper mounting arrangements to suite Architectural aesthetic
requirements.
43.0 Temperature Heat Detector
Heat detectors will be of the fixed temperature type or rate of rise of

temperature with fixed temperature element type.
Fixed temperature Type: This detector will be capable of responding

when the temperature of the surrounding due to a fire exceeds the
preset temperature of the detector.
The temperature setting, classification with respect to temperature of

operation (by means of appropriate colour code) and the design and
constructional features of the detector will be in accordance with IS-
2175, BS-5445 Part 5 or 8 (European Standard EN54-5 or 8) or ANSI-
UL.521 as applicable.
Rate of Rise of temperature with fixed temperature Element type: The

rate of rise of temperature element of this detector will be capable of
responding when the rate of rise temperature at the detector exceeds a
predetermined value within a given time regardless of the actual
temperature. The detector will also be provided with a fixed temperature
element which will respond when the temperature exceeds the preset
value.
These detectors will be supplied with grades appropriate to the response

time with respect to rate of rise of temperature settings of the rate rise of
temperature element and temperature of operation of the fixed
temperature element for particular application. The installed spacing
and mounting height will be based on the rate or rise of temperature
element of the detector.
All such detectors will be marked with their normal sensitivity, listed
spacing and response grade (or colour coded) as per relevant
standards.
The sensitivity, setting, response grade, listed spacing, the design and
construction of the detector will be in accordance with IS-2175, BS-5445
Part 5 or 8 (European Standard EN54-5 or 8) or ANSI-UL.521 as
applicable.
44.0 Ionization Smoke Detector:
This detector will be capable of detecting a fire both in its incipient or

smoldering stages as well as visible flames. To meet this requirement the
detector will respond to visible combustion products in the form of
smoke as well as invisible particles, aerosols and pyroslysis products
from a clear burning fire.
The sensitivity / response threshold value, the design and construction of

the detector will be in accordance with IS-11360, BS-5445 Part 7
(European Standard EN54-7) or ANSI-UL.268 as applicable. The
detectors will be marked with their normal sensitivity, sensitivity range
listed spacing, radiation level or radio active component etc., as per
relevant standards.
Radio active material used in ionisation smoke detector will be such as

not to have any harmful effect on the personnel in the area where
installed even if the area is continuously inhabited. The radiation will be
in the range 0.5 micro curie to 0.9 micro curie.
45.0 Photoelectric Smoke Detector
This detector working on the light scattering principle will be capable of

detecting visible smoke from smouldering fires long before the fire
breaks out into visible flame.
The normal sensitivity / reponse threshold value, the design and

construction of the detector will be in accordance with IS-11360, BS-
5445 Part 7 (European standard EN54-7) or ANSI-UL.268 as
applicable. Smoke detectors will be marked with their normal sensitivity
and tolerance limits and listed spacing as per relevant standards.
46.0 Water flow detector
Vane-type water flow detectors shall be installed on system piping as

designated on the drawing and/or as specified herein. Detectors shall
mount on any clear pipe span of the appropriate nominal size, either a
vertical up flow or horizontal run, at least 6" from any fittings that may
change water direction, flow rate, or pipe diameter or no closer than
24" from a valve or drain. Detectors shall have a sensitivity in the range
of 4 to 10 gallons per minute and a static pressure rating of 450 psi* for
2" - 8" pipes. The detector shall respond to water flow in the specified
direction after a preset time delay that is field adjustable. The delay
mechanism shall be a sealed mechanical pneumatic unit with visual
indication of actuation. The actuation mechanism shall include a
polyethylene vane inserted through a hole in the pipe and connected by
a mechanical linkage to the delay mechanism. Outputs shall consist of
dual
SPDT switches (Form C contacts). Two conduit entrances for standard

fittings of commonly used electrical conduit shall be provided on the
detectors.
47.0 FIRE BUCKETS
The Fire Buckets shall be as per the relevant Indian Standard.
Size of the Fire Bucket shall be minimum nine ( 9 ) litres.

The Fire Buckets shall be supplied empty.
The material of construction shall be Galvanised Iron.
The Fire Buckets shall be provided with anti corrosive treatment.
The bottom of the buckets shall be hemispherical.
The Fire Buckets shall be provided with handle for hanging at the top.
There shall be another handle at the side / botton of the bucket. The
handles shall help for holding while throwing the content.
The Fire Buckets shall be provided with anti corrosive treatment.

Painting, Outside of the Fire Bucket shall be painted with primer and
Fire Red Colour the word FIRE shall be written outside the bucket in bold
black letters.
The inside of the Fire Bucket shall be painted with primer and white.
48.0 Air Release Valves
Air Release Valves automatically exhaust these small amounts of air

which collect at system high points, while the system is flowing and
under pressure. This ensures the system will remain free of trapped air
pockets, thereby increasing the efficiency and decreasing the overall
operating cost of the system In operation, these valves are installed at
high points in the system where air would naturally tend to collect. Air
bubbles entering the valve will displace the liquid within the valve and
lower the liquid level. When the level drops to where it no longer buoys
the float, the float drops. This motion pulls the seat away from the
orifice, opening the valve and allows the air that has accumulated in the
upper portion of the valve to be exhausted to atmosphere. As the air is
exhausted, liquid re-enters the valve, once again buoying the float,
lifting it until the seat presses against the orifice, closing the valve. This
cycle automatically repeats as often as necessary to maintained air free
system.
LIST OF STANDARDS WITH LATEST AMENDMANT
1. Cable IS 1554 IS
2. Motors 325
3. Cast Iron Pipes IS 7181 / IS 1536 / 37 IS
4. M.S. Pipes Fittings 1239 / IS 3589

5. Cast Iron Fitting & Vales IS 1538 / BS 1641 / IS 780
IS 1239 IS 5290 IS 4927 /

6. M.S. Fittings 636 IS 903
7. Hydrant Valves IS 2878 / 2171 / 933 / 934
8. Hoses IS 2189
9. Branch Pipe/ Nozzles U.L./ F.M./ F.O.C./ D.I.N./

10. Portable Fine Extinguishers T.A.C./ IS 2175
11. Main Control Panel & Floor Panel U.L./ F.M./ F.O.C./
12. Detectors D.I.N./ T.A.C./ IS 2175
13. Sprinkler Head
SECTION 3 TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to select the pump/motor to
meet the requirements specified in the tender. Contractor is asked to fill
up all the data given below.
1. Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System.
Booster Pump
Horizontal Elec. Driven Diesel Driven
centrifugal Pumps Fire Pump Jockey Pump
(As per TAC) (As per TAC) (As per TAC) (Mono-block)
1.1.1 Makes
1.1.2 Model No.
1.1.3 Rated Discharge (LPM)

1.1.4 Rated Head (M)
1.1.5 Speed (RPM)
1.1.6 No. of Stages

1.1.7 Efficiency at rates Capacity & head
1.1.8 KW required at rated Capacity & head
1.1.9 KW required at 120% Rated discharge
1.1.10 Shut off head (M)
1.1.11 Material of Construction
a) Body
b) Impeller
c) Shaft
1.1.12 Whether pump is capable of discharging 150% of rated Capacity at a
head not less than 65% of rated head.
1.1.13 Lubrication
1.1.14 Anti-vibration pad
1.2 Pipes(MS)
1.2.1 Make
1.2.2 Standard/Class
1.2.3 Thickness
1.2.4 Painting details for above ground & exposed pipes
1.2.5 Wrapping & coating
1.2.6 IS: code
1.3 Fittings
Screwed Fittings Butt welded Fittings
(up to 50 mm dia) (65 mm dia & above.)
1.3.1 Type
1.3.2 Make
1.3.3 Material
1.3.4 Type of ends
1.3.5 Pressure rating
1.3.6 IS: code
1.4 Pipes(Stainless Steel
1.4.1 Make
1.4.2 Grade
1.4.3 Thickness (SCH)

1.4.4 Painting details for above ground & exposed pipes
1.4.5 IS: Code
1.5 Fittings Stainless Steel Fittings
1.5.1 Type
1.5.2 Make
1.5.3 Material
1.5.4 Type of ends
1.5.5 Pressure rating
1.5.6 IS: code
1.6 Valves
Butterfly Sluice(NRS) Ball
1.6.1 Make & Type
1.6.2 Type of ends
1.6.3 Material of construction
1.6.4 Test Pressure
1.6.5 Provided with all Accessories including gear system as per relevant IS
1.6.6 IS: code
1.6.7 Approval
1.7 Engine/Motors
Engine Main Pump Jockey Pump Booster pump
(TAC) (As per TAC) (As per TAC) (Mono-block)
1.7.1 Make
Type & Model No
1.7.2 Frame Size
1.7.3 Speed (RPM)
1.7.4 Rated Cap. (KW)
1.7.4 Efficiency (%)
1.8 Control Panel (MCC)
1.8.2 Manufacturer
1.8.3 Dimensions
1.8.4 Type of construction & mounting

1.8.5 Sheet Metal Enclosure
a) Material
b) Thickness
1.8.5 Electrical Rating
1.8.6 Make of starters/Contactors
1.8.7 Rating of Contactors
1.8.8 Size & material of Bus bar
1.8.9 Annunciation system

1.8.10 Approx. weight
1.8.11 Painting details
1.8.12 Whether all equipment/Components as per Specification included
1.9 Swing type check Valves
1.9.1 Make & Type

1.9.2 Type of ends
1.9.4 Test Pressure
1.9.5 IS : code/TAC approved
1.9.6 Approval Brass Ball Valve

1.10.1 Make & Type
1.10.2 Type of ends
1.10.3 Whether confirm to & marked IS:778
1.11 Hydrant Landing Valve
1.11.1 Make & Type

1.11.3 Details of Flange
O.D. (MM)
P.C.D (MM)
No. of Holes
1.11.4 IS: code/TAC approved
1.12 Hose Pipes C.P. Hose RRL (Type A)

1.12.1 Make
1.12.2 Test Pressure
1.12.3 Dia (MM)
1.12.4 Length (M)
1.12.5 Material of couplings
1.12.6 Where hose & Couplings ISI marked

1.13 Branch Pipes & Nozzles
1.13.1 Make
1.13.2 Material
1.13.3 Dia. of Coupling
1.13.4 Dia of Nozzle

1.13.5 Where ISI marked
1.14 Hose Cabinet External /Internal
1.14.1 Size
1.14.2 Material
1.14.3 Thickness of sheet

1.14.4 Thickness of glass
1.14.5 Whether Rubber Gasket Provided
1.14.6 Painting Details
1.15 First Aid Hose Reel
1.15.1 Make & Material

a) Drum
b) Hose
1.15.2 Size of Drum (Dia x length)
1.15.3 Size of Hose (Dia x length)
1.15.4 Hose test pressure

1.15.5 Size & material of Nozzle
1.15.6 Size & material of Shut off valve

1.15.7 Whether complete unit strictly confirms to and marked IS:884 TAC
approved
1.16 Pressure Switch
1.16.1 Make & Type
1.16.2 Type of ends
1.16.3 Test Pressure

1.16.6 Whether complete with gland or other accessories
1.17 Pressure Gauge
1.17.1 Make & Type

1.17.2 Dial size (mm)
1.17.3 Range (kg/cm.sq.)
1.18 Water Flow Detector

1.18.1 Make & Type
1.18.2 Pressure Rating
1.18.4 FM Approved
2.1 Sprinkler Head Pendant
2.1.1 Make
2.1.2 Material
2.1.3 Type of sensing Element & temperature Rating (C)
2.1.4 Orifice size (MM)
2.1.5 Type (UPRIGHT / PENDENT / CONVENTIONAL / SIDEWALL /

EXTENDED RANGE)
2.1.6 FM or UL Approved
2.2 Alarm check Valve
2.2.1 Make
2.2.2 Material
2.2.3 Size (MM)
2.2.4 Whether provided with electric bell, test valve, drain valve, & all other
training connections
2.2.5 Whether approved hydraulic alarm motor & gong provided
2.2.6 FM or UL Approved
28.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0 Supplying and installing, testing, perfect aligning and proper leveling
and commissioning of fire service main pump, multistage, of 1620 LPM
(Litres/min.) at 70m head centrifugal type, 50 HP, 37.5 kW as per
specification No. FF-MFP/MSC
&
2.0 Supply & installation, testing & commissioning of Fire Jockey pump, of
180 LPM at 70 M head, 3 ph, 440 A.C. 10 HP (7.5 kw), Suction/delivery
sizes 50/32mm as per specification no. FF-MEP/JP
&
3.0 Supplying and erecting testing, perfect aligning and proper leveling and
commissioning of horizontal centrifugal back pull out pump rated 1620
LPM (Litres/min) at 70 m head coupled to a diesel Engine of 1800 rpm,
55 BHP with diesel storage tank, exhaust chimney, battery backup with
standby provision & accessories such as standard coupling guard,
common base plate and foundation bolts, anti vibration pads and
control cables:
Supplying, installing, testing, perfect aligning, proper levelling and

commissioning of Fire service main/jockey/booster pump single/multi
stage having specified discharge and head with required HP or similar
to with minimum parameters, confirming to IS: 12469 with specified size
of suction and delivery pipes, coupled with squirrel cage A.C. induction
motor. The pump set shall be erected in alignment on cement concrete
foundation. The Main Fire pumps should be able to deliver minimum
operating pressure of 3.5 kg/cm2 at highest and farthest hydrant.
Material: Pump Body:
The centrifugal pumps shall be manufactured and tested and marked in

accordance with IS 12469. The pump shall be capable of developing
not less than 150% of rated capacity at head of not less than 65% of
rated head.
The pump casing shall be of heavy section close grained cast iron and
designed to withstand 1.5 times the working pressure. The casing shall
be provided with shaft seal arrangement as well as flanges for suction
and delivery pipe connections as required. Parts of pumps like impeller,
shaft sleeve, wear ring etc shall be non corrosive metal. Pump have
continuous rising head capacity characteristic from the specified duty
point towards the shut off point, the maximum being shut off. The horse
power characteristic shall preferably non overloading type beyond the
rated capacity point.
Impeller:
The impeller shall be bronze. This shall be shrouded type with machined
collars. Wear rings, where fitted to the impeller, shall be of the same
material as the impeller. The impeller surface shall be smooth finished
for minimum frictional loss. The impeller shall be secured to the shaft by
a key.
Shaft:
The shaft shall be of stainless steel EN-8/ C - 40 and shall be accurately
machined. The shaft shall be balanced to avoid vibration at any speed
within the operating range of the pump.
Bearing:
The bearing shall be of stainless steel and of ball or roller type suitable
for duty involved. These shall be grease lubricated and shall be
provided with grease nipples /cups. The bearings shall be effectively
sealed against leakage of lubricant or entry of dust or water.
Shaft seal:
The shaft seal shall be mechanical type so as to allow minimum
leakage. A drip well shall be provided beneath the seal.
Item Material of construction
1) Casing CI FG260, IS210
2) Impeller Bronze Gr2

Item Material of construction
3) Shaft sleeve Bronze Gr2 IS318
4) Wearing Ring Bronze Gr2 IS318
5) Shaft SS AISI 410
6) Stuffing box CIFG 260 IS210
7) Lantern ring Bronze Gr1 IS318
8) Gland CIFG 260 IS210
Motor:
Suitable HP squirrel cage induction motor, TEFC (totally enclosed fan

cooled) synchronous speed 2900 RPM, suitable for operation on 415
volts, 3 phase 50 Hz. AC with IP 55 protection for enclosure, horizontal
foot mounted type with Class-'F' insulation, conforming to IS-325. The
motor shall be given tropical & fungicidal treatment for successful
operation of motor in hot, humid and tropical environment.
Body: Cast iron
Rotor Shaft: Stainless steel
Bearing: Refer specification for bearing under Pump above.
Winding: Class 'F' insulated copper winding.
Base plate: Fabricated from Mild Steel, foundation bolts etc.
Cement Concrete Foundation: Cement, Sand, and Water, in 1:2:4 ratio.
Anti Vibrating Pads: Made from high quality rubber of specified grade
and strength. Hardware: Mild Steel
The surface of the pump foundation should be chipped with pneumatic
hammer or sharp pointed chisel. The teak wood box of appropriate size
shall be placed and filled with cement concrete in 1:2:4 ratio with 20 to
25 mm stone metal and required size and strength of foundation nut &
bolts. The necessary curing & finishing shall be done in approved
manner. The M.S. fabricated base plate of suitable size & strength
should be fixed with anti-vibration rubber pads. Proper leveling and
alignment shall be observed before tightening of foundation bolts. Both
the pump and motor shall be placed on common base plate frame with
perfect alignment, proper leveling. The pump should be connected to
pipe line with M.S. flanges, gaskets, nut bolt etc and shall be checked
for the leakages. The coupling guard shall be provided with nut bolts of
required size. The pump shall be tested for 3.5 kg/cm2 pressure at
highest and farthest point of the building for minimum 2 hours. The
necessary test certificate from manufacturer of pump and motor shall be
produced. The motor should have efficiency more than 90% and power
factor above 0.80.
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
Fire Fighting pump (Multi Stage Centrifugal)
Suction
Capacity in Discharge in Head in
Speed in RPM /Delivery Size
HP LPM metre
in mm
30 1450 1400 56 80/65
50 1450 1800 76 100/80
75 1450 2400 88 125/100
75 1450 2800 76 125/100
120 1450 2800 105 150/125
Table No. 13.1/3

Jockey Pump (Centrifugal type)
Suction
HP LPM metre
in mm
15 2900 240 56 50/32
20 2900 240 105 50/32
Table No. 13.1/4

Booster Pump (Centrifugal type)
Suction
HP LPM metre
in mm
7.5 2900 450 35 50/32
10 2900 468 40 50/32
4.0 Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of giving a discharge of 171

M3/Hr of water at a pressure of 70 mtr. complete with 85 HP automatic
diesel engine driven pump set with suitable speed, having the residential
silencer system and other accessories like fuel tank, necessary cooling
system, foot valve, day oil storage tank as per detailed specification
SR.
TECHNICAL SPECS ENG DRVN
NO.
1 Quantity 1 No
2 Liquid Water
3 Temperature Ambient
4 Sp. Gravity 1
5 Viscosity -
6 Rated cap. in lpm / m3/hr 2850 / 171
7 Total Head in 'm' 70
8 Pump Type (KBL) CE 80/40
9 RPM 1800
10 Rec. Eng / Motor (KW/HP) 85 BHP
11 Material of Construction 20
Cummins/ KOEL/
Caterpillar/Ruston
12 Engine Details Horns bey
B Enclosure Radiator Cooled
C Speed in RPM 1800
D Rated Voltage / Frequency 12 Volt Electric Start
E Frame Size / Appl. Code
F Silencer Industrial
The diesel engine shall be capable of 20% in excess of maximum HP

required to drive the pump set @ it's duty point or BHP required to drive
the pump set at 150% of it's rated discharge.
5.0 MCC for Fire Pumps :Design, manufacture, supply ,installation, testing
and commissioning of following MCC panels suitable for 415V, 3
phase, 4 wire, 50 hz power distribution system. the panel should be
indoor, free standing, floor mounting, sheet metal clad, Cubicle, dead
front, dust and vermin proof confirming to IP-55 enclosure,

compartmentalized design fabricated out of 14 SWG sheet steel
complete with Al bus bars, separate earth bus bar to be provided
through out the length of the panel. The incoming and outgoing feeders
shall be accommodated in a modular multitier arrangement, adequate
size cable alley, painting, earthling numbering, damper plate etc. as
required as per specifications and drawings. The panel shall withstand a
fault level of 25 KA as per Single Line Diagram.(Cost of PLC and related
wiring for switching on and switching off the pumps as per the
requirement) The LT panel incorporating incomer and outgoing feeder
as details below.
The scope of work is thus to design M.S. sheet cubical type panel board
to incorporate all the accessories mentioned above. Providing all
material M.S. sheet, M.S. angle, channels etc. and fabricating the panel,
providing and erecting all the accessories mentioned above in panel
board, transporting the same, loading unloading and erection at site of
work and testing and commissioning the same.
The design of panel board shall be prepared by the contractor as per

standard installation practice. The contractor shall consult with Engineer
and as per the instructions, suggestions the design shall be prepared.
Adequate space to facilitate working for removing cable connection,
replacement of accessories etc. shall be kept while designing.
Accordingly the complete drawing of dimensional details of cubical box,
inside partitions, erection of accessories, bus bar erections, power
wiring, control wiring shall be prepared by the contractor and got
approved from Engineer before commencement of fabrication work.
Fabrication of panel shall be done in 14 gauge CRCA sheet with

necessary cutting, bonding, welding, drilling etc. The compartments
viewing from front side shall be kept separately for switch fuse unit,
change over switches. ACB's and compartment for housing measuring
instrument shall generally be kept separate however the same may be

permitted to install in the compartments of respective switch gear where
the measurements are to be taken.
However the Engineer's decision in this matter will be final. Doors with
self- locking arrangement for such individual compartments.
Inside partitions for isolating the compartments shall be fabricated out

of CRCA sheets and Bakelite sheet shall be provided for isolating
electrical contacts. Continuous Bakelite insulating sheets shall be
provided with nuts, bolts for the entire length of bus bars to separate the
three phases from each other and from neutral.
Necessary angle irons, channel irons, M.S. flats of required size and
lengths shall be provided and erected inside / outside panel board for
strengthening, fixing accessories, bus bar supports etc. The scope also
includes cutting required size and numbers of opening at bottom for
cable entries. The foundation channel M.S. of adequate size and length
shall be provided and erected for installation of the panel board
necessary cement concrete work, if required along with plastering with
cement plaster shall be provided for mounting the panel board. The
details of foundation shall be got approved from the Engineer along
with relative drawings. etc. The panel board shall consist of following
switchgears.
A Incomer Feeder
1) 250A MCB 1 NO
2) Control Fuse with 4 A Fuse Link
3) NOS 3 Phase indicating Lamp R.Y.B.LED Type 3 NOS
4) 0-.500 Volt meter S.Switch Digital 1 SET
5) 0-.300A Ameter with CTS Switch Digital 1 SET
6) TPN Aluminum Busbar full Length 300A or required length.
(B) Out Going Feeder for 2x75HP S/D Main Hydrant-Sprinkler for
Each Feeder
1) 160A TPN Switch Fuse Unit 1 NO
2) 70A TP Power contactors 3 NOS

3) ON-OFF & Trip Srion on indicating Lamp 4 NOS
4) Start / Stop Push Button 1 NO
5) E-Stop Push Batton for Siron 1 NO 6 Auto Manual Switch 1 NO
6) Over Load Relay 6-110A 1 NO
7) Timer 0-60 sec start Delta 1 NO
C) Out Going Feeder for1x12.5/20 HP For Booster Pump / Jockey Pump
1. 40 A TP MCB 1 NO
2. 25 A TP Power contactor 1 NO
3. ON/OFF indicating Lamp 2 NOS
4. Start / Stop Push Button 2 NOS
5. Auto Manual Switch 1 NO
6. Over Load Relay 14-23A 1 NO
D) OutGoingfor12VDieselEngineControlPanel
1. IndicatingLamp6NOS
2. DCAmeter/Voltmeter1+1NO
3. FusebaseWithLink7NOS
4. PushButton4NOS
5. Switches6AAuto/Manual/Boost/Trikal4NOS
6. Transformer12V/14VACA/E1 NO
7. PlaRelay12.3C-107NOS
8. EngineControlRelay1NO 9.Battery Charges Unit 1 NO
Powder coating shall be provided from inside and outside of panel

board, rubber gaskets for panel doors, busbar extension opening shall
be provided to ensure proper safety. All the switchgears, SFU, ACBS's,
MCCB , MCB shall be suitably mounted for operation on front side of
panel. Arrangement shall be made in such away that when the
switchgear is ON, the panel door couldn't be opened. All the measuring
instruments, indicating lamps shall be erected flush mounted. The
identification numbering for the switchgear, measuring instruments and
indicating lamps etc. shall be made with respect to the transformers,

pumps, capacitors, auxiliary feeders etc.
6.0 Supplying & Erecting PVC armored cable 1100 V 3-1/2 core 300
sq.mm aluminum conductor with continuous 12.97 sq.mm (8 SWG) G.I
earth wire complete erected with glands & lugs on wall/ tresses/ poles
or laid in provided trench/pipe as per specification No CB-LT/AL
&
7.0 Supplying & erecting PVC armored cable 3 1/2 core 70 sq mm
aluminum conductor with continuous 8.35 sq mm (10 SWG) G.I. earth
wire complete erected with glands & lugs, on wall/ trusses/pole or laid
in provided trench/ pipe as per specification no. CB-LT/AL
&
8.0 Supplying & Erecting PVC armored cable 4 core 10 sq.mm aluminum
conductor with continuous 5.48 sq.mm (12 SWG) G.I earth wire
complete erected with glands & lugs on wall/tresses/poles or laid in
provided trench/pipe as per specification No CB-LT/AL
&
9.0 Supplying & Erecting PVC armoured cable 8 core 1.5 sq.mm FRLS
copper complete erected on wall/ceiling as per specification No CB-
LT/Cu
1. General
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall
carry ISI mark. If any particular category of material for which ISI mark
is not available in market, it shall be as included in approved list. Work
shall be carried out as per the method of construction specified by BIS. If
there is no reference for particular method of construction in IS, such
work shall be carried out as per the approved method of construction
specified in chapter 16 of P.W. Dept. Handbook. Material and Work not
qualifying to any provision mentioned above shall be to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
The following list records those Indian Standards in force, which are
acceptable as good practice, and accepted standards. SP 30: 1984 :
National Electrical Code SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 : National Building Code
IS 1255: 1983 Code of practice of Installation & Maintenance of

armoured cables up to 33 kV. IS 3961: Part 2: 1967 : Recommended
current ratings of PVC cables.
IS 1554: Part 1; 1988 : PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables;
Part 1 for working voltages up to and including 1100 Volts.
IS 1554: Part 2; 1988 : PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables;
Part 1for working voltages up to and including 3.3 kV to 11kV.
IS 10810: Part 63; 1993 : Method for Test of cables, Part 63 Smoke
density of electric cables under fire condition.
Specification No. (CB-LT/AL, CB-LT/CU, CB-HT) Providing armoured

cable of specified voltage level, size & specified conducting material
(Aluminum / Copper) including required material, hardware's for
erection and erecting on wall, ceiling, RCC slab or drawing the same
through pole, pipe, laying in provided conduit, trench, ducts, trays as
per approved method of construction including glands, lugs, etc.
4. Material:
Cables:
Cables shall be PVC for LT/MP and XLPE for HT as per Table no. 7/3
and of required construction, colour, shall carry ISI mark, IS No,
manufacturer's name, size, duly embossed / screen printed at every
metre and having the total count of progressive length in meter at each
mark.
Earth wire: Galvanized Iron (G I) wire of appropriate gauge as per

Table No 7/1. Glands: As per specification (CB-GL).
Specification Nos (CB-GL)
Termination of cable ends with cable glands for preparing and fixing the
cable leads for connection. Cable glands shall be of Flange type.
Material:
Cable glands: Flange type heavy duty. Made of high purity brass metal,
with brass washers, rubber rings, threaded stud with washers and nuts.
Method of Construction
Before erection of gland, the cable end shall be prepared by removing

the outer PVC insulation up to the point where gland to be fixed, by
assessing the length of leads required. Bottom portion of gland shall be
inserted over the steel armouring, and then armour strips shall be bent
for the length of collar of gland, remaining length of armoring shall be
cut. The cable end shall then be, inserted through the entry of plate
where the cable is to be terminated. The top portion of gland with
washer shall be then inserted in such a manner that the bent armour
strip should be touching the surface of the entry. The nuts shall be
tightened with spring washers over the projected stud portion. Fixing of
gland shall be at right angle to the gland plate. Tightening shall assure
continuity of earth. Hole to the gland plate shall be punched / knocked
out, of correct diameter with respect to gland size.
Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (i.e. each). Street
Light Boxes & Cable Indicators A) Cable Indicator Plate (CIP)
Scope:
Specification No (CB-CIP)
Providing and fixing of cable indicator plate along the route of under
ground cable.
Material:
Cable indicator plate: Circular plate made of cast iron having 100 mm
dia. and 6 mm thick.
Iron rod for fixing of cable indicator plate: 700 mm long galvanized
iron rod of 12 mm dia., and 150 mm long cross bar welded at bottom
or hook to be made with same continuous bar.
Cable indicator plate fixed/welded to the 700 mm long iron rod or

angle, with 150 mm cross bars welded at bottom as fasteners or bent in
'J' shape to hook the cable in the bent portion, shall be buried along the
route of cable in the trench made for laying the cable. For clear visibility,
the Cable indicator plate shall be buried in such a manner that the plate
should be minimum 200 mm above the ground level and shall be
provided at every 15-25 metre in straight run, at both ends of road
crossing and immediate before and after turning point of cable.
Mode of Measurement: Specification Nos (CB-CL/AL)
Crimping of lugs, and fixing to the terminals with nuts and bolts, etc.
Material: Lug: Lug shall be of high purity aluminum / copper /

bimetallic of required type, with required size of hole and smooth
finished both from inside and outside.
Hardware: Brass or Cadmium plated mild steel nuts and bolts,

bimetallic washers. Anti-Oxide paste: Paste of superior quality
manufactured by reputed manufacturer.
Before fixing of lugs to the cable end, the cable end to the equivalent
length of the lug shall be prepared by removing the outer PVC insulation
along with the steel armouring and then, the inner PVC insulation. The
paste shall be applied to the cable lead and inside the lug prior to the
inserting of lug on the cable lead. The lug shall then be crimped with
hydraulic / mechanical type heavy duty crimping tool. The crimping
shall be done in such a manner that there shall be no air gap. Then the
crimped portion shall be wrapped with the PVC insulation tape. (Colour
of tape shall be of that of cable lead) The above method shall be carried
out for all the cores. The cable end with lug shall then be terminated
into the terminal and then be tightened with either brass nuts or
Cadmium plated nuts as directed by Engineer.
Saddles: Saddles fabricated from GI sheet of required gauge and size

depending on dia of cable either galvanized or painted with superior
quality enamel black paint with necessary shearing mechanical strength,
semi circular shaped with extended piece having suitable holes for
fixing.
G I Strip: 22 g x 25 mm width G I Strip.
Clamps: MS Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, having

the size of 3/6 mm thick mild steel having 25/50 mm width (as per size
of cable), rounded ends with wooden / resin cast grip for holding the
cable.
Identification tags: For identifying root, connection position GI strip with

identification mark / name embossed / painted with arrangement to tie
should be fix on cable or arrangement of ferrules to be done.
Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs / wooden

gutties, etc.
Method of Construction: General:
a) Irrespective of method of construction the cable ends shall be terminated

with appropriate size & type of glands with lugs duly crimped, as
directed by Site engineer.

mentioned in Table No 7/2. Grouping of cables shall be done with
adequate distance between cables as mentioned in IS so as to minimize
de-rating. Cables shall be tagged/ferruled with identification name /
mark at the point from where distribution starts and at ends. Bare
earthwire of appropriate size as per Table no. 7/1 shall run along with
the cable. Earth wire running with the cable shall be terminated at the
earth terminal nearest to cable termination.
Erection of Cable on Surface:
Erection shall be done as per the routes and layout finalized, in perfect
level and in plumb. Before fixing the cable shall be straightened as far
as possible for good aesthetics look, continuous bare GI earth wire of
required gauge as per Table No 7/1 shall be run. Cable with G I wire
shall be fixed by saddles firmly clipped on cable and shall be fixed to
wall with minimum 50 x 8 mm SM screws with plugs/wooden gutties,
etc. (Distance between two supports / saddles shall be maximum 450
mm). Wooden gutties shall be used wherever required (Especially for
stone wall). The entries made in wall, floor slab, etc for laying the cable
Erection of Cable on Trusses:

Cable along with bare GI earth wire, while erecting on trusses, shall be
firmly clamped by wrapping GI strip of 22 g, 25 mm width of required
length fixed to truss with nuts and bolts.
Erection of Cable on Pole:

Cable along with bare GI earth wire, while erecting on pole, shall be
firmly clipped by suitable wooden / epoxy resin cast grips, clamped with
25 x 3 mm or50x6 mm MS strip of required length and fixed to pole
with nuts and bolts.
Laying of Cable in provided Trench/Pole:
While laying Cable along with bare GI earth wire, utmost care shall be
taken to prevent damage to the insulation of the cable and to the open
end. Cable shall be brought out from trench vertically straight (minimum
1.0 metre above G L). Care shall be taken to inspect the trench so that
depth of cable shall not be less than as shown in Table No 7/4. Suitable
size of cable loops shall be provided near termination point at adequate
depth.
Erecting cable in constructed Trench / duct:
Erection of cable/s in constructed trench / duct, shall be as per guide
lines of IS 1255.
Erection of cable/s on trays:
Cable/s shall be tied with PVC tags on GI trays. At bending point care
shall be taken so that sharp edges of sheet will not damage insulation of
cable.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on the
basis of running meter basis.
10.0 Supplying and Installing Air Vessel of 300 mm dia. 1.5M height M.S
tank installed at terrace as per specification No - FF-FFA/ACT
Specification No (FF-FFA/ACT)
Scope:
Supplying and installing Air Vessel of 300mm Φ 1.5 mtr. In height M.S.
Tank fabricated from M.S. black ERW pipe, conforming to I.S.3589,
having 6mm thickness, dish end at both ends, duly welded with 300mm
Φ pipe, having inlet of 50 mm Φ , duly fitted with 50mm Φ sluice valve
and 20/25mm Φ drain with G.M. gate valve, to be installed inside

pump house along with provided M.S. angle tripod.
Material:
Air Vessel: MS ERW pipe confirming to IS: 3589
Tripod: MS angle of size 75 x 75 x 5mm
300mm dia. 1.5 metre height air vessel, Gate Valve, flanges, MS angle
Tripod including necessary labour, material and use of required tools
and plants.
11.0 Supplying and Installing G.I pipes Under Ground of C class ERW of size
150 mm dia with necessary fittings as per specification No.FF-PP
including excavation & anticorrosive protection
&
100 mm dia with necessary fittings as per specification No.FF- PP
Scope:
Supplying erecting C class (Heavy Duty) galvanized iron pipe, ISI mark
of specified diameter with screwed sockets, Joints & necessary G.I.
fittings such as sockets, check nuts, elbows, bends, tees, reducers,
enlarger, plugs, etc. including electric resistance welding (ERW), fixing
with clamps & all connected works such as excavation, drilling holes in
wall, slabs, backfilling & making good the damages.
Material:
The galvanized iron pipes shall be of type and diameter as specified
and shall comply with I.S. 1239--1973 and 1969 for the specified type.
The specified diameter of the pipes shall refer to the inside diameter of
the bore pipes. The fittings of which the galvanizing has been damaged
shall not be used. For the firefighting works, the C Class pipes and
accessories shall be used.
Pressure Testing:
All piping shall be tested to hydrostatic test pressure of at least one and
a half times the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 10
kg/cm2 for a period not less than 24 hours. All leaks and defects in
joints revealed during the testing shall be rectified to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. Piping repaired subsequent to the above pressure test
shall be re-tested in the same manner. System may be tested in sections
and such sections shall be securely capped. Pressure gauges may be
capped off during pressure testing of the installation.
Galvanized iron pipes of specified diameter and type and galvanized
iron fittings with ERW shall be erected on MS angle support with one
coat of red oxide primer and two coats of Post Office fire red enamel
paint duly tested to 1.5 times of working pressure. Excavating and back
filling trenches including dewatering, cutting through walls, floor, etc.,
and making site good.
Laying, jointing, and fixing the pipe with the fittings including cutting
pipes, wastage and threading the ends. At all the road crossings the
pipes shall be laid lower than the crust of the road. During excavation if,
any other service pipes (Water, electric, telephone, etc) come across,
these shall be carefully protected and supported. Any damages done
shall be made good. The pipe shall be laid on a well compacted bed in
the trench. The trench after laying the pipe shall be refilled except at the
joints in layers and manually rammed. Care shall be taken to see that
no earth, etc., gets inside the pipes. The filling shall be kept raised by
about 5 cm. for subsequent settlement. Bedding and cushioning of
murum, good earth, or sand shall be provided for the pipe in case of
trench through rock. The trench at the joints shall be filled similarly after
satisfactory testing of the pipe. Any surplus excavated stuff shall be

disposed of satisfactorily without causing nuisance.
Measurement shall be for one metre of each type and diameter of pipe
laid complete with fittings, clamps etc., as specified. The lengths shall be
measured net on the straight and bends along the center line of the
pipes and fittings correct up to a cm.
13.0 Providing coating of Bitumen Paint & 4mm thick Wrapping as per IS
10221 for underground 150 mm Ring Main of Fire Fighting System.
&
14.0 Providing coating of Bitumen Paint & 4mm thick Wrapping as per IS
10221 for underground 100 mm Ring Main of Fire Fighting System.
Anti-Corrosive Protection On Under Ground Pipe: Corrosion protection
tape shall be wrapped on M.S. Pipes to be buried in ground. This
corrosion protection tape shall comprise of coat tar/asphalt component
supported on fabric of organic or inorganic fiber and minimum 4 mm.
thick and conform to requirement of IS: 10221-Code of practice for
coating and wrapping of under ground mild steel pipe line. Before
application of corrosion protection tape all foreign matter on pipe shall
be removed with the help of wire brush and suitable primer shall be
applied over the pipe thereafter. The primer shall be allowed to dry until
the solvent evaporates and the surface becomes tacky. Both primer and
tape shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. Corrosion protection
tape shall then be wound around the pipe in spiral fashion and
bounded completely to the pipe. There shall be no air pocket or bubble
beneath the tape. The overlaps shall be 15 mm. and 250 mm. shall be
left uncoated on either end of pipe to permit installation and welding.
This area shall be coated and wrapped after the pipeline is installed.
The tapes shall be wrapped in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. If application is done in cold weather, the surface of
the pipe shall be pre- heated until it is worm to touch and traces of
moisture are removed and then primer shall be applied and allowed to
dry.
No joint shall be located in the thickness of the walls. If the pipe is
required to be cut and the end threaded, the burns of the cut end shall
be filled smooth and any obstruction in the bore shall be entirely
eliminated. The rate includes wastage in cutting etc. When the pipe is to
be fixed to walls it shall be fixed with standard bracket, clips or holder
bates keeping the pipe about 12mm clear of the wall. The pipe shall be
fixed to the wall horizontally and vertically and parallel to one another
when more than one pipe is laid unless unavoidable. The supporting
clips,etc., for the pipe shall be spaced at about two meters or so as
necessary. When holes are not left during construction they shall be cut
into the walls or slabs, etc., to pass the pipe through or to fix clamps.
etc., after fixing of the pipes, clamps etc., these shall be neatly made
good
Measurement shall be for one metre of each type and diameter of pipe
laid complete with fittings, clamps etc., as specified. The lengths shall be
measured net on the straight and bends along the center line of the
pipes and fittings correct up to a cm.
15.0 Excavation in trenches, pits, pipe lines, foundations, column footings,
walls etc. in earth's soils of all types, gravel, sand, soft & hard murum,
and boulders up to 0.03 cum. size including removing the excavated
material upto a distance of 50 M beyond the edge of excavation
including the initial lift of 1.5 M, stacking or spreading as directed,
bailing of sub-soil water if any preparing base for foundation etc., and
back filing the excavated pit or trench using the excavated material in
layers including watering and ramming as required or as directed by
Engineer, including all labour and materials complete.
Scope:
The Item includes Excavation in trenches, pits, pipe lines, foundations,

column footings, walls etc. in earth's soils of all types, gravel, sand, soft
& hard murum, and boulders up to 0.03 cum. size including removing
the excavated material upto a distance of 50 M beyond the edge of
excavation including the initial lift of 1.5 M, stacking or spreading as
directed, bailing of sub-soil water if any preparing base for foundation
etc., and back filing the excavated pit or trench using the excavated
material in layers including watering and ramming as required or as
directed by Engineer, including all labour and materials complete.
Executed quantity shall be measured on cubic meter basis.
including excavation & anticorrosive protection.
&
17.0 Supplying and Installing G.I pipes Above Ground of C class ERW of size
&
18.0 Providing and laying galvanized iron pipes conforming to IS:1239-1992
(Part I & II) and jointing etc. complete including cost of all specials for
jointing of pipes sun and safeda to be used for making joint perfectly
watertight including taxes and duties etc. complete. (32mm diameter)
&
&
&
Scope:
Supplying erecting C class (Heavy Duty) galvanized iron pipe, ISI mark of
specified diameter with screwed sockets, Joints & necessary G.I. fittings such as
sockets, check nuts, elbows, bends, tees, reducers, enlarger, plugs, etc.
including electric resistance welding (ERW), fixing with clamps and all
connected works such as excavation, drilling holes in wall, slabs, backfilling &
making good the damages.
Material:
The galvanized iron pipes shall be of type and diameter as specified and shall
comply with I.S.1239-1973 and 1969 for the specified type. The specified
diameter of the pipes shall refer to the inside diameter of the bore pipes. The
fittings of which the galvanizing has been damaged shall not be used. For the
firefighting works, the C Class pipes and accessories shall be used.
Anti-Corrosive Protection on Under Ground Pipe:
Corrosion protection tape shall be wrapped on M.S. Pipes to be buried in

ground. This corrosion protection tape shall comprise of coat tar/asphalt
component supported on fabric of organic of organic or inorganic fiber and
minimum 4mm. thick and conform to requirement of IS: 10221-Code of
practice for coating and wrapping of underground mild steel pipe line. Before
application of corrosion protection tape all foreign matter on pipe shall be
removed with the help of wire brush and suitable primer shall be applied over
the pipe thereafter. The primer shall be allowed to dry until the solvent
evaporates and the surface becomes tacky. Both primer and tape shall be
furnished by the same manufacturer. Corrosion protection tape shall then be
wound around the pipe in spiral fashion and bounded completely to the pipe.
There shall be no air pocket or bubble beneath the tape. The overlaps shall be
15mm and 250mm. shall be left uncoated on either end of pipe to permit
installation and welding. This area shall be coated and wrapped after the pipe
line is installed.
The tapes shall be wrapped in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations. If application is done in cold weather, the surface of the
pipe shall be pre-heated until it is warm to touch and traces of moisture are
removed and then primer shall be applied and allowed to dry. No joint shall
be located in the thickness of the walls. If the pipe is required to be cut and the
end threaded, the burns of the cut end shall be filled smooth and any
obstruction in the bore shall be entirely eliminated. The rate includes wastage
in cutting etc. When the pipe is to be fixed to walls it shall be fixed with
standard bracket, clips or holder bates keeping the pipe about 12mm clear of
the wall. The pipe shall be fixed to the wall horizontally and vertically and
parallel to one another when more than one pipe is laid unless unavoidable.
The supporting clips etc. for the pipe shall be spaced at about two meters or so
as necessary. When holes are not left during construction they shall be cut into
the walls or slabs, etc. to pass the pipe through or to fix clamps, etc. after fixing
of the pipes, clamps etc. these shall be neatly made good.
Pressure Testing:
All piping shall be tested to hydrostatic test pressure of at least one and a half
times the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 10 kg/cm2 for a
period not less than 24 hours. All leaks and defects in joints revealed during
the testing shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
Piping repaired subsequent to the above pressure test shall be re-tested in the
same manner. System may be tested in sections and such sections shall be
securely capped. Pressure gauges may be capped off during pressure testing
of the installation.
Galvanized iron pipes of specified diameter and type and galvanized iron
fittings with ERW shall be erected on MS angle support with one coat of suitable
primer and two coats of Post Office fire red enamel paint duly tested to 1.5
times of working pressure. Excavating and back filling trenches including
dewatering, cutting through walls, floor etc. and making site good. Laying,
jointing, and fixing the pipe with the fittings including cutting pipes, wastage
and threading the ends. At all the road crossings the pipes shall be laid lower
than the crust of the road. During excavation if, any other service pipes
(Water, electric, telephone, etc) come across, these shall be carefully protected
and supported. Any damages done shall be made good. The pipe shall be
laid on a well compacted bed in the trench. The trench after laying the pipe
shall be refilled except at the joints in layers and manually rammed. Care shall
be taken to see that no earth, etc. gets inside the pipes. The filling shall be
kept raised by about 5cm. for subsequent settlement. Bedding and cushioning
of murum, good earth, or sand shall be provided for the pipe in case of trench
through rock. The trench at the joints shall be filled similarly after satisfactory
testing of the pipe. Any surplus excavated stuff shall be disposed of
satisfactorily without causing nuisance.
Measurement shall be for one metre of each type and diameter of pipe laid
complete with fittings, clamps etc. as specified. The lengths shall be measured
net on the straight and bends along the center line of the pipes and fittings
correct up to a cm.
22.0 Supplying & installing Cast iron double flange butterfly valve of size
75/80 mm dia. As per specification NO FF-VL/BFV
&
23.0 Supplying & installing Cast iron double flange butterfly valve of size 100
mm dia. As per specification NO FF-VL/BFV
&
&
Scope:
Supplying & installing cast iron double flange butterfly valve of size
75/80mm. dia confirming to IS: 13095 having cast iron body. FG 220
Nitrite rubber replaceable seat with Moulded “O” ring, C.I. powder
coated disc flow control complete & instead to 1.5 times of working
pressure in an approved manner.
Material:
Body: Cast iron Spheroid graphite iron Carbon steel.

Disc: a) Cast iron Spheroid graphite iron carbon steel, b) Stainless steel
Gun metal c) Aluminium bronze
Shaft: a) Stainless steel b) Carbon steel Aluminium bronze Nickel copper

alloy
Seating ring Seal retaining ring: a) Stainless steel, b) Gun metal

aluminium bronze deposited metal suitable for duty or resilient material.
Seat: Elastomers
Shaft bearing seals: Manufacturer’s standards suitable for duty.
Internal fastenings: Stainless steel
External bolting: Carbon steel: tensile strength 390n/mn or MPa
The double flange butterfly valve shall be fitted with provided flange,
gaskets. Nut, bolts etc. to be fitted to pipe, accessories with washers,
spring washers, check nuts as required with proper alignment so as to
be leak proof including necessary labour and required tools and plants.
26.0 Supplying & installing Cast iron double flange NRV of size 80 mm dia.
As per specification NO FF-VL/NRV
&
&
Scope:
Supplying & installing double flange NRV of specified diameter conforming to

IS: 5312 (Part-1), ISI mark, having cast iron body and gun metal working parts
with nut bolts, gaskets etc.and tested to 1.5 times of working pressure in an
approved manner.
Material:
Body, cover, door, bearing holder: Grey cast iron

Hinge pin, door pin and door suspension pin: Stainless steel
Body seat rings: Leaded tin bronze
Door face ring: Leaded tin bronze
Bearing bushes/Bearing block: Leaded tin bronze
Plugs for hinged pin/Air release plug: Leaded tin bronze
Bolts: Carbon steel
Nuts: Carbon steel
Gaskets: Rubber
Hinges: Grey cast iron
P N Rating and Test Pressure:
S.No. PN Rating Test for Test Pressure

(Gauge)MPs
1 PN 1.6 Body 1.5

Seat 1.0
The double flange NRV shall be fitted to pie with provided flange, gaskets, and
nut bolts etc. accessories with washers, spring washers, and check nuts as
required with roper alignment so as to be leak proof including necessary
labour and required tools and plants.
29.0 Supplying and installing cast iron foot valve of size 75/80 mm dia with
strainer for negative suction as per specification No. FF-VL/FV
&
30.0 Supplying and installing cast iron foot valve of size 150 mm dia with
strainer for negative suction as per specification No. FF-VL/FV
Material:
Housing, seat discs and disc plates: Grey cast iron
Hinge pins and disc guide: High tensile Stainless Steel bars
Strainers: a) Grey cast iron, b) Galvanized steel
Disc faces: a) Vegetable tanned leather (Min. 3 mm. thick), b) Leaded
tin bronze, c) Natural rubber (with reinforcement of cotton canvas), d)
Synthetic rubber (with reinforcement of cotton canvas)
Flange jointing nature: a) Compressed fibre board or rubber minimum
1.5 mm thick. The fibre board shall be impregnated with chemically
neutral oil and shall have a smooth and hard surface. b) Compressed
asbestos fibre.
The footwall with strainer shall be fitted with provided flange, gaskets,
nut bolts to be erected at required position and fitted firmly to pipe with
proper alignment so as the joints should be leak proof with shellac and
other material required including necessary labour and required tools
and plants
31.0 Supplying and installing 100 mm dia end line strainer for +ve suction
as per specification No. FF-VL/ELS
Material: Body: Cast Iron
Strainer screen: Stainless steel/Brass screen of 1mm thick perforated

sheet with 3 mm diameter holes. Flange: Cast iron / M.S. sheet
End line strainer with strainer shall be fitted with provided flange,
gaskets, nut bolts etc, and to be erected at the end of suction pipe,
including labour and required tools and plants.
32.0 Supplying & Installing Pressure Gauge of 100 mm dia 0-300 PSI or 0-
21 Kg per cm square fitted with 12/15 mm dia. Pad cock valve & G.I
pipe, elbow etc as per requirement in approved manner As per
specification NO FF-FFA/PG
Scope:
Supplying and erecting Air release cock of 20/25mm Φ made from

G.M. with necessary G.I. coupling for fixing on top of Air vessel or on
wet riser.
Material:
Air release Valve: Gun metal
Coupling: G.I.
Air release Valve with necessary GI coupling shall be fixed on top of wet
riser with required labour, tools etc.
33.0 Supplying & Installing danfoss Pressure Switches with 12/15 mm dia.
isolation valve & G.I nipple, elbow etc as per requirement in an
approved manner As per specification NO FF-FFA/PS Specification No
(FF-FFA/PS)
Scope:
Supplying and installing pressure switch with 12/15mm Φ isolation

valve, G.I. nipple, elbow etc. in an approved manner.
Material:
Pressure switch: Brass metal
Isolation valve, elbow, Nipple: G.I.

The Pressure switch with G.I. isolation valve, and necessary G.I. fittings
(elbow, Nipple) fitted with required labour, tools. Etc.
34.0 Supplying & Installing ss single outlet hydrant valve fitted with necessary
accessories complete As per specification NO FF-VL/HV
Scope:
Supplying and installing S S single outlet, hydrant valve Morris pattern,

oblique type, conforming to IS:5290, ISI mark, with blanks cap and M.S.
or G.I. chain in an approved manner.
Material:
Valve Body, bonnet, stop valve, Check nut, female outlet:

Bronze/Aluminium alloy or Stainless Steel.
Hand Wheel: M.S. or C.I. (Black painted)
Spring: Made of phosphor wire
Washer, Gasket: Rubber
Blank Cap: ABS plastic
The hydrant valve shall be connected with provided flange, gaskets, Nut
bolts etc. with use of required tools and plants.
The water discharge shall be not less than 900 lpm for single head and
1800 lpm for double head valves at 7kg/cm2
35.0 Supplying & Erecting M/S/CRCA cabinet for housing Floor Hydrant
Valve, hose pipe, hose reel & branch Pipe Size 1000mm x 736 mm x
736mm) made from 16 swg sheet & angle iron 25 mm x 25 mm x 4

mm having front doors with viewing glass(8"x6") & locking arrangement
with necessary fixing material such as bidding etc duly painted in post
box red colour.
&
36.0 Supplying fire fighting RRL hose pipe 63 mm dia 15 mtr. in length fitted
with necessary accessories complete As per specification NO FF-
FFA/RRL
Supplying fire fighting R.R.L. Hose pipe, conforming to IS: 636 (Type-B)
15 metre length, fitted with male and female G.M. coupling conforming
to IS:993, with ISI mark.
Material:
Hose pipe material: Rubber lined woven jacketed & 63mm in dia., the
lining and the cover shall be of uniform thickness, reasonably concentric
and free from air blisters, porosity and splits. The tensile shall be
minimum 5.00 MPa and shall withstand pressure of 10.2kg/cm2
Coupling: Gun metal /S S
Hose pipe of 15 metre length with male and female coupling shall be
connected as per direction.
Supplying SS branch Pipe 63 mm Ø fitted with 20 mm dia detachable

hexagonal nozzle (FF-FFA/NZ)
Scope:
Supplying S S branch pipe of 63 mm diameter with specified length

fitted with 20 mm diameter detachable hexagonal nozzle confirming to
IS: 903, ISI mark.
Material:
Nozzle : S S
S S hexagonal nozzle fitted with required tools and plants including

necessary labour, material etc.
37.0 Supplying & installing wall mounted swinging Hose reel drum fitted with
19 mm dia 30 m high pressure polypropylene (polyhose) long fitted with
necessary accessories complete as per specification no FF- FFA-HRD
Material:
Hub and sides: Aluminum Alloy/Mild steel/ Aluminum sheet Wall

Bracket: Cast iron / Mild steel.
Hose tube (20 mm): Thermoplastic (Textile Reinforced) Type-2, (Nominal

internal dia) as per IS- 12585
Nozzle with branch Pipe: Brass as per IS 8090 Stop Valve (Ball Valve) :
Gun metal.
The Wall Mounting swinging Hose reel drum with Gun Metal Nozzle,
gate valve, shall be connected on M.S. bracket with provided flange,
gaskets, Nut bolts etc. with use of required tools and plants. The water
flow rate shall be not less than 24 LPM and the range of jet shall be not
less than 6 metre.
38.0 Supplying GM chrome plated Nozzle 19 mm dia. Complete as per

specification NO FF- FFA/NZ
Material:
Nozzle: Chrome plated Gun metal Method of Construction:

Gun metal hexagonal nozzle fitted with required tools and plants
including necessary labour, material, etc.
39.0 Supplying GM branch pipe of 63 mm dia. Fitted with 20 mm dia.

Detachable hexagonal nozzle as per specification NO FF- FFA/NZ
Material:
Nozzle: Chrome plated Gun metal Method of Construction:
Gun metal hexagonal nozzle fitted with required tools and plants
including necessary labour, material, etc.
40.0 Supplying & Installing Fire Brigade Header (Siamese Connection) of 150
mm dia for supplying water to wet riser system as per specification No
FF-FFA/SMC
Scope:
Supplying and installing fire brigade Header (Siamese Connection) of

150 mm 0, G.I. 'C' class pipe having 2 Nos. of 100 mm 'T' outlet with
100 mm 0 flange, fitted with 2 Nos. of G.M. male inlets with spring type
NRV for supplying water to Wet riser.
Material:
Pipe material: G.I. 'C' class Branching Inlet: Gun metal Male Inlet: Gun
metal
Non Return Valve: As per (FF- VL/NRV) above.
In order to facilitate feeding of water in the system by fire service, a 4

way 63 mm diameter collecting head shall be provided and connected
with each riser/down comer and the ring main with non return valve
and with provided butterfly/sluice valve. This should be located at a

place where fire brigade tender can reach. The whole unit is placed in
provided MS box made of 2 mm thick MS sheet with open-able glass
cover.
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
41.0 Supplying & Installing Fire Brigade Header of 150 mm dia for supplying
water in fire tank as per specification No FF-FFA/FBC
Scope:
Supplying and installing fire brigade Header pf 150mm Φ G.I. “C” class
pipe having 2 Nos. of 100mm ‘T’ outlet with 100mm Φ flange, fitted
with 2 Nos. of G.M. fire branching inlet connection, each consisting of 2
Nos. 63mm dia. G.M. male inlet for supplying water in fire tank.
Material:
Pipe material: G.I. ‘C’ class (Heavy duty)
Branching inlet: Gun metal
Male inlet: Gun metal
In case under ground storage tank is not approachable by fire tenders,

a 4 way 63mm diameter instantaneous male inlet connection is
provided at street level and connected to UG tank with 1 meter length of
150mm. diameter underground pipe. The whole unit shall be placed in
provided MS box made of 2mm thick MS sheet with openable glass
cover.

42.0 Supplying & erecting 20/25 mm dia. G.M air release cock with
necessary G.I coupling to be fitted on top of air vessel or on wet riser as
per specification No - FF-FFA/ARV
Scope:
Supplying and erecting Air release cock of 20/25mm Φ made from

G.M. with necessary G.I. coupling for fixing on top of Air vessel or on
wet riser.
Material:
Air release Valve: Gun metal
Coupling: G.I.
Air release Valve with necessary GI coupling shall be fixed on top of wet
riser with required labour, tools etc.
43.0 Supplying and Installing G.M gate Valve of size 20/25 mm dia. as per
specification No.FF-VL/GV Specification No (FF- VL/GV) Scope:
Supplying & installing gun metal gate valve of specified diameter having
threaded ends, conforming to IS: 778, ISI mark, along with G.I.
threaded nipple.
Material:
Body: a) Brass, b) Leaded tin bronze Bonnet or cover: a) Leaded tin

bronze, b) Forged brass, c) Brass Stuffing box, disc hinge, check nut,
stem nut, disc retaining nut, gland, gland nut, gland flange, body seat
rings and disc or wedge facing rings (where renewable): a) Leaded tin
bronze, b) Extruded brass rod, c) Forged brass, d) Brass Stem, hinge pin
and plug: a) Extruded brass rod, b) High-tensile brass, c) Forged Brass
Ball (for ball type check valves): Chromium steel Nut bolts: Mild steel
Hand wheel: Cast iron Gasket: Compressed asbestos fibre Gland

packing: a) Hemp and jute, b) Asbestos Spring: Phosphor bronze wire
Seating ring: Synthetic rubber Method of Construction: The Gate Valve
shall be fitted to pipe with provided flange, gaskets, and Nut bolts etc,
accessories with washers, spring washers, and check nuts as required
with proper alignment so as to be leak proof including necessary labour
and required tools and plants.
44.0 Supplying & erecting 15 mm (1/2")dia. NBCM body chrome finished

quartzite bulb sprinkler having 68 degree C fixed temperature rating
with deflector disc of conventional construction as per specification No-
FF-SPR
Scope:
Supplying and erecting 15 mm (1/2") dia. NBCM Body chrome finished,

pendent type quartzoid bulb sprinkler.
Material:
Chrome plated sprinkler bulb having 680 / 780C fixed temperature

rating UL listed.
The sprinklers bulb shall be fitted to sprinklers pipe line and tested for
required pressure.
45.0 Supplying and Installing G.M gate Valve of size 50 mm dia. as per
specification No.FF-VL/GV
Scope:
Supplying & installing gun metal gate valve of specified diameter having
threaded ends, conforming to IS: 778, ISI mark, along with G.I.
threaded nipple.
Material:
Body: a) Brass, b) Leaded tin bronze Bonnet or cover: a) Leaded tin

bronze, b) Forged brass, c) Brass Stuffing box, disc hinge, check nut,
stem nut, disc retaining nut, gland, gland nut, gland flange, body seat
rings and disc or wedge facing rings (where renewable): a) Leaded tin
bronze, b) Extruded brass rod, c) Forged brass, d) Brass Stem, hinge pin
and plug: a) Extruded brass rod, b) High-tensile brass, c) Forged Brass
Ball (for ball type check valves): Chromium steel Nut bolts: Mild steel
Hand wheel: Cast iron
Gasket: Compressed asbestos fibre
Gland packing: a) Hemp and jute, b) Asbestos Spring: Phosphor bronze

wire
Seating ring: Synthetic rubber Method of Construction:
The Gate Valve shall be fitted to pipe with provided flange, gaskets, and
Nut bolts etc, accessories with washers, spring washers, and check nuts
as required with proper alignment so as to be leak proof including
necessary labour and required tools and plants.
46.0 Supplying & Erecting D.C.P type fire extinguishers 5 Kg capacity

cartridge type with gun metal cap, 150 gm CO2 gas cartridge, powder,
& bracket confirming to IS2171-1985 & complete erecting with
necessary clamps made from 50x6 mm M.S flat with nuts & bolts
grouted in wall complete
Scope:
Under this item the contractor shall have to provide& Erecting D.C.P
type fire extinguishers 5 Kg capacity cartridge type with gun metal cap,
150 gm CO2 gas cartridge, powder, & bracket confirming to IS2171-
1985 & complete erecting with necessary clamps made from 50x6 mm
M.S flat with nuts & bolts grouted in wall complete
47.0 Supplying & Erecting CO2 type fire extinguishers 4.5 Kg capacity
cartridge type confirming to IS2878 & complete erecting with necessary
clamps made from 50x6 mm M.S flat with nuts & bolts grouted in wall
complete.
Scope:
Under this item the contractor shall have to provide & Erecting CO2 type
fire extinguishers 4.5 Kg capacity cartridge type confirming to IS2878 &
complete erecting with necessary clamps made from 50x6 mm M.S flat
with nuts & bolts grouted in wall complete
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
48.0 Providing round bottom fire bucket of 9 liters capacity as per IS:2546
made out of 24 gauge G.I sheet with extra handle at bottom duly
painted white inside & red outside with FIRE mark ,on provided
stand/Wall hook.
Scope:
Under this item the contractor shall have to provide round bottom fire
bucket of 9 liters capacity as per IS:2546 made out of 24 gauge G.I
sheet with extra handle at bottom duly painted white inside & red
outside with FIRE mark ,on provided stand/Wall hook
49.0 Providing floor mounted stand for keeping 4 Nos of Fire buckets 1500
mm in length, 900 mm in height frame made out of 30x30x4 mm angle
iron with cross support for legs, welded with 4 hooks & duly painted with
one coat of red lead & two coats of siler paint.
Scope:
Under this item the contractor shall have to provide floor mounted stand
for keeping 4 Nos of Fire buckets 1500 mm in length, 900 mm in
height frame made out of 30x30x4 mm angle iron with cross support
for legs, welded with 4 hooks & duly painted with one coat of red lead &
two coats of siler paint.
50.0 Supplying and erecting XLPE armored cable 2 core 1.5 sq.mm. copper
conductor complete erected on wall/ ceiling as per specification No.
CB-LT/CU.
Scope:
Under this item the contractor shall have to provide and erecting XLPE
armored cable 2 core 1.5 sq.mm. copper conductor complete erected
on wall/ ceiling as per specification No. CB-LT/CU
51.0 150mm dia , installation control valve assembly comprising of vertical

wet alarm valve, 150mm dia, C.I. Sluice valve, hydraulic alarm motor &
gong, 15mm dia, test valve, 50 mm dia drain valve and all necessary
trimming connection including 2 Nos. pressure gauge as per
manufacturer's catalogue (UL/FM/LPC/TAC listed/approved)
Scope:
Under this item the contractor shall have to provide150mm dia ,

installation control valve assembly comprising of vertical wet alarm
valve, 150mm dia, C.I. Sluice valve, hydraulic alarm motor & gong,
15mm dia, test valve, 50 mm dia drain valve and all necessary
trimming connection including 2 Nos. pressure gauge as per
manufacturer's catalogue (UL/FM/LPC/TAC listed/approved.
52.0 Supplying & installing of Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm Control

panel along with PA with battery back up for 8 hours normal operation
and 15 minutes alarm operation. Panel to have number of loops based
on quantity of detectors mentioned in the respective item below. These
should be expandable to double the capacity. The control panel, battery
charger etc. shall be UL listed. The panel shall be 5 loop capacity & it
shall be capable to extend up to 5 loops. The panel shall be consisting
with 80 character LCD display and 485 for networking. Cost shall be
included for required control module & control relay modules (located
Security room)
Scope:
Under this item the contractor shall have to provide& installing of

Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm Control panel along with PA with
battery back up for 8 hours normal operation and 15 minutes alarm
operation. Panel to have number of loops based on quantity of detectors
mentioned in the respective item below. These should be expandable to
double the capacity. The control panel, battery charger etc. shall be UL
listed. The panel shall be 5 loop capacity & it shall be capable to extend
up to 5 loops. The panel shall be consisting with 80 character LCD
display and 485 for networking. Cost shall be included for required
control module & control relay modules (located Security room)
Specification. Max. PSU Rating 220VA total, comprising: Battery
Charger: 1 Amp Internal & External Loads
General System Load: 2.25A @ 24V nominal Loop Load: 2.50A

Standby Batteries 24V sealed dry type & maintenance free batteries
Minimum Capacity: 2x 12V 7Ah Maximum Capacity: 2x 12V 24Ah
Dimensions (mm) 500 x 500 x 195 Weight 20 kg without batteries
Environmental Operating Limits Temperature: 0°C to +40°C Humidity:

85% non-condensing (maximum)
Construction Sheet steel painted, sealed to IP32 Cable Entry 24 x 20mm

knock-outs in top of cabinet 24 x 20mm knock-outs in bottom of cabinet
Loop Capacity 1 to 5 Loops expandable 460mA per loop Maximum

Apollo, Nittan and Hochiki Protocols:
Max. 126 devices (detectors and modules) per loop
Morley-IAS and System Sensor Protocols:
Max. 99 sensor and 99 module addresses per loop
Note: Multiple sensor protocols cannot be used in the panel

simultaneously. Zones Up to 20 zone with individual LED indicators.
Expandable to 40 or 80 individual LED indicators. A maximum 200 can

be programmed with up to 120 software zones with no LED indication.
Internal Sounder Intermittent buzzer (fault condition) High pitched

continuous buzzer (fire condition) External Outputs
Sounder Outputs 2 programmable outputs. Open and short circuit

monitoring. 1A maximum per output.
Auxiliary Relays 1 fault and 1 fire relay voltage free, changeover outputs
Contacts rated at 24V AC/DC, 1A, 0.6 PF maximum. User Controls
SOUND ALARMS, SILENCE/ RESOUND, MUTE BUZZER,
ACCEPT, SYSTEM RESET Programming Controls
Alphanumeric multi-level keypad with 15 keys and 5 control keys: YES,

NO, CHANGE, ENTER and SHIFT LED type general panel status
indicators
FIRE, FAULT, ACKNOWLEDGED, DISABLEMENT, TEST, SOUNDER

FAULT, DELAYED MODE, RELAYS DISABLED, EARTH FAULT, SYSTEM
/CPU FAULT, SOUNDERS
DISABLED, ALARMS SILENCED, SUPPLY FAULT, POWER. LED type zone

Indicators (for 20 zones)
FIRE, FAULT/TEST/DISABLED
Display
4x40-character LCD alphanumeric display with back-light. Serial

Interface 3 serial ports with connections for optional RS485 or RS232
plug-in communication cards.
Networking
Maximum 99 panels can be networked using a Master network &

connected Sub net Works.
53.0 Supplying & installing of Repeater panel located at main entrance gate.
Under this item the contractor shall have to provide repeater panel The
Morley-IA5 repeaters are compact remote control units for Morley-IAS
intelligent multi protocol fire alarm control panels. These units, along
with other I/O peripheral devices and the external printer further
enhance the flexibility and functionality of our fire alarm control panel
range. The repeaters provide an extension to the operation of the fire
alarm control panel. There are two types available - passive with
indications only and no controls, or active with both controls and
indicators. Both display the operational state of the control panel using
the 80 character LCD display and the 7 LED status indicators. In
addition to the general status indicators the Active repeater is fitted with
key operated "Access Enable" switch for the control functions. Individual
buttons are provided for System Reset, Mute, Accept, Sound Alarms,
Silence/Re-sound Alarms and Self test. Thus enabling control functions
to be duplicated in strategic locations around the installation.
The Active repeater includes an integral self test sequence guiding the
operator through a preset sequence to test the functionality of the
control buttons, key-switch and display indicators. Each repeater is
connected to the Morley-IAS fire alarm control panels using the RS485
peripheral data port (Port D) as shown in the schematic overleaf. A

maximum of 31 active repeaters can be connected to the peripheral
data port. The ZX fire alarm control panel supervises the connection
between itself and the repeater, proving the integrity of the cabling and
indicating faults both on the repeater and the fire alarm control panel.
Passive repeaters are not supervised, but a loss of communication with

the fire alarm control panel will be indicated on the passive repeater.
The repeater requires an external power supply of+24Vdc (nominal) to
operate. Power may be taken from the auxiliary supply of the ZX series
control panel or from any other suitable dc power supply.
Electrical
Operating Voltage: 18 to 32 Vdc
Operating Current: 90mA (Quiescent) 120m (Alarm) Terminals:

Maximum cross section 2.5mm2
LED indicators: Fire, Fault, Disables, Accepted, Silenced, Power,

Communications, loss
Extra User Controls: Key switch activated - System Reset, Sound Alarms,
Silence/Resound, Mute, Accept and Self Test.
54.0 Supplying & installing of Analogue Addressable Photo-Electrical detector

with programmable for timed automatic sensitivity selection with base,
junction box and other accessories as required and detectors shall be UL
listed.
Scope:
Under this item the contractor shall have to provide & installation of
Analogue Addressable Photo-Electrical detector with programmable for
timed automatic sensitivity selection with base, junction box and other
accessories as required and detectors shall be UL listed.
The Morley-IAS MI-PSE (optical) and MI-ISE (ionization) are analogue,

addressable, low- profile smoke detectors designed for the ZX series
intelligent multi protocol fire alarm control panels. Because the MI-PSE
and MI-ISE are analogue addressable, the control panel can provide the
operator with a pinpoint description of where the fire is located.
The control panel is capable of not only knowing the detector's location
but exactly how much smoke is in the chamber of the detector. The
detector may be set for different sensitivity settings appropriate to the
environment of its location. The MI-ISE intelligent ionization sensor
incorporates a unique single-source chamber designed to respond
quickly and dependably to a broad range of fires. The MI-PSE intelligent
optical sensor's unique sensing chamber is designed with superior signal
to noise ratio. The optical chamber is engineered to sense the presence
of smoke produced by a wide range of combustion sources.
The MI-ISE and MI-PSE plug-in detectors use a separate base to simplify
installation, service, and maintenance. A special tool allows
maintenance personnel to plug in and remove detectors without using a
ladder Mechanical
Dimensions (Height): 43 mm (installed in B501) 102 mm diameter
Weight: 104 gr. (4 oz)
Operating temperature: - 10°C to 60°C Relative humidity: 10% to 93%

non-condensing electrical
Operating voltage: 15 to 32 Vdc peak Current consumption: Stand by

current: 200 uA @ 24 Vdc LED current: 7 mA @ 24 Vdc ("ON")
Terminals: SEMS screws with clamping plates for up to 2.5 mm2 (13
AWG) wire

55.0 Supplying & installing of Analogue Addressable Heat Detector with

programmable for timed automatic sensitivity selection with base,
junction box and other accessories as required and detectors shall be UL
listed.
Scope:

Analogue Addressable Heat Detector with programmable for timed
automatic sensitivity selection with base, junction box and other
accessories as required and detectors shall be UL listed. The Morley-IAS
range of intelligent thermal detectors are used with the ZX series
intelligent multi protocol fire alarm control panels to measure thermal
levels caused by a fire and report the analogue level of the thermal
measurement to the control panel. The use of analogue information
provides significant benefits to the end user, installer and serviceman in
ways which are not possible with a conventional type system. Since this
detector is also addressable, it will help to quickly locate fire during its
early stages.
The MI-FHSE and MI-HTSE are fixed temperature analogue addressable

sensors employing low mass thermostats and microprocessor
technology for fast response and linear temperature sensing. Their
linear response allows these sensors to be used to signal temperatures
over the range of 58°C (Class A1S) to 78°C
(Class BS).
The MI-RHSE uses the same thermostat and microprocessor technology

to provide an alarm when the rate of rise in temperature exceeds
10°C/minute (typical) or if the temperature exceeds a threshold of 58°C
(Response Class A1R).
All of the thermal detectors have two integral alarm LEDs which provide
local visual indication of the sensor status. These LED's provide a dual
function. In the event on an alarm, they are switched ON continuously,
and can also be programmed to either blink when polled by the panel
or remain off during normal conditions mechanical
Dimensions (Height): 51 mm installed in B501 Weight: 170 gr. (6 oz)
Operating temperature: - 10°C to 60°C Humidity: 10% to 93% non-

condensing
Compatible bases: B501,B524IEFT, B524RLY Figure 1 - MI-FHSE fitted

in B501 base. electrical Operating voltage: 15 to 32 Vdc
Alarm Current (LED on): 7mA maximum Stand by current: 200 uA

maximum Terminals: SEMS screws with clamping plates for upto 2.5
mm2 (13 AWG) wire
56.0 Supplying & installing of Analogue Addressable Fault isolator module

capable of monitoring shorted loop circuit and automatically restore
communication when shorted conditions are corrected.
Scope:
Under this item the contractor shall have to provide & installing of
Analogue Addressable Fault isolator module capable of monitoring
shorted loop circuit and automatically restore communication when
shorted conditions are corrected.
The Morley-IAS loop isolator module is used on the Morley-IAS

intelligent fire alarm control panels to protect the system against wire-to-
wire short circuits on the analogue addressable loop wiring. The fault
isolator modules should be placed between groups of sensors on the
loop wiring to protect the loop if a short circuit fault occurs. If a short
circuit fault occurs, the two isolators located either side of the short
circuit fault will automatically sense the voltage drop, open their switches
and remove the devices from the rest of the loop. If the line voltage then
rises above a fixed threshold, indicating that the short circuit fault is
removed, then the isolator module will automatically restore the power
to the isolated group of devices.
The MI-DISO isolator uses a unique mechanical design allowing each

module to be mounted either in a wall box or on a DIN rail. Irrespective
of the mounting method chosen, the address switch is both visible and
accessible for selection. To help engineers in the maintenance and fault
finding process, both the LEDs and the address switches can be viewed
without having to remove the cover of the mounting box. The LEDs,
being multi colour, provide diagnostic information regarding the status
of the isolator. mechanical
Dimensions (mm) 93 x 94 x 23 (H x W x D) Weight 62g
Operating Temperature -20 °C to +60 °C Humidity 0 to 95% maximum

non-condensing electrical Operating voltage 15 to 30 V dc
Standby current 200uA at 24 V dc maximum Fault detection delay 100

to 400 m S
On resistance 0.065 at 15 V dc maximum Terminal Wire 2.5 mm2

maximum
57.0 Supplying & installing of Horn cum Strobe rated at 82 DBA @ 3m for
Audible annunciation and 75cd flashing at 1 Hz for visual induction.
Scope:
Under this item the contractor shall have to provide& installing of Horn
cum Strobe rated at 82 DBA @ 3 m for Audible annunciation and 75cd
flashing at 1 Hz for visual induction. In concept the sounders and
beacons employ technology to maximise sound and light output, focus
sound distribution, simplify installation and maintain high efficiency and
reliability. Easy to install
One simple two stage installation process. Firstly, fix the base
connection plate, terminate the loop wiring and test the wiring.
Secondly, select the output device required (sounder, beacon or
combined sounder beacon) and fit the unit to the base. Easy to adjust
Simply twist the unit off it's mounting and re-configure the settings to
pick any of 32 sounder tones at any of 3 volumes. The audio visual
range is an ergonomic and stylish design that complements the Morley-
IAS detection and control panel technologies, providing total alarm
solutions. These solutions are suitable for new and existing installations
from office units to multi¬storey complexes,
58.0 Supplying & installing of Addressable Single action Manual pull station
having an integrally mounted addressable module that monitors and
reports contact status.
Scope:

Addressable Single action Manual pull station having an integrally
mounted addressable module that monitors and reports contact status.
The MI-MCP Series Manual Call Points are designed to provide a

manual alarm interface to Morley IAS's fire alarm control panel.
Installation efficiency, flexibility and compliance with the latest standards
are at the heart of the call point range. The unique 'plug and play'
concept is designed specifically to reduce installation time by using a
terminal block which can be wired during the initial installation cabling
with a link (P102) to provide continuity for testing. During the
commissioning phase,the links are removed and the terminal block is
simply inserted into the connector at the back of the unit. No re-
termination is required.
Both break glass, supplied, and re-settable operating elements(PS230)

can be used in the standard unit. Operation of the resettable element,
as well as being indicated by the units LED, is also indicated by a yellow
strip on the element which becomes visible when activated. With the
addition of a hinged transparent cover (PS200) the element may be
protected against accidental operation and may be further protected by

using a cover seal (PS056) which requires breaking in order to operate
the unit The call point uses one of 99 possible addresses which is simply'
dialled in' using the two rotary decade switches on the rear of the unit. A
specialist test key may be inserted into the bottom of the unit to lower
the glass and release the micro-switch and thus mechanical Dimensions:
Semi-flush mounting: 89 x 93 x 27.5 (WxHxD) Surface mounting:
89 x 93 x 59.5 (WxHxD) Weight:
Semi Flush: 110g Surface: 160g IP Rating: IP24D
Operating Temperature: -30°C to +70°C.
Relative Humidity: 0% - 95% non-condensing electrical
Operating Voltage: 15V to 30Vdc max Current Consumption:
Quiescent (without isolator) 260uA Quiescent (with isolator) 360uA
Alarm Current: 6mA (both)
59.0 Supplying & installing of Addressable monitor Module
Scope:

Addressable monitor Module
The MI-DMMI and MI-DMM2I monitor modules are used with the
Morley-IAS intelligent fire alarm control panels to provide a single or
dual input circuit from external devices. Each input is continuously
monitored for normal, open circuit and alarm conditions. Changes to
the status of the input circuits are communicated to the panel where the
appropriate actions may be undertaken. The MI-DMMI requires a single
address and the MIDMM2I two addresses of the ninety-nine possible
module addresses available on a loop. It responds to regularpolling
from the control panel indicated by a pulsing LED every successful

communication.
The MI-DMMI and MI-DMM2I use a unique mechanical design allowing

each module to be mounted either in a wall box (M200E-SMB) or on a
DIN rail (using M200E-DIN). Irrespective of the mounting method
chosen, the address switch is both visible and accessible for selection. To
help engineers in the maintenance and fault finding process, both the
LEDs and the address switches can be viewed without having to remove
the cover of the mounting box. The LEDs, being multi colour, provide
diagnostic information regarding the status of the output. For ease of
installation, testing and maintenance, the field wiring terminals are of a
plug in design. mechanical
Dimensions (H x W x D) 93 x 94 x 23 (mm) Weight MI-DMMI 100g
MI-DMM2I 110g Operating Temperature -20 °C to +60 °C Humidity 0

to 95% maximum non-condensing electrical Operating voltage 15 to 30
Vdc Standby current
MI-DMMI
No comms 310uA at 24 Vdc maximum 1 comms every 5 seconds with

LED blink 510uA at 24 Vdc maximum
MI-DMM2I
No comms 340uA at 24 Vdc maximum 1 comms every 5 seconds with

LED blink 600uA at 24 Vdc maximum Terminal Wire 2.5 mm2
maximum
60.0 Supplying, installing, testing, and commissioning of FM Approved

stainless steel corrugated flexible pipe (hose) for dropping sprinklers
below false ceiling ,pipe shall be 16 bar pressure rating and 1000mm
long 25mm dia with union /reducer collar, supporting material, clamps
etc. as required.
Scope:
Under this item the contractor shall have to provide installing, testing,
and commissioning of FM Approved stainless steel corrugated flexible
pipe (hose) for dropping sprinklers below false ceiling ,pipe shall be 16
bar pressure rating and 1000mm long 25mm dia with union /reducer
collar, supporting material, clamps etc. as required.
The Sprinkler Flexible Hose system shall be ready to use assembly to fit
a sprinkler head in desired location in a suspended ceiling. It easily
positions the sprinkler in the centre of the ceiling tile at a correct height.
Installation can be done in 10 to 15 minutes and does not require any

special preparations. The flexible hose system is a complete unit in itself
which includes a corrugated stainless steel flexible drop with nipple,
reducer, square bar and brackets, which are fitted to the ceiling tile
support rails tolocate and secure the sprinkler in the correct position.
Not only does this reduce the installation time but also makes the
installation process a 'mess-free' activity by eliminating cutting and
threading activities on site. The structure of threaded connection of the
fitting is a limited thread (which cannot be over-tightened), and the
packing seat at the Reducer and Nipple is tapered to 45°. This prevents
leakage caused by damaged packing due to over tightening by an
unskilled installer.
No. Description Material Specification

1 Nipple Carbon Steel Zinc Plated
2 Flexible AISI304
3 Square Bar Mild Steel Zinc Plated
4 Bracket Mild Steel Zinc Plated
5 Reducer Carbon Steel Zinc Plated

61.0 Supply & fixing of approved type rosette plates (Recessed type in two
piece) for sprinklers false ceiling area. The Rosette shall be fabricated by
M.S. plate of 2mm thick and the finish shall be powder coated and color
shall be as approved by architects /clients.
Scope:
Under this item the contractor shall have to provide& fixing of approved
type rosette plates (Recessed type in two piece) for sprinklers false ceiling
area. The Rosette shall be fabricated by M.S. plate of 2mm thick and the
finish shall be powder coated and color shall be as approved by
architects /clients.
62.0 Providing and laying in position plain cement concrete using granite or
black trap graded metal including mixing in a mechanically operated
mixer. a) In 1:3:6 proportion.
Scope: Under this item the contractor shall have to provide and laying in
position plain cement concrete using granite or black trap graded metal
including mixing in a mechanically operated mixer, a) In 1:3:6
proportion.
Executed quantity shall be measured on Cubic meter basis.
63.0 Supplying & installing one piece molded HDP/Fiber water tank. For -ve
suction only, having capacity 1000 ltrs. Fitted with necessary accessories
complete as per specification No.FF-Ffa/PT.
Scope:
Supplying and Installing One piece Moulded hdp /Fibre water tank of
required capacity with necessary plumbing material on provided M.S.
structural supports in an approved manner.
Material:
Priming Tank: HDPE/Fiber of good quality material
Gate Valves: As per (FF-VL/GV) above
The priming tank shall be installed on provided M.S. structural supports

with 20/25 mm dia. Inlet valve and 50mm dia. Outlet valve with
provided necessary G.I. piping upto delivery of main fire pump before
non-return valve.
64. SOLAR CABELS:

A) SCOPE:
The scope of this specification covers design, manufacture, inspection,
testing at works, packing and forwarding of 1100V grade Solar LT XLPE
Power cables.
B) STANDARD:
The Solar cables offered shall conform to the latest revision of relevant
Indian Standard Specifications Some of these standard are list below:
Sr. Indian
Title
No. Standard
1 7098 XLPE insulated electrical cables for working voltages

upto 1100V
2 8130 Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible

cords.
3 5831 PVC insulation & Sheath of Electric Cables.
4 3975 Mild Steel wires, strips and tapes for armouring of

cables.
5 2633 Methods of testing weight, uniformity of coating,

thickness on hot dip gaivanised articales.
Sr. Indian
Title
No. Standard
6 3961 Recommended current ratings for cables-PVC

insulated and PVC sheathed.
7 1753 Aluminium conductors for insulators cables.
C) PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:
a) The LT XLPE power cables shall be used outdoors. Directly

burried, through pipes/duct for street lighting works.
b) The cable shall meet the requirement of IS specifications listed

above and the general technical requirement detailed below.
D) GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:
a) The cables shall be brand new. It Shall be suitable for laying in

trenches, ducts, conduits & underground buried installation.
b) All LT XLPE power cables shall be 1100V grade with Cu.

Conductor, XLPE insulated, inner sheathed, armoured & over all
PVC sheathed.
c) The construction of the conductors shall be stranded for alu.

Cables, Conductors of nominal area of 25sq.mm shall be
circular. These above may be circular or oval shaped.
d) The core insulation shall be with XLPE compound applied over

the conductor by extrusion duly & shall conform to the type A
compound of IS-5831.
e) The inner sheath shall be applied over the laid up cores by

extrusion and shall be of XLPE confirming to the requirements of
type ST1 PVC compound. The extruded inner sheath shall be of
uniform thickness of 0.5 mm upto 16 sq.mm 0.8mm upto
120sq.mm & 1.0mm above 120sq.mm conductor size.
f) The armouring shall be by single round galvanised steel wires for

cable diameter upto 13mm and glavanised steel strips for cables
diameters above 13mm.
g) The outer sheath of the cables shall be applied by extrusion and

shall be of PVC compound. Suitable chemicals shall be added to
the PVC compound of the outer sheath to protect the cable
against rodent and termite attack.
h) The dimensions of the insulation armour and outer sheath

materials shall be governed by IS specification.
E) TESTING AND COMMISSIONING:
i) TESTING AND EQUIPMENTS:
All equipment’s before installation or site shall be tested and such results
needs to be submitted to the corporation. Nothing shall absolve the
contractor from performing any test that the contract has been called up
by the corporation.
ii) MANUFACTURERS TESTS:
The contractors shall specifically perform all test such as routine test,
test, type test on all equipment’s in the presence of CIDCO officials. All
cost incidental to such test shall be deemed to have been included in the
specific item of that equipment and no extra charge will be payable.
iii) PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS:
All test required or called by the local electricity supply authority,

Government officials and as laid in relevant Indian Standard
Specification, Rules Regulations and Acts shall be strictly complied.
iv) COMMISSIONING:
The contractor shall obtain the written permission or sanction for

commissioning of the electrical equipment’s if required from I.E. and L
department of Government of Maharashtra. All cost, visit fees etc.

incidental for obtaining the sanction shall be to the contractors account.
F) TESTS & CERTIFICATE:
Three sets of as built drawing with original tracing which shows the location of
poles with proper numbering as per direction of Engineer. The route and size
of cables, RCC pipe, GI pipe along with the schematic diagrams of the
scheme. Voltages at the initial point and the farthest point from the source and
currents in three phases at supply sources. Current drawn by each supply and
out going cable at junction box. The agency will arrange day to day supervision
during the work and maintain the work diary to this effect.
After completion of the work the agency will obtain the Inspection and
clearance report duly signed from concern authorities and submit the same to
Engineer for charging the installation. The agency will also be responsible for
liaisoning with the concern authorities in this regards without any extra cost.
G) RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR:
The contractor is responsible for following:
Liaison work with the CIDCO Civil Design in respect of arranging power shut
downs, obtaining line alignment, tap point location, supervision by the
representative, final commissioning and handing over
Liaison work with the Electrical Inspector in respect of preparation and

approval of drawings, arranging site visit and obtaining permission energize
the line.
Including available service of experienced electrical supervisor at the site to

supervise the work being done on the site for entire tenure of the contract.
H) GENERAL:
1. Even thought the specifications of the material to be used for the subject
work under this contract is specified in the tender document it will be the
responsibility of the successful agency to obtain the necessary approval
to the specification of each and every item from Engineer before starting
the execution of work and complete the work in accordance with the
specifications approved by Engineer without any extra cost.
2. The work shall conform to relevant Indian Standard, Indian Electricity

Acts. and requirement of local electricity board.
3. For supervision, contractor must depute qualified electrical engineer with

sufficient experience for day to day supervision of the work in co-
ordination with CIDCO as per the instruction of Engineer.
4. The contractor shall employ only experienced and licensed

Electricians/Wireman for the work. Only licensed electrical contractors
will be allowed to work.
5. When the installation is complete, the same shall be tested as per I.E.
code I.E. Regulations in front of Engineer and MEDA authorities and the
certified reports should be submitted to Engineer in three sets.
6. The contractor shall carry out all minor civil works connected with
electrical works. The contractors shall repair and make good damage
caused to the roads, footpaths, central verge or any civil structure while
carrying out the electrical works without any extra cost and should also
subject obtain and submit the clearance certificate from concern
authority for completing the necessary repairing work.
7. The contractor shall follow guidelines for off grid solar application given
by MNRE, GOI.
8. Contractor has to filled up Annexure – 3 & Annexure – 4 & submitted

along with Tender.
I) ESSENCE OF CONTRACT:
Following given points are the essence of contract for the subject work and the
successful agency will be responsible for completing the same without any extra
cost.
The successful agency has to carry out the details survey of site regarding the
scope of work and co-ordinate with the Civil agency/CIDCO Civil department
for obtaining various data for designing the structure for Solar PV panel before
execution of the work. The successful agency has to get the Only after due
approval from Engineer, agency should start the execution of work.
65.0 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
1. FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
General:
Fire safety in building has become very important consideration in construction

and maintenance. A normal office building has fire load in the form of large
quantity of papers and furnishing. Buildings like Hospitals, Laboratories,
Auditorium, Libraries, and Museum etc. require fire safety provisions by virtue
of their type of occupancy and importance irrespective of their height. The
design and installation of a fire fighting system is of utmost importance. The
fire fighting installation on completion will have to be got cleared from the
local fire fighting authorities (Fire Service) for its efficacy, suitability and
usability by the Fire Service in the event of a fire.
The contractor should have valid license from Directorate of Maharashtra Fire
Services in relation to:
a) Fire fighting system installation such as Hydrant, Sprinkler, Pumping etc.
b) Detection and fire suppression system.
The design of fire fighting system for a building shall base as per the provisions
in National Building Code of India (Part IV) (Amended upto date) and also
considering the provisions in the Development Control Rules of local
body/authority.
The operating pressure of individual hydrant shall be between 5.5 kg/cm2 to

3.5.kg/cm2 and the operating pressure of the furthest level hydrant from main
pump shall be minimum 3.5 kg/cm2
The pipeline will be designed in such a way that it should be possible to get
discharge at any location.
Specifications:
This part deals with the specifications of following pumps.
Specification No(s)
1.1 1. Main Fire Pump (Single Stage) (FF-MFP/SSC)
2. Jockey Pumps (FF-MFP/JP)
3. Booster Pumps (FF-MFP/BP)
Scope:
Supplying, installing, testing, perfect aligning, proper leveling and

commissioning of Fire service main/jockey/booster pump single/multi stage
having specified discharge and head with required HP or similar to with
minimum parameters, confirming to IS:1520 with specified size of suction and
delivery pipes, coupled with squirrel cage. A.C. induction motor. The pump
set shall be erected in alignment on cement concrete foundation. The Main
Fire pumps should be able to deliver minimum operating pressure of
3.5kg/cm2 at highest and farthest hydrant.
Material:
Pump Body:
The centrifugal pumps shall conform to IS 1520. The pump casing shall be of
heavy section close grained cast iron and designed to withstand 1.5 times the
working pressure. The casing shall be provided with shaft seal arrangement as
well as flanges for suction and delivery pipe connections as required.
Impeller:
The impeller shall be bronze. This shall be shrouded type with machined
collars. Wear rings, where fitted to the impeller, shall be of the same material
as the impeller. The impeller surface shall be smooth finished for minimum
frictional loss. The impeller shall be secured to the shaft by a key.
Shaft:
The shaft shall be of stainless steel EN-8/C-40 and shall be accurately

machined. The shaft shall be balanced to avoid vibration at any speed within
the operating range of the pump.
Shaft Sleeve:
The shaft sleeve shall be of bronze
Bearing:
The bearing shall be of stainless steel and of ball or roller type suitable for duty
involved. These shall be grease lubricated and shall be provided with grease
nipples /cups. The bearings shall be effectively sealed against leakage of
lubricant of lubricant or entry of dust or water.
Shaft seal:
The shaft seal shall be mechanical type so as to allow minimum leakage. A

drip well shall be provided beneath the seal.
Motor:
Suitable HP squirrel cage induction motor, TEFC (totally enclosed fan cooled)
synchronous speed 2900 RPM, suitable for operation on 415 volts, 3 phase 50
Hz AC with IP 55 protection for enclosure, horizontal foot mounted type with
Class-“F” insulation, conforming to IS-325.
Body: Cast iron
Rotor Shaft: Stainless steel
Bearing: Refer specification for bearing under Pump above.
Winding: Class “F” insulated copper winding.

Base plate: Fabricated from Mild steel, foundation bolts etc.
Cement Concrete Foundation: Cement, Sand and Water, in 1:2:4 ratio.
Anti Vibrating Pads: Made from high quality rubber of specified grade and
strength.
Hardware: Mild Steel
The surface of the pump foundation should be chipped with pneumatic

hammer or sharp pointed chisel. The teak wood box of appropriate size shall
be placed and filled with cement concrete in 1:2:4 ratio with 20 x 25 mm stone
metal and required size and strength of foundation nut & bolts. The necessary
curing and finishing shall be done in approved manner. The M.S. fabricated
base plate of suitable size and strength should be fixed with anti-vibration
rubber pads. Proper leveling and alignment shall be observed before
tightening of foundation bolts. Both the pump and motor shall be placed on
common base plate frame with perfect alignment, proper leveling. The pump
should be connected to pipe line with M.S. flanges, caskets, nut bolt etc. and
shall be checked for the leakages. The coupling guard shall be provided with
nut bolts of required size. The pump shall be tested for 3.5 kg/cm2 pressure at
highest and farthest point of the building for minimum 2 hours. The necessary
test certificate from manufacturer of pump and motor shall be produced. The
motor should have efficiency more than 90% and power factor above 0.80.
1.2 Sluice waive
Specification No. (FF-VL/SV)
Scope:
Supplying and installing cast iron double flange sluice valve of specified
diameter conforming to IS:780, ISI mark, having cast iron body and gun metal
working parts with nut bolts, gaskets etc. and tested to 1.5 times of working
pressure, in an approved manner.
Material:
Body: a) Brass b) Leaded tin bronze
Bonnet or cover: a) Leaded tin bronze b) Forged brass, c) Brass
Stuffing box, disc hinge, check nut, stem nut, disc retaining nut, gland, gland
nut, gland flange, body seat rings and disc or wedge facing rings (where
renewable): a) Leaded tin bronze, b) Extruded brass rod, c) Forged brass d)
Brass
Stem, hinge pin and plug: a) Extruded brass b) High tensile brass, c) Forged
Brass
Ball (for ball type check valves): Chromium steel.
Nut bolts: Mild steel
Hand Wheel: Cast iron
Gasket: Compressed asbestos fibre
Gland packing: a) Hemp and jute b) Asbestos
Spring: Phosphor bronze wire
Seating ring: Synthetic rubber
The double flange sluice valve shall be fitted with provided flange, gaskets, Nut
bolts, etc. to be fitted to pipe, accessories with washers, spring washers, check
nuts as required with proper alignment so as to be leak proof including
necessary labour and required tools and plants.
Mode of Measurement;
1.3 Hose Reel
Specification No. (FF-FFA/HRD)

Scope:
Supplying and installing wall mounting swinging Hose reel drum as per IS:884
and fitted with 19mm dia. 36 meter long high pressure polypropylene
(Polyhose) pipe as per IS: 444 (type III) G.M. chrome plated nozzle and 19 mm
dia. And G.M. gate valve on the inlet pipe with necessary M.S. Bracket for
holding Hose reel drum fitted in position with wall fasteners, in an approved
manner.
Material:
Hub and sides: Aluminium Alloy/Mild steel/Aluminium sheet.
Wall Bracket: Cast iron/Mild steel
Hose tube (20mm): Thermoplastic (Textile Reinforced) Type-2, (Nominal

internal dia) as per IS-12585
Nozzle with branch Pipe: Brass as per IS 8090
Stop Valve (Ball Valve): Gun metal
The wall mounting swinging Hose reel drum with Gun Metal Nozzle, gate
valve, shall be connected on M.S. bracket with provided flange, gaskets, Nut
bolts etc. with use of required tools and paints. The water flow rate shall be not
less than 24 LPM and the range of jet shall be not less than 6 metre.
1.4 Siamese connection (Fire service inlet)
Specification No. (FF-FFA/SMC)
Scope:
Supplying and installing fire brigade Header (Siamese Connection) of 150mm

Φ G.I. ‘C’ class pipe having 2 Nos. of 100mm ‘T’ outlet with 100mm Φ flange,
fitted with 2 Nos. of G.M. Male inlets with spring type NRV for supplying water
to Wet riser.
Material:
Pipe material: G.I. ‘C’ class
Branching inlet: Gun metal
Male inlet: Gun metal
Non Return Valve: As per (FF-VL/NRV) above
In order to facilitate feeding of water in the system by fire service, a 4 way

63mm diameter collecting head shall be provided and connected with each
riser/down corner and the ring main with non return valve and with provided
butterfly/sluice valve. This should be located at a place where fire brigade
tender can reach.
The whole unit is placed in provided MS box made of 2 mm thick MS sheet with
open-able glass cover.
1.5 Heat detector
Specification No. (FF-FAS-HD)
Scope:
Supplying, erecting, and testing heat detector with base erected on 16 gauges
M.S. sheet box of 100 x 100 x 75 mm size duly painted.
Material:
Heat detector: UL listed /LPCB marked with 3600 blinking LED & having 680
C/780 C fixed temperature.
Box: CRCA/MS sheet of 16 gauges
Red Oxide paint: Superior quality
Enamel paint: Superior quality of specified colour

Hardware: Sheet metal screws
Plug: Plastic
The Heat Detector shall be fixed on the CRCA/MS sheet box duly painted with
one coat of red oxide & 2 coats of enamel paint of specified shade with
necessary SM screws, plugs, etc. on ceiling, duly terminating the provided cable
with provided glands and making the connection.
1.6 Optical type Photo electric smoke detector
Specification No. (FF-FAS-SD)
Scope:
Supplying, erecting and testing optical type smoke detector complete with base
erected on 16 gauge CRCA/MS sheet box of 100 x 100 x 75mm duly painted.
Material:
Smoke detector: UL listed/UPCB marked
Box: CRCA/MS sheet of 16 gauge
Red Oxide paint: Superior quality
Enamel paint: Superior quality of specified colour
Hardware: Sheet metal screws
Plugs: Plastic
The Smoke Detector shall be fixed on the CRCA/MS sheet box duly painted
with one coat of red oxide & 2 coats of enamel paint of specified shade with
necessary SM screws, plugs, etc. on ceiling, duly terminating the provided cable
with provided glands and making the connection.
1.7 Fire Alarm Control Panel
Local Control Panel
Specification Nos
Fire Alarm Control Panel (FF-FAAS/FACP)
Local control Panel (FF-FAS-LCP)
Scope:
Supplying, erecting, testing & commissioning of Fire Alarm Control Panel with
all accessories.
Material:
Panel: Microprocessor based Conventional Main Fire Alarm Control Panel

(FACP) with necessary Test Certificate from ERTL as per IS 2189-1999 provided
with SMPS (Switch Mode Power Supply) of suitable battery (2x12V) 24V, 24 AH
capacity maintenance free battery as standby supply to switch over
automatically for a period of 8 hours in case of A.C. supply failure to panel
with 7 AH capacity battery charger, panel shall have following features.
a) Visual zone indication in which fire has emerged

b) Audio alarm devices
c) Acknowledge reset and test devices
d) Visual indication (2x20 character LCD display) incorporating following
indications
i) Fire condition
ii) Fault condition
iii) A.C. Pilot indication
iv) Low battery indication
v) Blown fuse indication A.C. as well as D.C.
vi) Built in electronic hooters of 2 tone round for fire condition and
single tone for fault condition.
vii) Open and short circuit fault

viii) Push button switch for checking each zone.
ix) Push button to disable audio alarm
x) Reset push button.
e) Fire protection and alarm circuit shall have modular design using electronic
plug in type printed circuit boards (PCB) with spare cards.
Method of Installation:
The microprocessor based main fire Alarm control panel designed as per IS
2189-1999 with ERTL Test certificate shall be fixed at accessible place so that
security or fire personal can attend to the fault immediately.
Testing:
The control shall be tested for following features:
1) Alarm cancel Test

2) Reset 1 lamp
3) Fire Test
4) Open Test(for detector & hooter)]
5) Short circuit Test (for detector & hooter)
6) Walk Test(one man test)
7) Sounder Test
1.8 Pill Box (Manual Call Point [MCP]
Specification No. (FF-FAAS/MCP)
Scope:
Supplying, erecting, testing, and commissioning pill box with break glass, push
button. MCP is manually operated device used to initiate an alarm signal.
Material:
Push Button: Plastic
Enclosure: CREAMS with 100/150mm round/square with Glass cover.
Hammer with chain: Brass
Enamel paint: Superior quality Post Office red colour.
Hardware: S.M. Screw
Plugs: Plastic
The pill box with break glass cover, push button in circular/square enclosure
with push button kept inside per set with a glass outside marked “IN CASE OF
FIRE BREAK GLASS” provided with a small hammer and chain fixed to the pill
box shall be mounted on wall or any other place as directed and provided with
cable entry with suitable terminal inside and painted with two coats of red
oxide and two coats of post office red enamel paint.
1.9 Hooter:
Specification No. (FF-FAAS/HTR)
Scope:
Supply and erecting hooters with CRCA enclosure duly connected to main
amplifier to radiate two tone sounds for public.
Material:
Hooter: Electronic type with 6W output, Line matching transformer
Enclosure: CRCA sheet of 14 SWG with perforation
Enamel paint: Superior quality Post Office red colour
Hardware: S.M. Screw

Plugs: Plastic
Kitties: Wooden
The electronics hooter with Line matching transformer shall be enclosed in

suitable size perforated CRCA enclosure and installed as per instructions and
shall be connected and fixed at suitable site to ensure that the alarm is heard
anywhere in the protected area. The minimum sound level shall be 80 dB.
1.10 Common Auto control Panel
Specification No. (FF-ACP)
1) Mounting : Floor Mounted
2) Type : Floor mounted and cubical compartmentalized type
3) Panel : 14/16 guage CRCA stove enamel
4) Incoming : 200 AMP, 4 Pole MCCB
5) Bus Bar : 4 Strips of Aluminum bars of 250 Amps rating
6) Accessories (Incoming side) : Ammeter 0-250 Amps
: Voltmeter 0-500 Volts
: ASS & Control fuse with VSS
: Phase indicating lights
7) Outgoings : 160 Amps – 1 No. TP MCCB
: 63 Amps – 2 Nos. TP MCCB
8) Power and control wiring : As per IS Code of Electrical
9) Accessories with each MCCB : Single phase preventor

(on outgoing side) on starter feeder start/stop button/auto/manual
Button contractor, Local / Remote
Switch ON / OFF PB Ammeter
10) Earthing : 50 x 6 mm GI Strip
11) Other Accessories : Audio visual Alarm with flasher and

Hooter and for hydrant pump tripped.
Jockey pump tripped, (both and
standby) Hydrant mains pressure low
and other off normal condition.
1.11 Scope : (Armoured cables)
Specification No. (CB-LT/AL, CB-LT/CU)
Providing armoured cable of specified voltage level, size & specified conducting
material Aluminium / Copper), including required material, hardware’s for
erection and erecting on wall, ceiling, RCC slab or drawing the same through
pole, pipe, laying in provided conduit, trench, ducts, trays as per approved
method of construction including glands, lugs, etc.
Material:
Cables:
Cables shall be PVC for LT/MP and XLPE for HT and of required construction,
colour, shall carry ISI mark, IS No. manufacturer’s name, size, duly
embossed/screen printed at every metre and having the total count of
progressive length in meter at each mark.
Earth wire: Galvanized iron (GI) wire of appropriate gauge
Glands: As per specification
Lugs: As per specification (CB-CL/AL,CB-CL/CU)
Saddles: Saddles fabricated from GI sheet of required gauge and size

depending on dia of cable either galvanized or painted with superior quality
enamel black paint with necessary shearing mechanical strength, semi circular
shaped with extended piece having suitable holes for fixing.
G.I. Strip: 22.g x 25mm width G.I. Strip.
Clamps : MS Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, having the size
of 3/6mm thick mild steel having 25/50mm width (as per size of cable),
rounded ends with wooden/resin cast grip for holding the cable.
Identification tags: For identifying root, connection position GI strip with

identification mark/name embossed/painted with arrangement to tie should be
fix on cable or arrangement of ferrules to be done.
Hardware: Sheet Metal (GM) screws of required sizes, plugs/wooden gutties,

etc.
General:
a) Irrespective of method of construction the cable ends shall be terminated

with appropriate size & type of glands with lugs duly crimped, as directed
by Site engineer.

mentioned in Table No.7/2. Grouping of cables shall be done with
adequate distance between cables as mentioned. In IS so as to minimize
de-rating. Cables shall be tagged/ferruled with identification name/mark
at the point from where distribution starts and at ends. Bare earth wire of
appropriate size shall run along with the cable. Earth wire running with the
cable shall be terminated at the earth terminal nearest to cable termination.
Erection shall be done as per the routes and layout finalized, in perfect level
and a plumb. Before fixing the cable shall be straightened as far as possible
for good aesthetics look, continuous bare GI earth wire of required gauge shall
be run. Cable with G.I. wire shall be fixed by saddles firmly clipped on cable
and shall be fixed to wall with minimum 50 x 8mm SM screws with
plugs/wooden gutties, etc. (Distance between two supports / saddles shall be
minimum 450mm). Wooden gutties shall be used wherever required (Especially
for stone wall). The entries made in wall, floor slab, etc. for laying the cable
Cable along with bare GI earth wire, while erecting on trusses, shall be firmly
clamped by wrapping GI strip of 22.g 25mm width of required length fixed to
truss with nuts and bolts.
Cable along with bare GI earth wire, while erecting on pole, shall be firmly
clipped by suitable wooden/epoxy resin cast grips, clamped with 25 x 3mm or
50 x 6mm MS strip of required length and fixed to pole with nuts and bolts.
While laying Cable along with bare GI earth wire, utmost care shall be taken to
prevent damage to the insulation of the cable and to the open end. Cable
shall be brought out from trench vertically straight (minimum 1.0 meter above
G.L.) Care shall be taken to inspect the trench so that depth of cable shall not
be less. Suitable size of cable loops shall be provided near termination point
at adequate depth.
1.16 Erecting cable in constructed Trench/duct:
Erection of cable/s in constructed trench / duct, shall be as per guide lines of IS

1255.
Cable/s shall be laid with PVC tags on GI trays. At bending point care shall be
taken so that sharp edges of sheet will not damage insulation of cable.
Executed quantity shall be measured on the basis of running metre per run of
cable.
29.0 PLUMBING (PLB)
A) Galvanized Iron Pipes (GP)
1. General
This part of specification deals with the Galvanized Iron pipes of

different Class (Heavy, Medium & Light) used for water supply, or for
any other purpose. The guidelines for the use of pipes are as under.
• Heavy gauge pipes shall be used for delivery line of Submersible pumps
/ Ejecto Jet pumps/Open well submersible pumps.
• Medium gauge shall be used for suction pipe of Centrifugal pumps,
(Except for Centrifugal pumps meant for Firefighting purpose.) and shall
be used enclosure for cables while meant for laying underground at
road crossing, or any other location as directed by engineer in-charge,
etc.
• Light gauge shall be used as enclosure for cables on wall, pole or for
other purpose wherever specified.
2. Scope:
Specification No (CW-PLB/GP)
Supplying and erecting GI Pipes of specified class, with necessary
accessories, (such as: bends, tees, couplings, unions, sockets, enlargers,
reducers, check nuts, plugs, etc) at designated place, having relevant ISI
mark, complete to the satisfaction of the department.
3. Material:
Pipe: The galvanized iron pipes shall comply with IS: 1239—1973 and
1969 for the specified class. The specified diameter of the pipes shall
refer to inside diameter.
Fittings & Accessories: Bends, Tees, Couplings, Unions, sockets, bends,
tees, enlargers, reducers, back nuts, plugs, unions, etc shall made of
galvanized iron and shall comply IS: 1239 – 1973 and 1969
Plumbing material: Hemp, Linseed oil.

MS Clamps: Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, of 3/6

mm thick mild steel having 25/50 mm width.
Hardware: MS nuts & bolts of required size and strength, sheet metal
(SM) screws of required sizes, plugs/wooden gitties etc.
4.1 Pipes to be used as Enclosure:
4.1.1 Erection of Pipe on wall:
The required length of pipe shall be machine cut, without any sharp
edges, burrs, etc. The pipe duly enclosing the specified material, shall
be erected on wall in plum, and fixed with required size of MS clamps
on wall with plugs, gitties, etc. When the pipe is to be fixed to walls it
shall be fixed with standard bracket, clips or holder by keeping the pipe
about 12mm clear of the wall. The pipe shall be fixed to the wall
horizontally and vertically and parallel to one another, when more than
one pipe is to be laid, unless unavoidable the supporting clips, etc. for
the pipe shall be spaced at about two meters or so as necessary. Holes
cut during construction shall not be left out; they shall be filled and
finished after passing of the pipe through it.
4.1.2 Erection of pipe on pole:
The required length of pipe shall be machine cut, without any sharp
edges, burrs, etc. The pipe duly enclosing the specified material, shall
be erected on pole in plum, and fixed with required size of MS clamps
with MS nuts& bolts of required size and strength. Pole(s), the pipe at the
trench level should be placed at least 30 cm above the cable level for
avoiding damage to the insulation of cable.
1.3 Laying the pipe underground:
The excavation for laying the pipe underground shall be done as

required, and in advance of laying, so as to cause least damage to the
trench and least inconvenience to traffic and in other respects. The

trench for laying the pipe shall be excavated to the lines and levels as
directed by the site engineer. The bed shall be made even. Unless
otherwise specified in the special provisions, the excavation shall be
about 30 cm. wide and not less than 45 cm. deep. The trench shall be
excavated through all strata met with. Where necessary, sides may be
shored or sloped. In case rock is met with the section of the trench, the
depth may be slightly reduced but shall be sufficient to receive the pipe
and the cushioning with a safe margin. Dewatering shall be done where
necessary. During excavation, if any, pipes, water mains, cables, etc.
are met, these shall be carefully protected and supported; any damage
done shall be made good by the contractor at his own cost.
4.3 Pipe used for Plumbing purpose:
The required length of pipe shall be machine cut and threaded

(threading shall be done by machine only), without any sharp edges,
burrs, etc. The pipe shall then be properly aligned with the accessory
and tightening by applying hemp, linseed oil, so as to make it leak
proof. During the erection, wherever required, correct accessory shall be
used. When holes are not left during construction they shall be cut into
the walls or slabs, etc., to pass the pipe through. The necessary clamps,
supports shall be provided wherever required.
5. Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on running meter basis, including

the entire accessory. The lengths shall be measured net including the
straight and bends along the center line of the pipes and fittings correct
up to a cm. (i.e per meter)

Date : Date :
CODES AND STANDARDS
The following codes and standards shall be applicable for continuous performance of
all electrical equipments to be supplied, delivered at site, erected, tested and
commissioning. The electrical equipments offered shall comply to the relevant Indian
Standards Specifications. Fire Insurance Regulations, Tariff Advisory Committee
Regulations, and particular to Indian Electricity Rules in all respect with all its latest
amendments upto date.
For guidelines to the tenderers, few of the Indian Standards are indicated below :-
1. IS:116 - Circuit breakers for AC System.

2. IS:159 - Bubars and Busbars connections.
3. IS:3043 - Code of practice of earthing.
4. IS:10116 - Code of practice for installation of
switchgear.
5. IS:10116 - Code of practice for selection,
installation and maintenance of
fuse (upto 650 Volts.)
6. IS:3165 - Potential Transformers.
7. IS:3203 - Climate proofing of electrical
equipments.
8. IS:3427 - Metal enclosed switchgear and
central gear.
9. IS:3419 - Specification for fittings for rigid PVC
non-metallic conduit.
10. IS:3537 - Gas separated relays.
11. IS:3639 - Fittings and accessories for power
Transformer.
12. IS:3837 - Accessories for rigid steel conduits.
13. IS:4064 - Heavy duty Air Break switches and
composite. Switch fuse units for
voltage and exceeding 100V.
14. IS:4064 - Switch fuse units for Industries etc.
15. IS:4237 - General requirements for switchgears
not exceeding 1000 Volts.
16. IS:4615 - Switch socket outlet.

17. IS:5133 (Part-I) - Sheet steel boxed.
18. IS:3070 (Part-I) - Lighting Are stores.
19. IS:2034 - L.T. capacitors.
20. IS:192 - Electric power switchgear for indoor
and outdoor installation.
21. IS:PUB 26 - Circuit Breakers.
22. IS:9535 - Specification for conduits for electrical
installation.
23. IS:240 (Part-I & II) - for H.T. insulator of 33KV grade and
above.
24. IS:335 - Insulating Transformer Oil.
25. IS:374 - Ceiling fans.
26. IS:375 - Marking and arrangement for switchgear
boards main connections auxiliary wiring
27. IS:415 - Tungsten filament lamps.
28. IS:692 - Paper insulated cables.
29. IS:694 - PVC insulated cables and cords for
power lighting.
30. IS:722 - Three phase watt hour meters with MDI
31. IS:732 - Electrical wiring installation (upto 650V)

32. IS:1087 - Single pole tumbler switch 5 Amps.
33. IS:1248 - Direct reading electrical indicating
instruments.
34. IS:1255 - installation and maintenance of paper
insulated power cables upto 33 KV)
35. IS:1293 - 3 Pin lugs and sockets outlets.
36. IS:1554 - PVC insulated cables – heavy duty.
37. IS:1567 - Metal clad switches upto 100 Amps.
38. IS:1651 - Lead acid cell batteries.
39. IS:1653 - Rigid steel conduits for electric wiring.
40. IS:1771 - Industrial light fittings with accessories.
41. IS:6600 - Loading of oil immersed transformer.
42. IS:6946 - Reliable (flexible) non-metallic conduits

for electrical.
43. IS:7098 (Part-II) - For XLPE type cables.
44. IS:5216 - Guide for safely procedure and practices
in electric work.
45. IS:5578 - Guide for marking of insulated
conductors.
46. IS: 5792 - 11 kv drop out fuses.
47. IS:5820 - Pre-cast concrete cables covers.
48. IS:5908 - Method of measurement of electrical
installation in building.
49. IS:6381 - Specifications for construction and
testing of electrical apparatus.
50. IS:1818 - Isolation and earthing switches.
51. IS:1886 - Code practice for installation of
transformers.
52. IS:1947 - Flood lights.
53. IS:2026 - Transformers.
54. IS:9242 - Degree of protection provided for
enclosure for switchgear.
55. IS:9242 - HRS cartridge fuse units upto 650 Volts.
56. IS:2251 - Code of practice for Danger Notice
Plates.
57. IS:2268 - Code bell/buzzers.
58. IS:2274 - Code of practice for wiring installation
(exceeding 650 Volts)
59. IS:3854 - Switches for domestic and similar
purpose.
60. IS:2312 - Exhaust fans.
61. IS:2309 - Code of practice for lighting protection.
62. IS:2418 - Tubular fluorescent lamps for general
lighting service.
63. IS:2544 - Porcelain post top insulators for BBW
Class.
64. IS:2509 - PVC electrical conduits.
65. IS:2516 - A.C. Circuit breakers.
66. IS:2667 - Fittings for rigid steel conduits for

electrical wiring.
67. IS:2692 - 11 KV drop out fuses.
68. IS:2575 - Enclosed distribution fuse boards and
cutouts for voltage upto 1000 V.
69. IS:2705 - Current transformer.
70. IS 14930 II - Double Walled Corrugated pipes of High
Density Polyethylene (HDPE) with couplings, tees,

sockets for cable protection.
The entire electrical installation work shall be strictly complied with the codes,
standards, rules and regulations framed under the Indian Electricity Act.
Further it shall be strictly carried out as per the regulations and rules set out by
“Tariff Advisory Committee and/or Fire Insurance Regulations”.
Some of the rules framed under the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 and all
amendments thereof more particularly complied to :
35, 43, 44, 44-A, 45 (Part), 50, 51, 59, 61 (a), 61 (c), 62, 63 (2), 65, 66, 67,
68, 69 and 92(2).

Date : Date :
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIAL FOR

ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL ITEMS
Unless otherwise mentioned by one of the approved makes or brands shall be allowed
to be used. Other specified ISI mark may be allowed to be used if approved by
CIDCO.
The contractor shall distinctly understand that it will not be their prerogative to insist on
a particular brand from the list. Final selection will be done with approval of the
CIDCO.
Contractors shall specify for what brand they have quoted in case there is a large
variation in the rates of different approved brands.
In case of delivery of any other serious problem which may affect the progress of the
work the alternative make other than mentioned below may be approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge on written request. However, the final decision of CIDCO will be
binding on the contractor in the regard.
The contractor shall submit samples of all materials other than heavy equipment and
obtain prior approval before procurement at site.
Sr.
Particulars Proposed List of Approved Makes
No.
1 2 3
PVC Wires & Cables:
M/s. Incom Cables Pvt. Ltd, M/s. Tirupati

Plastomatics Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Dynamic Cables Pvt.
Ltd., M/s. Paramount Communications Ltd., M/s.
PVC Insulated 1.1 KV C&S Electric Ltd., M/s. Phinoleex J-Power Systems
1
grade LT Cable Ltd., KEI Industries Ltd., M/s. Gemscab Industries
Ltd., KEC International Ltd. (RPG Make Asian
Brand), Vardhaman, (Bharat Cab), Ravin,
Dasmesh (Vishal), Gulmarg, Polycab
M/s. Incom Cables Pvt. Ltd, M/s.Tirupati
2 XLPE - LT Cables Ltd., M/s. Paramount Communications Ltd., M/s.
C&S Electric Ltd., M/s. Phinoleex J-Power Systems
Ltd., KEI Industries Ltd., M/s. Gemscab Industries
Sr.
No.
1 2 3
Ltd., KEC International Ltd. (RPG Make Asian

Brand), Vardhaman, (Bharat Cab), Ravin,
Dasmesh (Vishal), Gulmarg. Polycab,
M/s.Incom Cables Pvt. Ltd, M/s.Tirupati
Ltd., M/s. Paramount Communications Ltd., M/s.
XLPE-HT cables upto Phinoleex J-Power Systems Ltd., KEI Industries Ltd.,
3
33 KV M/s. Gemscab Industries Ltd., KEC International
Ltd. (RPG Make Asian Brand), Vardhaman, (Bharat
Cab), Ravin, Dasmesh(Vishal), Gulmarg, Polycab,
Torrent, Asian, Universal.
M/s.Incom Cables Pvt. Ltd, M/s.Tirupati
Ltd., M/s. Paramount Communications Ltd.,
PVC Wires, Copper
M/s.Phinoleex J-Power Systems Ltd., KEI Industries
4 Aluminium Conductor,
Ltd., M/s.Gemscab Industries Ltd., KEC
Flexible Cables.
International Ltd. (RPG Make Asian Brand),
Vardhaman, (Bharat Cab), Ravin, Dasmesh
(Vishal), Gulmarg. Polycab, Indo Asian.
Heat Shrinkable Cable Raychem, Xicon, Benson, Mahindra (Push on) M-
5
Jointing Kit Seal, Yamuna
6 Cable Glands HME, EEW, Dowels.
7 Lugs Dowels, Lotus, A.G. Electricals.
M/s. Pentax Ferro Incorporate, M/s.Bravo Cable
8 Cable Tray-Ladder Type
Trays Pvt. Ltd., Sadhana, Profab, Indiana, Sharda.
M/s.Tirupati Plastomatics Pvt. Ltd., M/s.Dynamic
Cables Pvt Ltd., V.K. Industries, Smita Conductors,
9 ASCR Conductors
Bombay Conductors Straight, MSEDCL Approved
Make
PVC Pipes, Rigid PVC
M/s. Pricision Electricals, M/s. Super Plast Co.,
Conduits & Casing-N-
10 M/s.Tirupati Plastomatics Pvt. Ltd., Duraline,
Caping, DWC HDPE
Garware, Popular, Prince.
Pipes
Sr.
No.
1 2 3
Switches, Switchgears
M/s C&S Electric Ltd., M/s HPL Electric & Power Pvt.
Ltd., M/s Megawin Switchgear Pvt. Ltd., Indo Asian
Standard Electrical, Leader Electricals (Leader
11 MCB, ELCB, RCCB
Aplha Brand), Legrand, Anchor, L&T, Siemens,
Bentec, Schnider Electric, Merlin Jerin,
Hager,Hawells.
M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s HPL Electric & Power

Pvt. Ltd., M/s Megawin Switchgear Pvt. Ltd.,
12 MCCB Standard Electrical, Indo Asian, Legrand,
Switchgears, Anchor , L&T, Siemens, Bentec,
Schnider Electric, Merlin Jerin, Hager, Hawells.

Isolators/Disconnectors,
Pvt. Ltd., M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s Megawin
13 LV Switch gear/ Switch
Switchgear Pvt. Ltd., Standard Electrical, Indo
fuses.
Asian, Legrand, L &T

Pvt. Ltd., M/s Megawin Switchgear Pvt.Ltd., Indo
Distribution Board / Bus
14 Asian Switchgear, Standard Electrical, Legrand,
Duct
Esprit Switchgear Ltd., Indiana Current Control
(Versatrip)
M/s C & S Electric Ltd., Precision Electricals,

15 Switches/Sockets
Anchor, MK, Legrand, Elleys,
HC Fuse Distribution M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s HPL Electric & Power
16
Board Pvt. Ltd., CPL, Stenly, EE, Standard, Legrand
17 Rotary/Select Switches L&T , Siemens, Kaycee, EE
M/s C & S Electric Ltd. M/s HPL Electric & Power

18 HRC Fuses & bases
Pvt. Ltd., Indo Asian Switchgear, Hawell's India Ltd.
19 Fuse switches/SW fuse M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s HPL Electric & Power
Pvt. Ltd., L&T, Siemens, Crompton,
Sr.
No.
1 2 3
Telemechanique, Havells, Indo-Asian, EE,

Standard, Legrand, Anchor
M/s Megawin Switchgear Pvt. Ltd., M/s C & S

Ring Main Unit/HT
20 Electric Ltd. MEI, Southern, Andrew Yule, Schneider,
switches & Fuse Unit
ABB, CG Lucy, MSEDCL Approved
M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s Megawin Switchgear

Pvt. Ltd., Kilburn, Easun, MEI, Jyoti, Andrew Yule,
Air/Oil Circuit Breakers
21 Indo Asian, Siemens, L&T, GEC, Southern, BHEL,
(HT/LT)
Telemechanique, Crompton, ABB, Schnider,
MSEDCL Approved
M/s C & S Electric Ltd., GEC, Khatau-Junkar,

22 Capacitor Crompton, L&T, Madhav, Atlanta, Arya,
Prabhodhan, MSEDCL Approved
Luminaries, HID Lamps, High Mast Systems & Poles
LED Fixtures M/s.C&S Electric Ltd., M/s.Shakti Fixtures Pvt. Ltd.,

M/s.Halonix Technilogies Ltd., Polycab, Philips,
23
Bajaj, Crompton Greaves, OSRAM, Syska. M/s.
Surya Roshani Ltd.
M/s.C&S Electric Ltd., M/s.Shakti Fixtures Pvt. Ltd.,

M/s.Halonix Technilogies Ltd, M/s. Surya Roshani
Compact Fluorescent
24 Ltd., Polycab, M/s HPL Electric & Power Pvt. Ltd.,
Lamps
Indo Asian, Philips, Crompton, Bajaj, Pierlite,
Crompton, Osram

M/s.Halonix Technilogies Ltd, M/s. Surya Roshani
25 Lamps Ltd, M/s.Skipper ltd., Polycab, M/s HPL Electric &
Power Pvt. Ltd., Indo Asian, Philips, Crompton,
Bajaj, Crompton, Osram,Wipro,Cema.
Street Light Luminaries /
26 M/s.Skipper Ltd., M/s.Halonix Technilogies Ltd,
High Mast Luminaries
M/s. Surya Roshani Ltd., Polycab, M/s. HPL Electric
Sr.
No.
1 2 3
& Power Pvt. Ltd., Indo Asian, Philips, Crompton,

Bajaj, Crompton, Wipro, Canara, Syska.
M/s.Skipper Ltd., M/s.Halonix Technilogies Ltd,
M/s. Surya Roshani Ltd, Polycab, M/s. HPL Electric
27 Fluorescent Fixtures
& Power Pvt. Ltd., Indo Asian, Philips, Crompton,
Bajaj, Crompton,Wipro,Canara,Syska, Genlec,
keselec,Glolite,Fixolite Industries,Pierlite,
M/s.Skipper Ltd., M/s.Halonix Technilogies Ltd,
28 Post top Lantern M/s. Surya Roshani Ltd., Polycab, M/s HPL Electric
& Power Pvt. Ltd., Philips, Crompton, Bajaj,
Parimal,Wipro.
M/s C & S Electric Ltd., M/s Surya Roshni Ltd.,

M/s.Skipper Ltd., M/s. Halonix Technologies Ltd.,
Chokes/Ignitors/Electro
29 Shakti Fixtures Ltd., Polycab, M/s HPL Electric &
nic Ballast
Power Pvt. Ltd., Bajaj, Crompton, Philips, Wipro,
Canara, Osaram.

M/s.Skipper Ltd., M/s. Halonix Technologies Ltd.,
Shakti Fixtures Ltd., Polycab, L&T, Siemens, Bharti
30 Power Contactors
Cutler, Hammer, Telemechanique, HH-ELCON,
Standard, Kirloskar, Crompton, Indo Asian,
Schnider

31 Indicating Lamps M/s.Skipper Ltd., M/s. Halonix Technologies Ltd.,
Shakti Fixtures Ltd., Polycab, Teknic, L&T, Siemens.
32 RSJ Pole Sail, Tata, Zenith, Jindal, MSEDCL Approved
M/s Skipper Limited, Bombay Tubes, Nityanand,

33 Steel tubular Poles
Rajan Tubes, M/s. Transrail Lighting Ltd.
Sr.
No.
1 2 3
M/s Skipper Limited. Zenith, Tata, Bajaj, M/s.

34 GI Octagonal Poles
Transrail Lighting Ltd.
M/s Skipper Limited, M/s.Surya Roshani Ltd. Bajaj,

35 G.I. Highmast
Philips, Crompton, B.P., Transrail Lighting Ltd.
Terminal Box, Bracket,

ELM, United, Indo Asian, Super Panels, Anil
36 Junction Box, Control
Electric, BNN Power, Sintex
Pillar.
Street Light L&T (TSQ 100) 24 Hrs. Dial & Astronomical Timer
37
Controller/Timer Based, ELM, Surya, Selectron
38 HT/LT Insulator Kiran, Pactil, MSEDCL Approved
Jehnson & Nicholson, Asian Nerolac, Berger Paints
39 Pole Paint
India Ltd.
M/s BNN Power Siemens, Allen Bradley, Honewell,
40 Energy Saver Device
ABB, Crompton, Bajaj, Philips.
Feeder Pillar/Mini Pillar/ Anil Elect. Indo Asian, Super Panels, BNN Power,
41
LT Panel MSEDCL Approved, M/s. Vivid Electromech Pvt. Ltd
Ceiling / Table Fans / Usha, Crompton, Bajaj, Cinni, Rallies, Orient,
42
Air Circulators Polar, Almonard, Alfa., Havells
Crompton Greaves, Kirloskar, Jyoti, BHEL,
43 Motors
NGEF,Marathon.
M/s.C&S Electric Ltd. Universal, Thresold, E.E.,
44 Motor Protection Relays
Minilac, Siemens, Indo-Asian, L&T.
M/s.Megawin Switchgear Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Nanda

Trasformers, Tesla Transformers Ltd., Telawne
45 Transformer
Power Equipment Pvt.Ltd., Kirloskar, Bharat Bijlee,
Crompton, Andrew Yule, Pactil, MSEDCL Approved
G.O.D. Switches & Kiran, Pactil, Atlas, Cona Industries, Leader

46
Dropout fuse outfit. Electricals, Elle Electricals.
Sr.
No.
1 2 3
47 C.T./P.T. Hupken/Shriram.
Auto Transformer MEI, Kilburn, JMP, Siemens, Andrew Yule, GEC,
48
Starter KEC.
49 Trivector Meter Jaipur, L&T, Automatic Electric, MSEDCL Approved
Jaipur,Indo Asia, Meco, IMP, Rishbh, Automatic
50 Energy Meters - Analog Electric, M/s. HPL Electric & Power Pvt Ltd., L&T,
MSEDCL Approved
M/s. HPL Electric & Power Pvt Ltd., AE, Enercon,
51 Energy Meter-Digital
Schneider, L&T, MSEDCL Approved
52 Measuring Instruments IMP, AE,, MECO, L&T.
53 Current Transformer AE, Gilbert & Maxwell, IMP, Siemens, SEGC (C.S).
Kirloskar, Jyoti, NGEF, KEL, Cater Pillar, Stamford,
54 Alternators
Crompton Greaves.
Kirloskar, Greaves Cotton, Cummins, Ashok
55 Diesel Generator Set
Leyland, Cater Piller, Mahindra.
56 Flow Meters Signet, Monetek, Voryex.
M/s. AVK Valves India Pvt. Ltd., M/s.Durga Valves
Pvt. Ltd., M/s. Kamala Valves and Engineering Pvt.
Ltd, M/s. Sigma Flow Control Pvt. Ltd, M/s.
57 Non Return Valve
Avishkar Engineers Pvt.Ltd, M/s. Jupiter Engineering
Co., M/s.Shree Balaji Industries, Kirloskar, IVC,
Forbes.

Ltd,M/s. Sigma Flow Control Pvt. Ltd, M/s. Avishkar
58 Hydrant Valves
Engineers Pvt.Ltd, M/s. Jupiter Engineering Co.,
M/s.Shree Balaji Industries, Kirloskar, Priyanka,
Newage, Arihant, Superex, Essel.
59 Chlorinator Penwalt, Shree Mitra Purification, Industrial Device.

Sr.
No.
1 2 3
60 Hose Pipe Torent, Firemarshal, Firechief, Armtech.
61 Pressure Gauge Age, Guru, Febique.
62 Pressure Switch Danfoss, Infose, Precision.
63 Gun Metal Valve Sant, Zoloto.

64 Sluice Valve Avishkar Engineers Pvt. Ltd, M/s. Jupiter
Engineering Co., M/s.Shree Balaji Industries,
Kirloskar, IVC, Gavane & Patil, Kalpana, Jash,
Forbes, Aarcp, Jolta, Sant
65 Butterfly Valve Avishkar Engineers Pvt. Ltd, M/s. Jupiter
Engineering Co., M/s.Shree Balaji Industries,
Kirloskar, M/s.Dynamic Valves Pvt Ltd., IVC,
Gavane & Patil, Kalpana, Jash, Forbes.
M/s.Aqua Machineries Pvt. Ltd., M/s. CRI
Submersible Pump/
Pumps Pvt. Ltd., Crompton Greaves, Kirloskar,
66 Horizontal Pumps/VT
Mather & Platt, , KSB, Kishor, Flowmore, ABS,
Pumps
Grundfos, Flygt, Jyoti
Fire Fighting System:
M/s.United Fire Equipments Pvt. Ltd., Morley/

67 Smoke Detectors
Honeyweel, Simense, Edward, Apollo
Fire Alarm Control M/s.United Fire Equipments Pvt. Ltd. Morley/

68
Panel. Honeyweel, Simense, Edward, Apollo

69 Hooters/ Sounder Honeyweel, Simense, Edward, Apollo,Shir
Electronics, Philips, Bajaj.
Sr.
No.
1 2 3

70 Manual Call Points
M/s.United Fire Equipments Pvt.Ltd., Morley/
71 Addressable Modules
M/s.United Fire Equipments Pvt.Ltd., Neolex / Lapp
72 Fire Alarm
India / Geoflex.
73 Fire Detection System Honeywell, Siemens
74 Access Control System HID, Honeywell, Europlex, Schnider
VESDA (Smoke
75 Honeywell, Xtralis, Simense
Detection System)
Water Leak Detection
76 Sontay, Raychem
(WLD) System
Cummins, Pai-Kane, Ashok Leyland, Volvo Panta,
77 Diesel Engine
Kirloskar, Greaves Cotton, Cater Piller, Mahindra
78 UPS System Emerson, Numeric, APC, Microtek, Sukoya
Carrier, Blue Star, Samsung, Daikin, Hitachi, O
79 Hi-wall Split AC
General, LG, Whirlpool, Voltas
80 BMS System Honeywell, Siemens, Beckhoffm.
81 Load Manager Enercon / Sam / Krykard / Conzerve.
82 Lead Acid Battery Exide / Amco / Yuasa / Amar Raja/ Standard/
83 Solar Panels M/s.C&S Electric Ltd., Moser Baer, Jain, TATA .
M/s Hephzi Elevators International Company Pvt.
Ltd., M/s ThyssenKrupp Elevator (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
84 Elevators / Escalators
Shindler India Ltd., Escon Elevators Ltd., Kone,
Eros, Otis, Mithsubishi.
85 Rodent Repellant System Maser
86 False Floor System Unitile, Kebao
87 False Ceiling System Arm strong, Techno
Communication/ Telephone Cables:
Co-Axial, Telephone,
88 Bonton, Finolex, Polycab
Fire Cable
89 TV cable Delton, National, Havels, Polycab, Phinolex

Sr.
No.
1 2 3
KEC International Ltd. (RPG Make Asian Brand),

90 Data Signal Cable APAR Industries Ltd., Enercon / Lapp India,
Polycab.
KEI Industries Ltd., KEC International Ltd. (RPG

Control Cable with
91 Make Asian Brand), APAR Industries Ltd., Enercon /
Copper Conductor
Lapp India, Polycab., Finolex, Polycab, Bonton,.
Music Wire / Speaker

Lapp India / Falcon / Supercab / Molex/ Polycab,
92 Cable / Signal Cable
Crystal
CAT6
93 Data Cabling ADC Krone/ Tyco, Digilink, AMP, Systimax

94 EPABX Matrix, Panasonic,NEC
95 PA System Honeywell, Philips, Ahuja, Bosch, ATIES
96 Audio System Bosch, Philips, EV, JBL, Sony, Panasonic, Pioneer.
97 CCTV System Honeywell, Europlex, Soney, Optix, Panasonic.
98 PAC Emerson, Stulz, Uniflair,APC, Liebert
99 Media Safe Godrej
100 Furniture Featherlite, Godrej
101 Water Cooler Voltas, Blue Star, Usha
Kent, Eureka Forbes, Hindustan Pureit,
102 Water Purifier
Aquanguard, Alpha.
M/s Orange Electrodes Industries, M/s. Weldwell
103 Welding Electrode
Electrodes.
104 Chain Pulley Block Elephanta, Herculas, WMI.
M/s. Kejrival Casting Ltd., M/s. Electrosteel steels
Ltd., M/s.Srikalahasthi Pipes Ltd., M/s.Jai Balaji
105 C.I./D.I./G.I. Pipes Industries, M/s.Electrotherm (I) Ltd., M/s.Topworth
Pipes and Tubes Pvt. Ltd. Lanco Industries Ltd.,
Jindal Saw Ltd., Tisco, Sail, Damoder, Shivdurg
M/s Bharat Metal Pressing Industries,
106 RCC Pipes M/s.Sidhivinayak Precast Pipe Pvt Ltd., M/s. Shivam
Industries, M/s.Pranali Cement Pipes Pvt Ltd., M/s
Sr.
No.
1 2 3
Monika Industries, M/s Bharat Spun Pipe Industries,

M/s Shivani Pipe Industries Pvt.Ltd.,.
M/s Megawin Switchgear Pvt. Ltd., M/s.C&S Electric

107 VCB & RMU Panel Ltd., M/s. Vivid Electromech Pvt. Ltd, MSEDCL
Approved.
M/s. United Fire Equipment Pvt.Ltd. Intine,

108 Fire Extinguisher
Universal, Sapex, Naaz, Vintex
Note:
Contractor shall submit samples of materials and obtain prior approval of Engineer In-
charge before procurement of any of the materials enlisted above and should ensure
that the said product complies with specifications provided in schedule & Technical
specification.
Unless and otherwise mentioned the make/brand mentioned under BOQ item shall
only be used. The contractor shall distinctly understand that it will not be their
prerogative to insist on a particular brand from the list. The bidders shall quote the
rates accordingly.
In case of delivery of any serious problem which may affect the progress of the work the
alternative makes mentioned above or equivalent make other than mentioned above may
be approved by the Engineer-In-Charge on a written request if required. However the
final decision of the Engineer-In-Charge will be binding on the contractor in this regard.
Any other vendor not included in the above approved make but having valid registration
with CIDCO shall be considered.
In future any vendor registered /approved products during tender/contract period, the
same will be considered subject to valid registration with CIDCO.
MSEDCL approved makes shall be applicable only for MSEDCL work carried out by
CIDCO with the conditions mentioned above.

Date : Date :
LIST OF DRAWINGS
Name of Work : Renovation & Replacement of Electrical Installations & Fire Fighting
System at Juinagar Railway Station cum Commercial Complex on MBR
Corridor, Navi Mumbai.
C.A. No. : 33/CIDCO/EE(Elect-RP)/2017-18
Sr.
Particulars Drawing No.
No.
1. SLD / Cable Layout 33/CIDCO/EE(Elect-RP)/2017-18/01

2. Master SLD 33/CIDCO/EE(Elect-RP)/2017-18/02
3. Hydrant System Layout 33/CIDCO/EE(Elect-RP)/2017-18/03
4. Fire Detection & Alarm System Layout-1 33/CIDCO/EE(Elect-RP)/2017-18/04
5. Fire Detection & Alarm System Layout-2 33/CIDCO/EE(Elect-RP)/2017-18/05
NOTE :
1) These drawings are for Bid purpose only.

2) All the drawing should be returned duly signed by the Bidders at the time of
Submission of Bid.

Date : Date :

Tnd002279000000000000mah34102 PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Tnd002279000000000000mah34102 PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

CIDCO OF MAHARASHTRA LIMITED. Sl.Pg.No.

CITY & INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION OF

VOLUME–II : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

C.A. No. : 33/CIDCO/EE(Elect-RP)/2017-18

Due On : 19/12/2017 17.01 hrs. to 20/12/2017 17.00 hrs. on website

¾ VOLUME – I : Contract Conditions & Bill of Quantities (BOQ)

Name of Work : Renovation & Replacement of Electrical Installations & Fire

VOLUME–II : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

SR. Page Number

SR. Page Number

18 Technical Specification for Installation 136 143

IV Codes and Standards 316 319

V List of Approved Makes of Material for 320 330

VI List of Drawings 331 331

VII Drawings 332 336

Signature of Bidder Superintending Engineer (Elect-Proj.)

SCOPE OF WORK (ELECTRICAL)

Broadly the electrical works covers the following :

i) Providing internal electrification

ii) Installation of CCTV/telecommunication system.

iii) Fire fighting installation.

iv) Area/forecourt Street lighting

v) External electrification which includes Substation and allied works.

vi) Obtaining power supply to the Railway Complex.

vii) CCTV and telecommunication network.

ix) Co-ordination with CIDCO/NMMC /MSEDCL/ Railway/PWD/Fire Dept. /

The Scope of work consists of :

1.0 Electrification work with providing LED Fittings of Railway &

a) Laying of LT Cable network

b) Providing 62.5 KVA D.G. Set

c) Fire Fighting System

d) Fire Detection Alarm System, Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System

e) Providing Main LT Panels

g) Cables & Terminations work, Cable tray

h) Earthing & Safety Systems

i) Installation of CCTV / Telecommunication System

j) Providing Switch Sockets, Point wiring,

k) LED Light Fixtures

l) Street Light Poles

m) Allied Civil works

n) Dismantling existing old Electrical / Mechanical / D.G. Set

o) Definition of Indoor Substation:

11/0.4KV Indoor Substation means distribution transformers, 11 KV

The Scope of work also includes obtaining power supply sanctions

3.0 Providing & Commissioning of :

a) Laying of LT Cable network

b) Providing 62.5 KVA D.G. Set

c) Fire Fighting System

d) Fire Detection Alarm System, Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System

e) Providing Main LT Panels

g) Cables & Terminations work, Cable tray

h) Earthing & Safety Systems

i) Installation of CCTV / Telecommunication System

j) Providing Switch Sockets, Point wiring,

k) LED Light Fixtures

l) Street Light Poles

m) Allied Civil works

n) Dismantling existing old Electrical / Mechanical / D.G. Set

o) 11/0.4 KV substation equipments, indoor type with 11/0.4 KV

p) L.T. Distribution network consisting of feeder pillars/minipillars

q) All related allied works like trenching, control wiring of panels,

1.0 The entire electrical works should be carried out in accordance

items such as cables, earthing material, trays, lighting fixtures,